Short e-mail reminders are sent out twice a week: Monday and Friday. They redirect you to an online reminder that includes events scheduled each weekend, plus special messages. Click link below to read the latest WEEKEND EVENTS
Donations made easy through PayPal.
Thank you very much.
Each title is a link to that article; and a link bar is provided at the end of each article to help you navigate the site.
This section contains articles by guest authors. All are copyrighted with all rights reserved. Permission to repost is generally granted provided all credits and contact information is included in posting. Please contact author directly for confirmation.
NOTE: To print out an article or portion thereof, simply highlight the text you wish to print, click the "File" menu, then click "Print," then choose "selection" when it asks for page range. It will only send the selected text to your printer.
Most Americans may soon be banned from traveling overseas; and US may also restrict imports under new regime. The United States is facing regime change as a result of the nation's imminent bankruptcy, according to high level CIA sources in Washington and also senior MI6 sources. The information reaching us is that all the State governments except Florida, Washington and California are backing a return to constitutional law. The Pentagon is also on the program with people like General's Schwarskopf and Stubblemeyer leading the patriotic forces. There is talk of action starting this week and the photo of Obama on March 26th shows us he is clearly worried and stressed out about something.
The new regime may take some drastic measures on the economy as a result of the bankruptcy of the Federal Government, the sources say. These measures would include restrictions on imports so the US can rebuild its manufacturing base. There may also be severe restrictions placed on the amount of Americans allowed to travel overseas. These measures are designed to eliminate the US's structural external deficit as quickly as possible.
The various states, together with the Pentagon and the Supreme Court will take over, at least temporarily, the powers to create currency. They will replace Federal Reserve promissory or debt notes with a new currency. They will exchange Federal Reserve promissory notes for the new currency at a fixed rate within a 30-day period. The 90% of US dollars owned by non-Americans are likely to be converted into other currencies. The Chinese are actively considering offering gold and commodities backed Hong Kong dollars in exchange for valid (i.e. Not created through derivatives fraud) US dollars. The Japanese, the Russians, the Europeans and others may also offer to exchange the overseas US dollars for their own currencies.
It is still not decided if the new US currency will be the Amero or something else but signs are that it will be something else, probably a new type of Greenback. The British are actively using their influence to remove New World Order traitor Harper and his government and not allow him to hand Canadian sovereignty over to the Washington D.C. Criminal cabal. That is why the Amero idea looks like it will not float.
The final shape of the soon to be announced international debt jubilee is also starting to appear. The latest news from our sources is that international financial obligations between nation states will be reset to 1916 levels. That is because although the Federal Reserve Board act was passed in 1913, it did not go into action until 1916.
Hopefully this will be accompanied by a much needed telling of the real truth behind the horrific tragedy and wasted opportunity that was the 20th century.
Pentagon people have contacted the Black Dragon Society and have indicated they are going actively start developing free energy technology for civilian use. The main technology they are pushing is the Stirling engines they currently use to power their missiles (have you ever wondered how a cruise missile can travel thousands of miles without giant fuel tanks?). Since at least 6,000, and probably a lot more, inventions have been suppressed in the name of "national security" we can expect a lot more wonders to emerge soon from the bowels of the Pentagon.
Several different major financial institutions including the Hong Kong and Shanghai Bank, Credit Agricole, Mizuho Bank and the People's Bank of China have begun creating funds dedicated to the development and application of the various suppressed technologies. Once the various T's are crossed and I's dotted then hundreds of billions of dollars will become available to finance the new technology as well as to finance an end to poverty and the repair of global Eco-systems.
In Japan, meanwhile, pressure is steadily being increased on New World Order and Trilateral Commission hold outs led by former Prime Minister Nakasone. The system of worshipping the Emperor as a symbol will continue in Japan. However, the Japanese right-wing now realizes that ever since Emperor Hirohito died, the emperor became merely a symbol for David Rockefeller and his Federal Reserve Board crime syndicate lackeys in Japan.
The new system will be headed by an informal group of Japan's most intelligent and powerful people. They will act as a shadow government that will step in only if Japan's democratic and bureaucratic institutions show signs of becoming dysfunctional. The Emperor will once again become a truly Japanese symbol under the new system.
The Japanese right wing has also been explained that they cannot count on the United States to defend Japan against China. They know, for example, that when Obama visited China last year, he offered to give control of Japan to China as part of a proposed G2. China rejected the plan but the Japanese right wing remains wary of China nonetheless. That is why they will be seeking an alliance of countries like Russia and India -countries that actually have borders with China- to agree to protect each other from Chinese domination.
The Chinese do not see these moves as a threat because they insist their rise will be peaceful and that nobody, including Japan should worry about it. The Black Dragon Society has a reliable pipeline now to the Chinese politburo and we believe all concerned are interested in harmonious relations.
In Europe meanwhile, the secret war against Nazi influence continues unabated. The recent revelations against the German pope Ratzinger regarding his helping a pedophile in the Church are part of a campaign to purge the upper reaches of the Vatican of all Satan worshippers. The Christian rank and file of the Church is behind the move to expose these people.
The agreement by the EU to act as a last resort helper of Greece is expected to be nothing more than a time saving effort and will almost certainly not prevent the demise of the Euro. Once the new financial system kicks into gear, there may be plenty of money available to the nearly bankrupt PIIGs (Portugal, Ireland, Italy and Greece) but they will be told in no uncertain terms that they will have to earn any money they get. The economic reality facing these countries is that they will either have to lower their standard of living or else leave the Eurozone and put out a new Mediterranean currency. This will also, of course lead to a temporary drop in living standards but that is inevitable because a derivatives sugar high is always only temporary. Reality cannot be avoided forever.
Various European governments are also actively considering a new alliance with Russia and the colonization of Siberia by unemployed Europeans.
However, until the dust settles it is hard to see exactly what new institutions will arise from the ashes of the old.
The dark Cabal is still in control of much of the US media and the fake Obama regime continues in power at the time of this writing. Until we see this end, we must keep our powder dry and our wits sharp.
Are you asking yourself what to do to feel HAPPY and JOYFULL? Check this list of simple and practical suggestions!
● Choose to watch movies that give lessons about how to live a significant life, instead of those that enhance fear, rejection and bitterness. No matter how many Oscars they may win! The first one ignites the POWER within you, and liberates endorphins… the Health and Happiness hormone!
● Take full responsibility for all the situations in your life. Stop blaming others for whatever happens to you. Only YOU are the owner of your own destiny. What you live is just a natural consequence of your past choices.
● If what goes on in your life does not match your desires, review your values and believes. Pay attention! There are no “negative” situations… Look for the opportunities they bring to you.
● Practice detachment every moment you have the chance to do so. Your cloths, your books, things in the kitchen and all around the house… Your emotions and feelings, your attachment to places, things and persons. Remember that none of that is YOU! The lighter you live, the happier you feel.
● Get away from the TV, especially if you are a news-fan. You can be well informed without inundating yourself with stressing news. Use your common sense consciously concerning the time you spend in front of a TV. Exchange this for a good walk and contact with nature.
● Make a list of all the things that you enjoy doing… and DO THEM! Allow yourself to have fun, to laugh, to feel LOVE! Remember that happiness is not the goal, it’s the journey!
● Feel and express GRATITUDE every day, every moment. When you feel annoyed, frustrated, bitter, just bring to your mind a memory of something you feel deeply grateful for. Focus on what you have instead of what you lack. Remember that the more grateful you are, the more things you will have to be grateful for.
● Dream… but without getting your feet too far from the ground! Learn to balance you vision and dreams with your objective reality. Clarify your goals and see what you can do NOW to step forward towards your dreams, to make them happen for you!
● If you feel trapped or paralyzed, look for experts and ask for help. Be humble to acknowledge that you don’t know everything and that sometimes a wise helping hand is a blessing to help you step out of your stagnation. It’s OK to feel fear, just don’t let it control you! Find the courage that is present within you to overcome it.
● Ponder about how you can bring happiness, joy and wellbeing to others around you. Be gentle and kind to every being; share yourself, smile and always express a nice word to the person you interact with. Call your friends and family and let them know how much you love them.
It’s so simple!!! This is your challenge: to approach complex things with simplicity. Understand that YOU and ONLY YOU make the choice of living in grief or in the miracle!
GOOD-BYE: TRUTH HAS FALLEN AND TAKEN LIBERTY WITH IT
Paul Craig Roberts
March 24, 2010
Just who is this man that is saying this? Here's a brief bio....
Paul Craig Roberts (born April 3, 1939, in Atlanta, Georgia) is an economist and a nationally syndicated columnist for Creators Syndicate. He served as an Assistant Secretary of the Treasury in the Reagan Administration earning fame as a co-founder of Reaganomics." He is a former editor and columnist for the Wall Street Journal, Business Week, and Scripps Howard News Service. He is a graduate of the Georgia Institute of Technology and he holds a Ph.D. from the University of Virginia. He was a post-graduate at the University of California, Berkeley, and Oxford University where he was a member of Merton College. In 1992 he received the Warren Brookes Award for Excellence in Journalism. In 1993 the Forbes Media Guide ranked him as one of the top seven journalists in the United States. His writings frequently appear on OpEdNews, Antiwar.com, VDARE.com. Lew Rockwell's web site, CounterPunch, and the American Free Press. Roberts has been featured as a guest on the Political Cesspool radio show.
Roberts has been a critic of both Democratic and Republican administrations. He has written or co-written eight books, contributed chapters to numerous books and has published many articles in journals of scholarship. He has testified before congressional committees on 30 occasions on issues of economic policy. He was Distinguished Fellow at the Cato Institute from 1993 to 1996. He was a Senior Research Fellow at the Hoover Institution. From 1982 through 1993, he held the William E. Simon Chair in Political economy at the Center for Strategic and International Studies. During 1981-82 he served as Assistant Secretary of the Treasury for Economic Policy. President Reagan and Treasury Secretary Regan credited him with a major role in the Economic Recovery Tax Act of 1981, and he was awarded the Treasury Department's Meritorious Service Award for "outstanding contributions to the formulation of United States economic policy." From 1975 to 1978, Roberts served on the congressional staff, where he drafted the Kemp-Roth bill and played a leading role in developing bipartisan support for a supply-side economic policy.
In 1987 the French government recognized him as "the artisan of a renewal in economic science and policy after half a century of state interventionism" and inducted him into the Legion of Honor on March 20, 1987. The French Minister of Economics and Finance, Edouard Balladur, came from France to present the medal to Roberts at a ceremony at the French Ambassador's residence in Washington, D.C. President Reagan sent OMB Director Jim Miller to the ceremony with a letter of congratulation.
There was a time when the pen was mightier than the sword. That was a time when people believed in truth and regarded truth as an independent power and not as an auxiliary for government, class, race, ideological, personal, or financial interest.
Today Americans are ruled by propaganda. Americans have little regard for truth, little access to it, and little ability to recognize it.
Truth is an unwelcome entity. It is disturbing. It is off limits. Those who speak it run the risk of being branded “anti-American,” “anti-semite” or “conspiracy theorist.”
Truth is an inconvenience for government and for the interest groups whose campaign contributions control government.
Truth is an inconvenience for prosecutors who want convictions, not the discovery of innocence or guilt.
Truth is inconvenient for ideologues.
Today many whose goal once was the discovery of truth are now paid handsomely to hide it. “Free market economists” are paid to sell offshoring to the American people. High-productivity, high value-added American jobs are denigrated as dirty, old industrial jobs. Relicts from long ago, we are best shed of them. Their place has been taken by “the New Economy,” a mythical economy that allegedly consists of high-tech white collar jobs in which Americans innovate and finance activities that occur offshore. All Americans need in order to participate in this “new economy” are finance degrees from Ivy League universities, and then they will work on Wall Street at million dollar jobs.
Economists who were once respectable took money to contribute to this myth of “the New Economy.”
And not only economists sell their souls for filthy lucre. Recently we have had reports of medical doctors who, for money, have published in peer-reviewed journals concocted “studies” that hype this or that new medicine produced by pharmaceutical companies that paid for the “studies.”
The Council of Europe is investigating the drug companies’ role in hyping a false swine flu pandemic in order to gain billions of dollars in sales of the vaccine.
The media helped the US military hype its recent Marja offensive in Afghanistan, describing Marja as a city of 80,000 under Taliban control. It turns out that Marja is not urban but a collection of village farms.
And there is the global warming scandal, in which NGOs. the UN, and the nuclear industry colluded in concocting a doomsday scenario in order to create profit in pollution.
Wherever one looks, truth has fallen to money.
Wherever money is insufficient to bury the truth, ignorance, propaganda, and short memories finish the job.
I remember when, following CIA director William Colby’s testimony before the Church Committee in the mid-1970s, presidents Gerald Ford and Ronald Reagan issued executive orders preventing the CIA and U.S. black-op groups from assassinating foreign leaders. In 2010 the US Congress was told by Dennis Blair, head of national intelligence, that the US now assassinates its own citizens in addition to foreign leaders.
When Blair told the House Intelligence Committee that US citizens no longer needed to be arrested, charged, tried, and convicted of a capital crime, just murdered on suspicion alone of being a “threat,” he wasn’t impeached. No investigation pursued. Nothing happened. There was no Church Committee. In the mid-1970s the CIA got into trouble for plots to kill Castro. Today it is American citizens who are on the hit list. Whatever objections there might be don’t carry any weight. No one in government is in any trouble over the assassination of U.S. citizens by the U.S. government.
As an economist, I am astonished that the American economics profession has no awareness whatsoever that the U.S. economy has been destroyed by the offshoring of U.S. GDP to overseas countries. U.S. corporations, in pursuit of absolute advantage or lowest labor costs and maximum CEO “performance bonuses,” have moved the production of goods and services marketed to Americans to China, India, and elsewhere abroad. When I read economists describe offshoring as free trade based on comparative advantage, I realize that there is no intelligence or integrity in the American economics profession.
Intelligence and integrity have been purchased by money. The transnational or global U.S. corporations pay multi-million dollar compensation packages to top managers, who achieve these “performance awards” by replacing U.S. labor with foreign labor. While Washington worries about “the Muslim threat,” Wall Street, U.S. corporations and “free market” shills destroy the U.S. economy and the prospects of tens of millions of Americans.
Americans, or most of them, have proved to be putty in the hands of the police state.
Americans have bought into the government’s claim that security requires the suspension of civil liberties and accountable government. Astonishingly, Americans, or most of them, believe that civil liberties, such as habeas corpus and due process, protect “terrorists,” and not themselves. Many also believe that the Constitution is a tired old document that prevents government from exercising the kind of police state powers necessary to keep Americans safe and free.
Most Americans are unlikely to hear from anyone who would tell them any different.
I was associate editor and columnist for the Wall Street Journal. I was Business Week’s first outside columnist, a position I held for 15 years. I was columnist for a decade for Scripps Howard News Service, carried in 300 newspapers. I was a columnist for the Washington Times and for newspapers in France and Italy and for a magazine in Germany. I was a contributor to the New York Times and a regular feature in the Los Angeles Times. Today I cannot publish in, or appear on, the American “mainstream media.”
For the last six years I have been banned from the “mainstream media.” My last column in the New York Times appeared in January, 2004, coauthored with Democratic U.S. Senator Charles Schumer representing New York. We addressed the offshoring of U.S. jobs. Our op-ed article produced a conference at the Brookings Institution in Washington, D.C. and live coverage by C-Span. A debate was launched. No such thing could happen today.
For years I was a mainstay at the Washington Times, producing credibility for the Moony newspaper as a Business Week columnist, former Wall Street Journal editor, and former Assistant Secretary of the U.S. Treasury. But when I began criticizing Bush’s wars of aggression, the order came down to Mary Lou Forbes to cancel my column.
The American corporate media does not serve the truth. It serves the government and the interest groups that empower the government.
America’s fate was sealed when the public and the anti-war movement bought the government’s 9/11 conspiracy theory. The government’s account of 9/11 is contradicted by much evidence. Nevertheless, this defining event of our time, which has launched the US on interminable wars of aggression and a domestic police state, is a taboo topic for investigation in the media. It is pointless to complain of war and a police state when one accepts the premise upon which they are based.
These trillion dollar wars have created financing problems for Washington’s deficits and threaten the U.S. dollar’s role as world reserve currency. The wars and the pressure that the budget deficits put on the dollar’s value have put Social Security and Medicare on the chopping block. Former Goldman Sachs chairman and U.S. Treasury Secretary Hank Paulson is after these protections for the elderly. Fed chairman Bernanke is also after them. The Republicans are after them as well. These protections are called “entitlements” as if they are some sort of welfare that people have not paid for in payroll taxes all their working lives.
With over 21 per cent unemployment as measured by the methodology of 1980, with American jobs, GDP, and technology having been given to China and India, with war being Washington’s greatest commitment, with the dollar over-burdened with debt, with civil liberty sacrificed to the “war on terror,” the liberty and prosperity of the American people have been thrown into the trash bin of history.
The militarism of the U.S. and Israeli states, and Wall Street and corporate greed, will now run their course. As the pen is censored and its might extinguished, I am signing off.
FLORIDA SAYS SEVERAL STATES TO FILE HEALTHCARE LAWSUIT
MIAMI, March 22 (Reuters) - Florida's attorney general will file a lawsuit with nine other state attorneys general opposing the healthcare legislation passed by Congress, a spokeswoman said on Monday.
"The health care reform legislation passed by the U.S. House of Representatives last night clearly violates the U.S. Constitution and infringes on each state's sovereignty," Florida Attorney General Bill McCollum, a Republican, said in a prepared statement announcing a news conference.
"On behalf of the State of Florida and of the Attorneys General from South Carolina, Nebraska, Texas, Utah, Pennsylvania, Washington, North Dakota, South Dakota and Alabama if the President signs this bill into law, we will file a lawsuit to protect the rights and the interests of American citizens." (Reporting by Michael Connor, Editing by Chizu Nomiyama)
I'm not especially a fan of McCollum, but I applaud what he is doing. I know I will NEVER buy mandated health insurance, so this is one time I am happy my state is protecting my freedom to choose to be or not to be insured. I'm for single-payer, putting an end to the insurance companies. Of course, as I see it, once the truth about things becomes known by the majority, cures for many diseases that have been repressed will be realased and we won't need it as we seem to do now.
THE CRIME OF THE CENTURY: CENTRALIZED, FRACTIONAL RESERVE BANKING
By Murray N. Rothbard
We, as Americans, are now taking all the blame, again, for the actions of a handful of reprobates in the public sector. We elect them to office, they do the bidding of internationalist corporate cartels, they screw us , and make us look like fools, thieves, and murderers to the rest of the world. The only benefit to WE The People, is WE get to pay for it all. We pay for it with the lives of our young, our personal liberty, and of course, our money.
I wonder how average Americans will react when they finally realize they have been used as the 'debt whore of central banking' for the past 100 years and more. I wonder how average Americans will react when they finally understand they have been made into debt slaves for eight international banking families, and the money being stolen from them is being used against them, as the funding tool toward the destruction of their own country. I wonder too, how many Americans even know what 'Fractional Reserve Banking' really is, and how the sham works.
In the late 1800's the international banking cabals grew tired of spending their own money to finance their 'regime changes', empire building, and wealth accumulation, so they cooked up this neat little scheme called "fractional reserve system banking", and placed it all under the guise of 'private corporations', so they could not be held personally responsible for their crimes, should anyone discover their scheme.
In the early 1900's they began to operate this system in America, referring to their operations as 'The Federal Reserve System'. Fractional Reserve Banking is a banking system in which only a fraction of the total deposits managed by a bank must be kept in reserve. The amount of the deposits equals the amount of the reserves times the deposit multiplier. In the U.S., this system is maintained by the Federal Reserve Board.
In simple layman's terms, it works like this: 'Money' is created out of thin air. (How else could you lend TO GOVERNMENTS, or INDIVIDUALS, TEN TIMES THE AMOUNT - or more - OF THE AMOUNT OF MONEY YOU HAVE IN RESERVE / DEPOSIT)? Now you (the Fed) hold a lien over the party (US Gov, Inc) you 'lend' the 'money' to. As governments pay back - with interest - the amount of their debt - you (the Fed) end up with multiples on multiples of times MORE money than you had when you started - BECAUSE YOU HAD NOTHING TO BEGIN WITH. Even IF you (the Fed) did NOT have the amount of money ON DEPOSIT that you 'loaned' out in the beginning.
To be purposely redundant, and stated in other words, you 'lend' THIN AIR - NOTHING - and you RECEIVE BILLIONS UPON BILLIONS OF TAXPAYER DOLLARS IN RETURN. To keep the scam rolling, you (THE FED) pay LEGISLATORS TO MAKE IT 'ILLEGAL' FOR ANYONE EXCEPT YOU (THE FED) TO RUN THE same CON GAME. The producers (debt slaves) of the private sector economy come into play at this juncture, because you (the Fed) USE them to 'pay back' the 'money' you did not have in reserve to loan out in the first place. So all you (the Fed) are really doing is operating as an extortion artist, stealing hard earned money, and lifestyle, from private sector producers. What you (the Fed) really are is a destructive parasite, who uses the 'Internal Revenue Service' to execute your diabolical fraud on American producers, and victims of Central Banking cartels worldwide.
Nice work if you can get it.
Will this "Federal Reserve' con game eventually bankrupt nations? Yes. The corporate US government has been officially bankrupt since 1933, and centralized reserve 'banking' is now bankrupting the entire world economy. The Fed, in essence, when stripped of it's outer cloak of 'legitimacy', is no different than a thief who breaks into your home, and steals your money at the point of a gun. The one difference between a common thief who works alone, and the 'federal reserve system', is the common thief uses a gun, while the fed (central bankers) control armies to achieve the same goal on a much larger scale.
This article originally appeared in the October 1995 issue of The Freeman and is reprinted with permission.
UNDERMINING & OVERRIDING THE CONSTITUTION:
DISSENTERS TO BE DETAINED AS ENEMY BELLIGERENTS?
New bill allows U.S. citizens to be kidnapped and detained without trial indefinitely based on “suspected activity”
Since the establishment media is convinced that tea party members, 9/11 truthers, libertarians, Ron Paul supporters, and basically anyone with a dissenting political opinion is a likely domestic terrorist, they should be celebrating the fact that a new bill would allow the government to detain such people as “enemy belligerents” indefinitely and without trial based on their “suspected activity”.
The “Enemy Belligerent, Interrogation, Detention, and Prosecution Act of 2010,” introduced by Senators John McCain and Joseph Lieberman on Thursday with little fanfare, “sets out a comprehensive policy for the detention, interrogation and trial of suspected enemy belligerents who are believed to have engaged in hostilities against the United States by requiring these individuals to be held in military custody, interrogated for their intelligence value and not provided with a Miranda warning,” writes the Atlantic’s Marc Ambinder.
The bill does not distinguish between U.S. citizens and non-citizens, and states that “suspected belligerents” who are “considered a “high-value detainee” shall not be provided with a Miranda warning.”
A person is considered a “high value detainee” if they fulfil one of the following criteria.
(1) poses a threat of an attack on civilians or civilian facilities within the U.S. or U.S. facilities abroad; (2) poses a threat to U.S. military personnel or U.S. military facilities; (3) potential intelligence value; (4) is a member of al Qaeda or a terrorist group affiliated with al Qaeda or (5) such other matters as the President considers appropriate.
Now that the Southern Poverty Law Center and the federal government, via the MIAC report and innumerable other leaked documents, now consider virtually anyone with a dissenting opinion against the state as “posing a threat,” millions of peaceful American citizens could be swept up by this frightening dragnet of tyranny.
However, according to the bill, an individual doesn’t even have to pose a threat to be snatched, detained and interrogated – they can merely be deemed to be of “potential intelligence value” or come under the vague and sweeping mandate of “such other matters as the President considers appropriate”.
This last designation hands Obama dictator powers to have any American citizen kidnapped, detained, and interrogated on a whim.
The only proviso that even hints at some form of check or balance is the measure that states, “The High-Value Detainee Interrogation Team must make a preliminary determination whether the detainee is an unprivileged enemy belligerent within 48 hours of taking detainee into custody.”
“The High-Value Detainee Interrogation Team must submit its determination to the Secretary of Defense and the Attorney General after consultation with the Director of National Intelligence, the Director of the Federal Bureau of Investigation, and the Director of the Central Intelligence Agency. The Secretary of Defense and the Attorney General make a final determination and report the determination to the President and the appropriate committees of Congress. In the case of any disagreement between the Secretary of Defense and the Attorney General, the President will make the determination,” states the bill.
“Indefinite detention flies in the face of American values and violates this country’s commitment to the rule of law,” states Laura W. Murphy, Director of the ACLU Washington Legislative Office.
Of course, such positions from the ACLU as well as Amnesty International will only be used as grist for the neo-con propaganda mill about how the bill ought to be passed in order to avoid being “soft on terrorists,” a piece of spin still being swallowed whole by millions of conservatives who are blissfully unaware of the fact that the apparatus of the war on terror is now being aimed squarely at politically active American citizens.
“Torture, indefinite imprisonment, secret trials and limited staged hearings are the stuff of cheap dictatorships,” writes Ian McColgin. “They are the sort of idiocy we scorned in the Soviets, the Koreans and the Vietnamese. It is astonishing that we have senators and citizens even discussing this bill which is not a capitulation to terrorism – it’s the triumph of terrorism.”
Homeland Security is already implementing technology to be enforced at “security events” which purportedly reads “malintent” on behalf of an individual who passes through a checkpoint. Perhaps the video below explains just how “enemy belligerents” will be identified on American soil.
NEW YORK (WABC) - An Eyewitness News investigation talks to a police officer who reveals the pressure they are under to make quotas.
When Officer Adil Polanco dreamed of becoming a cop, it was out of a desire to help people not, he says, to harass them.
"I'm not going to keep arresting innocent people, I'm not going to keep searching people for no reason, I'm not going to keep writing people for no reason, I'm tired of this," said Adil Polanco, an NYPD Officer.
Officer Polanco says One Police Plaza's obsession with keeping crime stats down has gotten out of control. He claims Precinct Commanders relentlessly pressure cops on the street to make more arrests, and give out more summonses, all to show headquarters they have a tight grip on their neighborhoods.
"Our primary job is not to help anybody, our primary job is not to assist anybody, our primary job is to get those numbers and come back with them?" said Officer Polanco.
Eyewitness News asked, "Why do it?"
"They have to meet a quota. One arrest and twenty summonses," said Officer Polanco.
This audio recording exclusively obtained by Eyewitness News seems to back up Officer Polanco's assertion of a quota. You can listen to one officer as he lectures his rank and file officers during roll call at the 41st precinct.
"Things are not going to get any better. It's going to get a lot worse," said a police officer.
He lays out clearly that they need to bring in the numbers.
"If you think 1 and 20 is breaking your balls, guess what you're going to be doing. You're gong to be doing a lot more, a lot more than what they're saying," said the officer.
In another recording, the 41st Precinct Patrol Supervisor appears to step up the pressure to write more and more summonses:
"Next week, 25 &1, 35 & 1, and until you decide to quit this job to go to work at a Pizza Hut , this is what you're going to be doing till then. Do you understand?" asked the patrol officer.
"He's being clear, the only choice that we have is to do it," said Officer Polanco.
Eyewitness News asked, "Are you telling me they're stopping people for no reason, is that what you're saying?"
"We are stopping kids walking upstairs to their house, stopping kids going to the store, young adults. In order to keep the quota," answered Officer Polanco.
"Yeah, they locked us up for nothing," said Zebulun Colbourne.
The Colbourne brothers say they and three other friends were the victims of quotas. All were arrested a few months ago after one of them had fallen while racing each other.
Eyewitness News asked, "You fell and that's how you hurt your eye?"
"Yeah, and they just wanted to arrest us. I told them I fell but that didn't matter to them," said Elijah Colbourne.
All five were accused of engaging in tumultuous and violent conduct that caused public alarm, given a summons for unlawful assembly and locked up overnight.
Eyewitness News asked, "So you're locked up waiting to see the judge, right?"
"Yeah," answered the Colbourne brothers.
Eyewitness News asked, "Then what do they do?"
"We don't see the judge, they let us out the back door after they kept us for a day and some change," said Elijah Colbourne.
The charges were dropped, but Officer Polanco says the patrolman still got 5 summonses toward their monthly quota.
"At the end of the night you have to come back with something. You have to write somebody, you have to arrest somebody, even if the crime is not committed, the number's there. So our choice is to come up with the number," said Officer Polanco.
One Police Plaza declined our requests to interview the 41st precinct commander. But, Deputy Commissioner Paul Browne said, "Police Officers like others who receive compensation are provided productivity goals and they are expected to work."
Officer Polanco says if they are just goals, why are officers who fail to make them, re-assigned to different shifts or relocated far from home.
It's the consequences of not making the numbers or quotas, he says, that forces officers to give out bogus summonses.
"I cannot be more honest than I've been. There's no reason for me to lie, there's no reason for me to get into the trouble I am, cause I just could've kept quiet and made the money," said Officer Polanco.
If you have a tip about this or any other issue you'd like investigated, please give our tipline a call at 877-TIP-NEWS. You may also e-mail us at firstname.lastname@example.org and follow Jim Hoffer on Twitter at twitter.com/nycinvestigates
March 1: Report on negotiations with the illuminati in Italy
Negotiations between representatives of the illuminati and the Black Dragon Society in Italy between February 17 and 24th were productive and friendly. Meetings took place between myself as special ambassador for the BDS and an illuminati "mastermind," a French General, a representative of Italian Prime Minister Berlusconi and Russia's Putin, a Vatican representative, a representative for former US Vice-President Cheney, a representative of Wall Street, a representative of the Saudi Royal family and others. The overall conclusion was that free energy and other forbidden technology should be developed and deployed in a manner that does not disrupt current businesses and governments.
The most important discussions were with the "mastermind," who seemed to be in a position of authority over most of the other people I met (with the clear exception of Putin's representative). He expressed various European and American concerns. The first was that the West did not want to submit to Chinese rule. We made it very clear that Asian countries were making a 50/50 deal with the West. The best way to describe the essential mechanism behind the proposed new financial system is to think of two people sitting across a table from each other each pointing a gun. If the person on the other side is a beautiful woman or handsome man, you may decide to make love. If it is a disgusting man coming to rape you, you may decide to fight. If it is someone who does not interest you in any way, you may decide to walk away.
The mastermind also expressed puzzlement at why Asian countries suddenly stopped investing in the West. "We helped them modernize their economies so why are they doing this to us?" he asked. We explained that Asian countries wanted to invest their hard earned dollars in high-tech, in building schools and bridges, in ending poverty, in helping the West rebuild in infrastructure in fact in anything except a giant military industrial murder machine.
The other big concern was that if hydrocarbons became obsolete, governments would lose a large source of tax revenue and that vast amounts of people would become unemployed. We explained that instead of sticking straws into the ground to suck out oil, the big energy companies could do things like build vast desalination plants and dig huge canals to turn the deserts green. The Sahara alone is three times the size of Australia and if turned green it could provide homes for billions of people as well as land for vast new nature preserves.
The Illuminati in Italy, we learned on this trip, are members of the old Roman aristocratic families who intermarried over the generations to keep their bloodlines "pure." They claim to have ruled humanity since before ancient Egypt according to a divine plan they were entrusted with. They worship the sun and practice other pagan rituals inside Catholic churches after closing hours. According to their belief system something known as the procession of the equinoxes will take place in 2012 at which point their rule will end and the Age of Aquarius will start.
According to them, a German based Cabal, known as the Thule society did not want to relinquish control over the planet and were instead plotting to set up a 1,000 year Nazi Reich. To implement this rule, they planned to murder over 4 billion humans and enslave the rest. However, now it appears the Mediterranean countries, France, England and Russia have joined the BDS in opposition to this plan.
This means the Nazi power base is being reduced to Washington D.C., Germany and some Nordic countries. One sign of this is that the Mediterranean countries are now seriously contemplating abandoning the Euro and setting up a new Mediterranean currency.
In a clear sign of rats deserting a sinking ship, Cheney's representative said Cheney was not a real power broker but rather a think tank type of guy who just followed orders. We said we would work with anybody, including Cheney and his group, if they agreed to join the campaign to end poverty, end war, stop environmental destruction and develop the forbidden technologies.
The only representative who did not appear willing to compromise was the man from Wall Street. He was told in no uncertain terms that the big Wall Street firms that own the Federal Reserve Board will have to eliminate all the dollars created through fraudulent derivatives or they would remain isolated from the rest of the world's financial system. He was also told the new technology would be developed and that they had better join the bandwagon or get left behind. He did not provide any clear answer.
However, in a sign these people do not plan to go quietly into the night, the Washington D.C. crime syndicate fired up HAARP again and hit Chile in response to the setting up of a new Latin American Federation that exclude the US and its puppet rogue government in Honduras.
Their time is limited nonetheless because multiple investigations are closing in on them. Among other things, Goldman Sachs in being investigated for engaging in economic sabotage against Greece, the New York Federal Reserve Board is being investigated for illegally funneling money to AIG and calls for a renewed investigation of 911 are becoming unstoppable. We expect a Pentagon move against the Washington D.C. criminal establishment sometime before this summer.
There are also signs now on multiple fronts that the financial logjam is beginning to break. Hundreds of billions of dollars, if not trillions of dollars, may soon become available to start implementing the new economic paradigm. One foundation is going to be set up to be run on a 50/50 basis between East and West. Many other foundations will start moving according to their own agendas. Hopefully this will include the various "programs," that have been blocked. We have also proposed creating a world people's central bank. This bank would be run on the principle of one human, one vote and possibly run via the internet.
It is still not certain when public announcements will be made or if they will ever be made. However, as always we remain hopeful that it will happen sooner rather than later.
March 2: Japanese auto-makers threaten to leave the US
In response to harassment by US authorities Japanese auto-makers have begun making plans to shut down their US operations, according to a Japanese government source. The US market is considered by them to be a sunset market and they would rather write off their investments there than submit to arbitrary fines and confiscation.
Meanwhile, outrage at the repeated use of HAARP is reaching dangerous levels The attack on Chile was a crude and failed attempt at intimidation but the nations of the world are ready to withstand earthquakes and tsunamis in the name of freedom. It must also be noted that all military and civilian personnel involved in ordering and carrying out the HAARP attacks will be hunted for the rest of their lives unless they repent, according to underground sources in Latin America and Asia. Here is a link to evidence about HAARP for those readers who still do not understand how criminally insane the Washington D.C. crime syndicate has become: HAARP Nature Modification Weapon! Project Blue Beam.flv [YouTube video]
PAUL CRAIG ROBERTS STICKS IT TO THE 9/11 CRIMINALS
By Paul Craig Roberts
Former Assistant Secretary to US Treasury
The Washington Times is a newspaper that looks with favor upon the Bush/Cheney/Obama/neocon wars of aggression in the Middle East and favors making terrorists pay for 9/11. Therefore, I was surprised to learn on February 24 that the most popular story on the paper's website for the past three days was the "Inside the Beltway" report, "Explosive News", about the 31 press conferences in cities in the US and abroad on February 19 held by Architects and Engineers for 9/11 Truth, an organization of professionals which now has 1,000 members.
I was even more surprised that the news report treated the press conference seriously. How did three World Trade Center skyscrapers suddenly disintegrate into fine dust?
How did massive steel beams in three skyscrapers suddenly fail as a result of short-lived, isolated, and low temperature fires?
"A thousand architects and engineers want to know, and are calling on Congress to order a new investigation into the destruction of the Twin Towers and Building 7", reports the newspaper.
The paper reports that the architects and engineers have concluded that the Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA) and the US National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) provided "insufficient, contradictory and fraudulent accounts of the circumstances of the towers' destruction" and are "calling for a grand jury investigation of NIST officials".
The newspaper reports that Richard Gage, the spokesperson for the architects and engineers said: "Government officials will be notified that "Misprision of Treason,' US Code 18 (Sec. 2382) is a serious Federal offense, which requires those with evidence of treason to act. The implications are enormous and may have profound impact on the forthcoming Khalid Sheik Mohammed trial".
There is now an organization, Firefighters for 9/11 Truth. At the main press conference in San Francisco, Eric Lawyer,the head of that organization, announced the firefighters' support for the architects and engineers' demands.
He reported that no forensic investigation was made of the fires that are alleged to have destroyed the three buildings and that this failure constitutes a crime.
Mandated procedures were not followed, and instead of being preserved and investigated, the crime scene was destroyed.
He also reported that there exist more than one hundred first responders who heard and experienced explosions and that there is radio, audio and video evidence of explosions.
Also at the press conference, physicist Steven Jones presented the evidence of Nano-Thermite in the residue of the WTC buildings found by an international panel of scientists led by University of Copenhagen nano-chemist Professor Niels Harrit.
Nano-Thermite is a high-tech explosive/pyrotechnic capable of instantly melting steel girders.
Before we yell "conspiracy theory," we should be aware that the architects, engineers, firefighters, and scientists offer no theory. They provide evidence that challenges the official theory.
This evidence is not going to go away.
If expressing doubts or reservations about the official story in the 9/11 Commission Report makes a person a conspiracy theory kook, then we have to include in this category both co-chairmen of the 9/11 Commission and the Commission's legal counsel, all of whom have written books in which they clearly acknowledge that they were lied to by Government officials when they conducted their investigation, or, rather, when they presided over the investigation conducted by the Executive Director, Philip Zelikow, a member of President George W. Bush's transition team and Foreign Intelligence Advisory Board and a co-author of Bush Secretary of State Condi "Mushroom" Rice.
There will always be Americans who will believe whatever the government tells them no matter how many times they know the government has lied to them.
Despite expensive wars that threaten Social Security and Medicare, wars based on non-existent Iraqi weapons of mass destruction, non-existent Saddam Hussein connections to al Qaida, non-existent Afghan participation in the 9/11 attacks, and the non-existent Iranian nuclear weapons that are being hyped as the reason for the next American war of aggression in the Middle East, more than half of the U.S. population still believes the fantastic story that the Government has told them about 9/11, a Muslim conspiracy that outwitted the entire Western world.
Moreover, it doesn't matter to these Americans how often the Government changes its story.
For example, Americans first heard of Osama bin Laden because the Bush regime pinned the 9/11 attacks on him. Over the years video after video was served up to the gullible American public of bin Laden's pronouncements. Experts dismissed these videos as fakes, but Americans remained their gullible selves. Then suddenly last year a new 9/11 "mastermind" emerged to take bin Laden's place, the captive Khalid Sheik Mohammed, the detainee who was waterboarded 183 times until he confessed to masterminding the 9/11 attack.
In the Middle Ages confessions extracted by torture constituted evidence, but self-incrimination has been a no-no in the U.S. legal system since our founding. But with the Bush regime and the Republican federal judges, whom we were assured would defend the U.S. Constitution, the self-incrimination of Sheik Mohammed stands today as the only evidence the U.S. government has that Muslim terrorists pulled off 9/11.
If you consider the feats attributed to Khalid Sheik Mohammed, they are simply unbelievable. Sheik Mohammed is a more brilliant, capable superhero than V in the fantasy movie, "V for Vendetta". Sheik Mohammed outwitted all 16 U.S. intelligence agencies along with those of all U.S. allies or puppets, including Israel's Mossad.
No intelligence service on earth, or all of them combined, was a match for Sheik Mohammed.
Sheik Mohammed outwitted the U.S. National Security Council, Dick Cheney, the Pentagon, the State Department, NORAD, the U.S. Air Force, and Air Traffic Control. He caused Airport Security to fail four times in one morning. He caused the state-of-the-art air defenses of the Pentagon to fail, allowing a hijacked airliner, which was off course all morning while the U.S. Air Force, for the first time in history, was unable to get aloft intercepter aircraft, to crash into the Pentagon.
Sheik Mohammed was able to perform these feats with unqualified pilots.
Sheik Mohammed, even as a waterboarded detainee, has managed to prevent the Federal Bureau of Investigation from releasing the many confiscated videos that would show, according to the official story, the hijacked airliner hitting the Penagon.
How naive do you have to be to believe that any human, or for that matter Hollywood fantasy character, is this powerful and capable?
If Sheik Mohammed has these superhuman capabilities, how did the incompetent Americans catch him? This guy is a patsy tortured into confession in order to keep the American naifs believing the government's conspiracy theory.
What is going on here is that the US government has to bring the 9/11 mystery to an end. The Government must put on trial and convict a culprit so that it can close the case before it explodes. Anyone waterboarded 183 times would confess to anything.
The US government has responded to the evidence being arrayed against its outlandish 9/11 conspiracy theory by redefining the war on terror from external to internal enemies. Homeland Security Secretary Janet Napolitano said on February 21 that American extremists are now as big a concern as international terrorists. Extremists, of course, are people who get in the way of the government's agenda, such as the 1,000 Architects and Engineers for 9/11 Truth.
The group used to be 100, now it is 1,000. What if it becomes 10,000?
Cass Sunstein, an Obama regime official, has a solution for the 9/11 skeptics: Infiltrate them and provoke them into statements and actions that can be used to discredit or to arrest them. But get rid of them at all cost.
Why employ such extreme measures against alleged kooks if they only provide entertainment and laughs? Is the government worried that they are on to something?
Instead, why doesn't the US Government simply confront the evidence that is presented and answer it?
If the architects, engineers, firefighters, and scientists are merely kooks, it would be a simple matter to acknowledge their evidence and refute it.
Why is it necessary to infiltrate them with police agents and to set them up?
Many Americans would reply that "their" government would never even dream of killing Americans by hijacking airliners and destroying buildings in order to advance a government agenda. But on February 3, National Intelligence Director Dennis Blair told the House Intelligence Committee that the US government can assassinate its own citizens when they are overseas. No arrest, trial, or conviction of a capital crime is necessary. Just straight out murder.
Obviously, if the US government can murder its citizens abroad it can murder them at home, and has done so. For example, 100 Branch Davidians were murdered in Waco, Texas, by the Clinton administration for no legitimate reason. The government just decided to use its power knowing that it could get away with it, which it did.
Americans who think "their" government is some kind of morally pure operation would do well to familiarize themselves with Operation Northwoods. Operation Northwoods was a plot drawn up by the US Joint Chiefs of Staff for the CIA to commit acts of terrorism in American cities and fabricate evidence blaming Castro so that the US could gain domestic and international support for regime change in Cuba. The secret plan was nixed by President John F. Kennedy and was declassified by the John F. Kennedy Assassination Records Review Board.
It is available online in the National Security Archive. There are numerous online accounts available, including Wikipedia. James Bamford's book, Body of Secrets, also summarizes the plot:
"Operation Northwoods, which had the written approval of the Chairman [Gen. Lemnitzer] and every member of the US Joint Chiefs of Staff, called for innocent people to be shot on American streets; for boats carrying refugees fleeing Cuba to be sunk on the high seas; for a wave of violent terrorism to be launched in Washington, D.C., Miami, and elsewhere. People would be framed for bombings they did not commit; planes would be hijacked. Using phony evidence, all of it would be blamed on Castro, thus giving Lemnitzer and his cabal the excuse, as well as the public and international backing, they needed to launch their war".
Prior to 9/11 the American neoconservatives were explicit that the wars of aggression that they intended to launch in the Middle East required "a new Pearl Harbor".
For their own good and that of the wider world, Americans need to pay attention to the growing body of experts who are telling them that the government's account of 9/11 fails their investigation. 9/11 launched the neoconservative plan for US world hegemony.
As I write, the US government is purchasing the agreement of foreign governments that border Russia to accept US missile interceptor bases. The US intends to ring Russia with US missile bases from Poland through central Europe and Kosovo to Georgia, Azerbaijan and central Asia.
US envoy Richard Holbrooke declared on February 20 2010 that al Qaida is moving into former Central Asian constituent parts of the Soviet Union, such as Tajikistan, Kyrgyzstan, Uzbekistan, Turkmenistan, and Kazakhstan. Holbrooke is soliciting US bases in these former Soviet Republics under the guise of the ever-expanding "war on terror".
The United States has already encircled Iran with military bases. The US government intends to neutralize China by seizing control over the Middle East and cutting China off from oil.
This plan assumes that Russia and China, nuclear armed states, will be intimidated by US anti-missile defenses and will acquiesce in US hegemony and that China will lack oil for its industries and military.
The US government is delusional. Russian military and political leaders have responded to the obvious threat by declaring NATO a direct threat to the security of Russia and by announcing a change in Russian war doctrine to the pre-emptive launch of nuclear weapons. The Chinese are too confident to be bullied by a washed-up American "superpower".
The morons in Washington are pushing the envelope of nuclear war.
The insane drive for American hegemony threatens life on earth. The American people, by accepting the lies and deceptions of "their" government, are facilitating this outcome.
Gisela EcheverríaG., February 14, 2010
Inspiration from “The Greatest Love of All” ~ Lyrics and song by George Benson
Revision and Editing by Tom Bader
We have been told often during our lives
that our children are our future,
all the more reason to take the responsibility
to teach them very well
and even let them lead the way.
It is important that we continuously teach them to see
the beauty they possess inside,
so that they acknowledge and honor their Inner Greatness,
learning to develop a sense of personal pride and dignity,
based on the essence and steeped in humbleness,
rather than on the ego.
Let us listen with attention to the children’s laughter
allowing it to contact our Essence,
our True Selves existing from the beginning of all times
to the present day…
I, The Presence.
Every child chooses his/her heroes;
So did I in my early childhood.
As other people,
I searched eagerly to feel LOVE,
to receive LOVE from others,
in my quest to feel completeness…plenitude.
From each Master I have learned wonderful things
bowing before their magnificence and wisdom
and living in LOVE and GRATITUDE
for their profound teachings. And among these Masters in this winding path,
there was one to which many times I turned my back and even detested…
Those lonely moments during which
I only looked to the outside,
feeling sorry for myself
due to my solitude and absence of LOVE…
that LOVE which I hoped would come
from the outside to fill my voids.
So I learned to depend on myself alone,
choosing never to walk in anyone’s shadows.
Creating a scenario in which
if I either failed or succeeded
it would only depend on me,
on my sole abilities and talents,
thinking that if all were taken from me,
or somehow lost,
my dignity would remain intact…
Sometimes feeling desperate when I didn’t find it,
or for Love which was found
then, suddenly, unexplainably,
lost or dissolved.
And in this search for answers
and reiterative endeavors to find LOVE,
many Masters came to my life
that began to open windows
to show me the TRUTH of this process.
My doors remain open
to welcome each Master that manifests in my life
for my SPIRITUAL EVOLution.
Oh… how arrogant!
This Master stayed patiently by my side
until I was ready to learn.
Until I understood that these lonely spaces
were the most sacred,
the genuine opportunity of my search!
For the greatest of all LOVES,
was realized in discovering IT
in these spaces of contemplation.
Indeed, the greatest and truest LOVE,
the source from which it springs and flows.
Those sacred spaces showed me
that the greatest LOVE was here,
so near me,
the ME inside!
Of all the marvelous journeys that I treasure,
the most rewarding and sublime
has been the One, started many years ago,
and which continues still…
fabulous and blessed journey to my interior space;
to at last contact and BE in that sacred area,
with no boundaries, in my heart
where I AM that which IS:
LOVE, PEACE, GREATNESS.
The greatest LOVE is easy to achieve;
we have only to change our focus of attention
from the outside to the inside.
Indeed…learning to LOVE yourself
is the greatest LOVE of all!
And if in your quest to discover
that special place of your dreams
you find yourself in a lonely place,
do not be afraid… but rather OPEN joyfully.
It is your opportunity to find YOUR TRUTH.
The true LOVE!
That which is your Divine Essence
which sprouts from the creative source,
LOVE thy neighbor as thyself!
Contemplate, reflect and meditate
upon this affirmation.
When you truly understand it,
you will then know that you have arrived,
because the feeling of plenitude and JOY
that you will experience
is unique and incomparable.
And this LOVE will then express unto others,
unto all that surrounds you.
It is surely the most valuable gift
given to us by our Creator
Indeed, the reason of our existence…
of our Presence!!
Here is a shocking statistic that you won't hear in most western news media: over the past nine years, more US military personnel have taken their own lives than have died in action in either the wars in Iraq orAfghanistan. These are official figures from the US Department of Defence, yet somehow they have not been deemed newsworthy to report. Last year alone, more than 330 serving members of the US armed forcescommitted suicide - more than the 320 killed in Afghanistan and the 150 who fell in Iraq (see wsws.org).
Since 2001, when Washington launched its so-called war on terror, there has been a dramatic year-on-year increase in US military suicides, particularly in the army, which has borne the brunt of fighting abroad. Last year saw the highest total number since such records began in 1980. Prior to 2001, the suicide rate in the US military was lower than that for the general US population; now, it is nearly double the nationalaverage.
A growing number of these victims have been deployed in Iraq or Afghanistan. What these figures should tell us is that there is something fundamentally deranged about Washington's "war on terror" - which isprobably why western news media prefer to ignore the issue. How damning is it about such military campaigns that the number of US soldiers who take their own lives outnumber those killed by enemy combatants. What is even more disturbing is that the official figures only count victims of suicide among serving personnel. Not included are the many more veterans - officially classed a civilians - who take their own lives.
Most likely, these deaths are reported in some small-town newspaper in "a brief" news item with no context or background as to what drove these individuals to take their own lives. It is estimated that the suicide rateamong veterans demobbed from fighting in Afghanistan and Iraq is as high as four times the national average. The US Department of Veteran Affairs calculates that over 6,000 former service personnel commitsuicide every year.
Many of these men have come home to a country they have fought for only to find no jobs, their homes repossessed by banks that have enjoyed trillion-dollar bailouts and broken relationships. eanwhile, President Obama - the erstwhile peace candidate - has taken on the role of Commander in Chief with gusto, telling his countrymen and women that they are fighting a "just war" to "defend American lives".
Only a year ago, he was campaigning for the presidency on a ticket to end such wars. Now, more than his predecessor, George W Bush, Obama is committing to wars without end. How soul-destroying is that for agrunt holed up in a bunker, with his young family back home probably telling him that they have just signed up for food stamps? In their guts, these US soldiers must know - as many other ordinary people around the world do - that these wars are nothing but a desperate, pathological bid by a dying power to salvage its crumbling empire - an empire that enriches a tiny elite and impoverishes the majority. Is it any wonder thatany of them simply lose the will to live?
Finian Cunningham is a frequent contributor to Global Research.
THE "LEGAL" (THOUGH UNLAWFUL) MATRIX OF CORPORATE GOVERNMENT
Excellent information, unfortunately true, regardless of who wrote it.
Supposedly by an unknown judge (name hidden for his safety)
During my twelve years service as a Judge, I always insisted on the truth and placed justice above law and order!
(I wonder how long he was actually a sitting judge if he actually judged based on the following truths of our blatently criminal system of government? The title is mine- Ron's- not his.)
Evidence of our Slavery is as follows:
a) The primary control and custody of infants is with the corporate state government through the filing of government issued Birth Certificates, which are held in a State Trust and therein each applicant is recorded under the Department of Transportation as a State owned Vessel and financial asset. A government issued Birth Certificate was never needed as proof of birth because a baptismal record or a family bible entry of birth, was and is an exception to hearsay and constitutes legal proof of birth! Had your parents never applied for a government issued Birth Certificate, none of the Federal or State Statutes, Codes or Regulations in place, would be enforceable against you, and no government official or agency could ever tell you how to raise your children; declare you an unfit parent, or take your children away from you! We all made fun of the Amish of Pennsylvania and yet the government cannot touch them because they do not participate in anything these corporate governments have to offer. The title to their land is recorded as an Ecclesiastical Trust. The Vatican (the Holy Roman Church) actually owns all the land, territories and insular possessions called America and as long as the Amish remain an Ecclesiastical Trust and remain a passive Christian Society, the Vatican will protect them. The Holy Roman Church possesses the power toprotect or crush anyone and anything! [See: Tillman v. Roberts, 108 So. 62 [and] Title U. S. C. 7701 [and] 18 U. S. C. Section 8].
b) Social Security is not a Trust or Insurance policy or Insurance against disability. The U.S. Supreme Court has ruled that Social Security is a government giveaway program funded by a government Tax; which is why and how the Congress can periodically dip into the assets of the fund anytime they want and never have to pay it back! The back of the Social Security card states that the card is the property of the government and not you! Your birth name appears on the front of that card and has been modified, the same way as your birth certificate; from upper and lower case letters to all capital letters, pursuant to the U.S. Government Printing Manual, which instructs government agencies on how to subtly convert a living man into a corporation. The actual Director of our Social Security Fund and Administration is the Queen of England and from which she is paid a generous salary. Your Social Security Card is issued by the United Nations through the International Monetary Fund and your Social Security Number is actually your International Slave Number! On the reverse side of that card is an "E" letter followed by eight numbers. That is a "cusip" number, which is required on all securities! Yes! You have been converted into a marketable security, like a bond, and your person was offered for sale and sold to domestic and foreign corporate investors!
c) A Marriage License Application is a request to your "Masters" for permission to marry. If you ever had any claim of sovereignty before that date; you lost it completely when you applied for and married under a marriage license. Sovereignty means: "To assert ones independence and to claim to be self-governing. " The license isn't necessary and never has been because a marriage has always been just a contract, witnessed by God, between a man and a woman! Who told you that you must apply for a license? It is the official you chose to conduct your ceremony? The official just happens to be a licensed government official and his license prevents him from conducting marriage ceremonies without the issuance of a marriage license. Did Moses or Jesus ever say or profess that a marriage is not recognized by God, without a license?
Here's the Fraud behind the License:
Those who apply for and marry pursuant to a marriage license have now added a third party to their marriage contract! The third party is the Master, by and through his Agent, the Corporate State. The marriage license bestows the State with the legal right to decide the fate of the husband, wife and the possessions they procured during their marriage, should the marriage fail. Their divorce must now be decided by and through the States Corporate Court by a Corporate Judge, and the Judges first and foremost concern is the "interest of the State." The interest of the bride and groom is now secondary. [See: VanKosten v. VanKosten, 154 N.E. 146]. A comment by the Judge deciding this divorce says it all! "The ultimate ownership of all property is the State: individual so called ownership is only by virtue of government, [i.e.] laws amounting to mere use must be in accordance with law and subordinate to the necessities of the state." [Also See: Senate Document No. 43 of the 73rd Congress, 1st Session] and [Brown v. Welch, U.S. Superior Court].
d) The term "license" is defined in law as, "A permit to do something illegal." [See: Blacks Law Dictionary, 6th or 7th Edition]. Therefore, all licenses are permits to violate the only real law! Inalienable rights are the rights bestowed upon all living men, by God at birth! All other laws are subordinate to God's law. The controlling government wants us to rely on their laws, so they demand that we apply for a license! Another example is a "Drivers License." It is your God given right to travel the roadways of this nation and no government has any right to restrict, tax or license your pursuit of happiness! The only exception is a Driver of a Commercial Vehicle. The governments have a right to regulate Commerce, which means trade. Anyone operating a vehicle in Commerce must be licensed but all others are absolutely free to travel without one! The foreign Agents in power; have changed the common meanings of words to encapsulate and control every Sovereign. They succeed in this intimidation through the corporate courts and police enforcement by officers who have been brainwashed and reinforced by mandatory training programs.
e) The use of "Trusts" by the Masters and their Agents; is for a good reason! A Trust by law is secret and neither the Masters nor their agents [the Corporate Government and Courts] can be compelled to expose the rules or regulations of the Trust and those regulations can change with the wind, without notice to the participants! [See: The Law of Trusts].
f) Slaves cannot own property. Look at the Deed to your home. You are identified as the[Tenant] of the property and never the Owner and your Local and State land tax is actually a "rent or use fee" assessed by the State for the lease on the land. You gave them the land after closing via your Lawyer. Did he ever tell you that? After closing, your Lawyer recorded the deed with the Court. The law only suggests recording the deed, it doesn't mandate it! Upon recording, you gave the land back to the State, who then leases it back to you for as long as you live there! Isn't that where you have constructed your home, your castle? I'm paying for it, doesn't that make the land mine, you ask? If you fail to pay the States assessed "rent or use fee," which has been cleverly disguised as a direct state tax; you will be evicted from your castle and land, and the state will take title and sell your home under commercial law. Commercial Law ordains that, "Anything permanently attached, is retained by the owner!" Who is the owner of the land? Why the State because you so graciously donated it to them.
Oh, I almost forgot; your Lawyer receives a fee from the State for recording your deed for their use and benefit! How do you feel about your lawyer now? Didn't you pay him to represent "your interests" at the closing? Now you see why lawyers are the brunt of numerous jokes and have such a poor reputation! Its because they deserve it!
g) Foreclosures are nothing more than evictions, based on a different kind of fraud. The illusion of a debt[Mortgage] that never existed! No individual or family who has beenforeclosed on and evicted from their home in the United States is legal! The only exception to this is owner-financing! Other than owner-financing, the people who purchased their homes through a Mortgage Company, actually owned their homes "completely" on the day of the closing. The real legal definition of a "closing" means that all legal interest as to title is concluded. [See: any reputable Dictionary from the 1800's]. The definition has been changed by our government lawyers to conceal the fraud.
[Explanation of the above statement]
First you must know that the federal government took America off the gold standard in 1933, during a staged bankruptcy called the "Great Depression" and replaced the gold with an economic principle known as,"Negotiable Debt Instruments. " [YES, THE GREAT DEPRESSION WAS STAGED!] The government needed to create a catastrophe to implement standards that were designed to steal your possessions and God-given rights! The process of creating a catastrophe was discovered by behaviorists! Take away a persons food, comfort and safety long enough and they won't care or question the illusion provided, as long as their stomach is full, they have shelter, a comfortable bed and the means (real or imagined) to keep or continue their comfort!
President Roosevelt unconstitutionally collected America's gold by Executive Order and sold it to the Vatican by way of China, to conceal its true ownership. The gold in Fort Knox belongs to the Vatican and not the United States! Absent a gold base, Commerce now essentially trades in "debts." So if you borrowed money for a Mortgage and there's no gold or real value to support the paper called U. S. Currency; what did you actually borrow? Factually, you borrowed debt! The Mortgage Company committed the ultimate fraud against you because they loaned you nothing to pay off the imaginary balance, not even their own debt instruments. They then told you that you owe them the unpaid balance of your home and that you must pay them back with interest, in monthly installments!
Here's how they did it. At your Closing, the Mortgage Company had you sign a "Promissory Note" in which you promised your sweat, your equity, full faith and credit against an unpaid balance. Then without your knowledge, the Mortgage Company sold your Promissory Note (your credit) to a Warehousing Institution such as, Fannie Mae or Freddie Mac. The Warehousing Institution uses your Promissory Note (your credit) as collateral and generates loans to other people and corporations with interest. Collateral is essential to a corporation because corporations have no money or credit. They're not real, they're a fiction and require the sweat, the equity, the full faith and credit of living individuals to breathe and sustain the life of the corporation. Corporate Governments operate under the same principle.
The Warehousing Institution makes money off the "Promissory Note" (your credit) and even though the profits made are nothing more than new (Negotiable Debt Instruments), those instruments still have buying power in a (Negotiable Debt Economy).
These debt instruments are only negotiable because of the human ignorance of the American people and the human ignorance of people in other countries of the World, who have all been lied to, told this has value, and the people don't know the difference!
Did you ever give your permission to the Mortgage Company to sell your credit? So where is your cut of the profits? If the Mortgage Company invested nothing of their own in the purchase of your home, why are you making a monthly Mortgage payment to them with interest? And where do they get off foreclosing on or against anyone or threatening to foreclose?
They do it by fraud and the Masters and their Agents (the governments, the courts and the banks) all know it! Everything done to us and against us is about sustaining their lives, the lives of the corporate governments they command and to keep "We the People" under their complete control! They accomplish this control by taking away or threatening to take away your comfort and independence! They all use fraudulent means, disguised as law!
Note: When you applied for a Mortgage, the Mortgage Company ran a credit check on you and if you had a blemish on your credit record, they charged you points (money) to ease their pain and lighten the risk (a credit risk) of their loaning you a Mortgage! More Fraud!
Why are you paying points, when they never loaned you a dime! The credit report is just another scam. If you have a high credit report, the government and banks identify you as an "Obedient Slave" and yet your "Promissory Note" sold for the same value as the "Promissory Note" endorsed by the man who is (a credit risk)! Credit didn't matter. The fact that you are a living person is what matters!
The Mortgage Company maintains two sets of books regarding your Mortgage payments. The local set of books, is a record that they loaned you money and that you agreed to repay that money, with interest, each month. The second set of books is maintained in another State office, usually a Bank because the Mortgage Companies usually sell your loan contract to a Bank and agree to monitor the monthly payments in order to conceal the fraud! In the second set of books, your monthly Mortgage Payment is recorded by the bank as a savings deposit because there is no real loan! When you pay off the fraudulent mortgage, the Bank waits (90) days and then submits a request to the IRS. The request states: "That someone, unknown to this facility; deposited this money into our facility and has abandoned it! May we keep the deposit?" The IRS always gives their permission to the bank to keep the deposit and your hard earned money just feathered the nest of the Rockefeller, Rothschild and eleven other wealthy families in the world!
Equity Law, which once controlled Americas' Corporate Courts, has been replaced with Admiralty/Maritime Law, pursuant to Title 28 of the United States Code and the Judiciary Act of 1789. This is the Law of Merchants and Sailors.Under Admiralty/Maritime Law; the Courts presume you owe the Mortgage or the Tax or that you committed a crime defined as a Criminal Statute and it is your obligation to prove you're innocent! (This means, you're guilty until you prove you're innocent), which is the same standard and procedure used in a Military Court Martial. Haven't we always been told that, "You are innocent - until proven guilty?" Lies, Lies and more Lies!
We are not free men; we are slaves, and bound to our Masters by adhesion contracts and secret Trusts. The goal of the Masters and their (agents) our elected officials, is to keep the people oppressed and subservient to them! As the Masters agents, they utilize propaganda techniques through government controlled schools; churches; the media and mind control by force and or the threat of force through the courts and police enforcement! Police officers in America have been pumped full of more bullshit than a manure spreader and because of their trust, public school conditioning and training, they haven't the ability to see what is going on! Many have been conditioned by previous military service, not to think for themselves but just follow orders, which makes many of them as dangerous as aTerrorist! Now ask yourself; who are the real Terrorists in America? Guess what; "the Constitution isn't for the Police either" and still they are forced to swear an oath to defend it!" The more regulations, statutes and codes created, and the greater the number of regulatory officers and agencies created to enforce them; the greater the Masters control over their Slaves and that is mind control by force and threat of force, by the very people we rely on, to protect and serve!
At some point in history the foreign Agents in control of our Federal Government, decided that they needed to create Federal Police Agencies to protect them! I can't blame them! If I was a part of a conspiracy that could result in the American people hanging me for Treason, I'd want bodyguards too! Now, if you are one of these public officials; how do you justify the employment and expense of bodyguards, when nobody is trying to injure you, and you don't want anyone to know that you are committing Treason? Instead of confessing your motives; you must find a way to accomplish your objective and blame it on someone else! HENCE: The birth of a bad law, The Volstead Act and the beginning of "Prohibition! "
Enterprising people began to make money and others organized. Those who organized became mobs and when the mobs began killing each other, the free lance boot-legers and innocent people in drive-by shootings; our federal officials sat back and enjoyed the show! They did absolutely nothing until the public was literally breaking down the doors of the Capitol Building: [Just like they had planned it!] The FBI existed before this time. They were a small investigative unit under the Attorney Generals Office. The Agents had no arrest powers and were prohibited from carrying guns. Their only authority was to investigate federal employees and make reports to the attorney general, who then decided if the matter was serious enough to concern the government and whether to prosecute the employee! The FBI was eventually armed, expanded and provided national jurisdiction to fight the gangsters! None of which would have been necessary had it not been for The Volstead Act! Slowly, the agency has grown into the giant it is now and ironically; the Legislature never authorized their expansion. Everything was done by the AG administratively! Where does it say in the Constitution that a federal employee has the authority to create law, create a police authority or expand a current one?
Do you see how our government has circumvented the restrictions placed upon them by the Constitution and manipulated the American people? Every catastrophe, calamity or disaster has been planned and financed by our so-called public representatives with an ulterior motive in mind. The creation of Homeland Security was done in the same way! A Terrorist attack was staged by hired men having connections to the Middle East. I'm not going to go into the conspiracy, other than to say that President Bush and the FBI were as guilty as the men who high-jacked the commercial airplanes! The director of the FBI confessed to the Congress of his Agencies involvement under Presidential Order. He was relieved of his position and Congress took no action against President Bush and the media did not report any of this to the American people! Treason charges were filed against President Bush,Vice-President Cheney and the FBI by a two star General from the Pentagon and no action has ever been taken and nothing was ever reported to the American public, upon the orders of President Obama.
This was just another government catastrophe designed to make you (the public) beg the government to come to your aid and protect you! Each time one of these catastrophe' s are staged; our representatives steal more of our liberty and freedom from us, but America doesn't care because now they feel safe once again! And that's what these foreign Agents want us to believe and feel! We complain today that government has eroded our rights! It's true because we were lied to directly and indirectly and told to believe something other than truth! The correct term here is: "Propaganda" and all government controlled entities and institutions mentioned,are quite expert in the use of it! When I was a child; during a period labeled "the Cold War;" I remember my teacher telling the class how expert the Communists are in the use of "propaganda! " I can say now with absolute certainty that no one is as expert as the American government! In fact I believe that our government officials taught the World! I don't blame my teachers. Most of them were subjected to and spoon fed the same propaganda under direction of these foreign Agents and corporate entities that now employ them. Our teachers are simply spoon feeding our children with the same propaganda that was fed to them!
Naturally, if a teacher becomes too creative and steps outside the box, or thinks outside the box, the penalty for such creativity is the termination of employment, their future profession and benefits! Generally, the reason used for termination is: "Failure to adhere to the established curriculum and or meet the needs of this establishment! " Who established the needs and curriculum? Why the government agents under the U. S. Department of Education, acting through the foreign Agents representing the Masters! During the Bush Administration, a Treaty called the North American Alliance was negotiated and signed but the content was not reported to the American public. The Treaty guarantees that the boundary lines dividing Mexico, the United States and Canada will dissolve and become one country to be called North America, upon the installation of the New World Order Government! The currency for North America is being manufactured by the United States Mint. They are gold coins called AMEROS. I have pictures of these coins being minted, that were taken by an employee and smuggled out! Everything in your life has been controlled from birth and you're still being controlled!
The free-thinkers of the world have either been murdered or institutionalized in asylums. Freethinkers are a detriment to the Masters and their Agents! They have the potential to become (Martyrs), especially if the populace begins to pay attention to what the free-thinkers have to say or teach! Look at what happened to Jesus; John Kennedy; Bobby Kennedy; John Kennedy, Jr. and Martin Luther King, Jr.! If you believe John Kennedy, Jr. was an accidental death, then you probably believe that on 911, the attack on the twin towers was a real Terrorist attack!
Wake Up Laughing, And Wise Up Loving: The Upwising Has Begun!
"We're not here to earn God's love, we're here to spend it!" -- Swami Beyondananda
Well, another 12-month episode of that long-running comedy of situations, Universe Knows Best, is in the can, and you'll be happy to know the show has been renewed for another season. The Producer thinks it's hilarious.
However, if you're like most of us, you really had to strain to hear the laugh track in 2009. Certainly, there was plenty to not laugh about.Take our political system -- please!
A year ago, Americans believed they had chosen not just a new President, but a new precedent. Well, now that the hopium fix is wearing off, we must face the inconvenient truth that if we want a truly new deal, we the people must become the new dealer. Unfortunately, the old dealer seems to have dealt a great hand to the uncommonly wealthy at the expense of the commonwealth.
Obama Bails Out Wall Street, and Bails Out On Main Street
Riding high on the shoulders of public opinion, President Barack Obama came down to earth, showing he -- like anyone else in the employ of the American Empire -- must answer to the Board of Directors, and not the shareholders. To give credit where credit is not due, the Administration bailed out the big banks, which immediately reinvested the money in three big houses: The White House and the two houses of Congress. Yes, it's a buy-ological fact. When the banks are picking up the tab, the government becomes more usurer-friendly.
No wonder they have names like Chase and Wachovia. Sadly, a lot of little folks are feeling walked over. Last year, downsizing and lay-offs affected every industry. I recently went to one of those 50s and 60s rock music nostalgia shows, and was shocked by the line up: The Jackson Four ... The Three Tops ... Two Dog Night ... and the Everly Brother.
Even I went minus last year, and frankly it left me nonplussed. So I too have had to downsize. I'm now wearing smaller pants.
Meanwhile ... the Up-Wising Continues
Fortunately, the up-wising continues, as the body politic now recognizes the difference between change, and chump change. I predict even more awakening and a-wisening in 2010. Americans are waking up left and right, because the news is alarming and the snooze button no longer works. Anger is becoming all the rage, proving once again that old adage: the truth shall upset you free.
As even more shift hits the fan in 2010, the body politic will need all the fortification and nourishment it can get to metabolize the political toxins and neutralize the sociopathogens. And so I am offering my simple and effective two-step program because frankly we don't have time for all twelve: Wake up laughing, wise up loving.
Wake up, because it's time to wake up. Laugh, because there is definitely something funny going on -- even if you can't find the joke hidden in the picture. Yes, waking up is hard to do, so we will need plenty of "ha-ha's" to go with the "aha's." As we wise up to the inconvenient truths hidden behind convenient lies, we will need something to keep us from taking these political toxins poisonally.
That is where love comes in, because love is the one solution that will dissolve negativity. Of this, I am positive: love will positively dissolve negativity.
Step One: Wake Up Laughing
Do you realize that billions of people worldwide go to bed serious every night? And wake up the same way?
So naturally -- or in this case, unnaturally -- the world is in serious condition. Between the stresses of work, the economy, and a steady diet of bad news, is it any wonder so many people have gained weightiness?
Yes, the problem is serious. But the solution is humorous. If gravity's got you down, let levity lift you up. Do you ever wake up in the morning with a funny feeling? Great. Go with it! Feel the levitational pull uplifting the corners of your mouth into a smile. You want to uplift humankind? Uplift your face first, and everyone else will get the idea. It will be like wearing one of those buttons: I lost weightiness. Ask me how.
Step Two: Wise Up Loving
In the midst of our evolutionary up-wising, we must amp up the loving -- particularly loving that which we find most unlovable. Why? The lovable has no problem getting love, because it's so ... lovable. Meanwhile the unlovable is left unloved, and so acts unloving, and becomes even more unlovable. This is a vicious cycle that can indeed become a never-ending cycle of viciousness, unless we end it. So, as the old saying goes, when you find yourself caught up in a vicious cycle, stop peddling and get off.
Now you're going to love this: when we find some lovable part in the unlovable to love, that lovable part expands, and the unlovable shrinks. So ... if you find something unlovable, by loving what is lovable about it, you can love the unlovable to death!
At the same time, we can love the lovableness to life! We do that by focusing on the positive. That is why I have launched my "Just say no to negativity" campaign. It is especially important that we give our children an esteem bath every day. Next time you see your youngster sprawled out on the couch playing video games, speak only positive words of praise: "What's right with you, you useful good-for-something? And wipe that smile on to your face!"
I guarantee that before long, he or she will be hanging out with a savory crowd.
We Can Achieve Fulfilament!
As we wise up to the awful truth, we must then rise up to the awesome opportunity: Humanifest destiny! We are here to manifest our destiny as imaginal souls in the body of a newly emerging organism called Humanity, where each of us is totally unique -- just like everyone else! We are here for one singular purpose -- to let our light fully shine. The enlightened ones call this fulfilament.
And with more delighted lights lighting up, enlightening is going to strike more frequently. A critical mass of us will recognize that we'd be a lot happier and a lot more successful if we put our energy into fruitfully re-growing the Garden instead of fruitlessly scrapping over the scraps. As we children of God put aside childish things like war and greed and finally become adults of God, we will evolve past the Ten Commandments to the One Suggestion: Love thy neighbor, otherwise there goes the Neighborhood.
Yes, this will require conscious evolution, but I say we were created to evolve. Otherwise Jesus would have said, "Now don't do a thing till I get back."
As you probably know, I never make predictions because I don't want to jeopardize my non-prophet status. However, I do set intentions. And so, may 2010 be the year that we collectively tune out reality TV, and tune into ... reality! We are in the hero's role in the greatest adventure story in human history: Conscious evolution! A world win campaign where the whole world can win.
May we use our intelligence intelligently and our hearts lovingly. May we wake up laughing, and may we wise up loving. And may we -- each and all -- achieve fulfilament.
Swami Beyondananda is the alter ego of author and uncommontator Steve Bhaerman, and can be found online at www.wakeuplaughing.com. To wake up laughing, check out Steve's e-book, Wake Up Laughing: An Insider's Guide to the Cosmic Comedy. To wise up loving, check out his book co-authored with Bruce Lipton, Spontaneous Evolution: Our Positive Future and a Way to Get There From Here. Both can be ordered from his website.
There is a growing perception among many Americans that we are headed for one of those periodic moments in our history when our reactions to events will redefine who we are as a people, where we are going as a country and who gets to call the shots when we get there -- what George H.W. Bush called “that vision thing.” This is happening in the middle of unprecedented external and internal stresses on our social order, the results of which you see daily on the streets.
It is going to get worse. Odds are, it is going to get MUCH worse before it gets better. IF it gets better any time soon, which I doubt.
And so, ladies and gentlemen of American law enforcement, the prudent among you should be considering this question now, rather than later: “What am I going to do when we get to ‘much worse’?”
Consider first where we are.
The Justice Department's National Gang Intelligence Center estimated last year that there were over a million hard-core gang members in this country who were responsible for over 80% of the crimes in many communities. Other experts have suggested that when you add in the gangs’ “extended families” and wannabes the number is closer to between five and ten million. As unemployment has increased, their numbers have likewise swelled.
But the gangs, as bad as they are and as great a threat as they pose to public order, are nothing compared to the larger problem, and that is this.
Respect for duly constituted authority and social trust are essential ingredients of civilization. These elements represent the basic glue of society.
Respect for duly constituted authority is, as every cop knows, at an all-time low. There are two general reasons for this, one systemic and the other so personal that if you look yourselves honestly in the mirror you can see it.
Systemically, “duly constituted authority” derives its legitimacy from the founding documents of our country, the Declaration of Independence, the Constitution and from the Founders’ concepts of the rule of law. These have all been under attack for a hundred years or more by both corrupt political parties and their union and business familiars. The Constitution has become for some a joke and for others an inconvenient speed bump on the road to tyranny. As long as this degradation of the legitimacy of our political and legal system was perceived by only a narrow portion of the population, it was manageable in a societal sense. This is no longer true.
When a president and Congress robs one set of people to enrich their cronies, when they violate the settled rule of law regarding bankruptcy to stiff secured creditors in the case of General Motors while rewarding self-anointed unsecured creditors -- their political allies, the auto unions -- the rest of the population cannot fail but conclude that we are no longer under the rule of law, but the rule of men, which is to say, the law of the jungle. Or, put another way, they -- the “authorities” -- can do anything that the citizenry can’t or won’t stop them from doing. This is the societal Catch 22 we are now in (and have been for a while) that I call “Waco Rules.”
Other cases such as that of David Olofson, a veteran and marksmanship instructor and family man who was railroaded by the ATF on an automatic weapons charge when his semi-automatic AR-15 malfunctioned (and he was chosen for prosecution simply because the ATF did not care for his low opinion of them), have convinced many that a fair trial is no longer possible in federal court if an agency decides to “deal with” them. And if we are no longer guaranteed a fair trial in the federal court system, then if we are innocent and decide that we do not wish to play drop the soap with either the Aryan or Muslim Brotherhoods, our only guarantee is the right of an unfair gunfight when the ATF comes calling.
And remember that Olofson is merely one example of federal misadventure. There are many others, as there are plenty of similar cases in local and state jurisdictions. When the law-abiding rightfully no longer trust the law enforcers and begin to view them as a class of criminals merely acting under color of law, anarchy is not far away.
Yet, you will say, “don’t blame me, I enforce the law, I don’t make it.” True, but insufficient as an excuse, and here we get down to that look in the mirror.
My friend, fellow gun rights blogger and National Examiner columnist David Codrea over at WaronGuns has a description for feral cops. He calls them the “Only Ones.” His daily blog is filled to overflowing with example of rogue cops, their partners who never rein them in and the prosecutors and judges who find reasons to go easy on even the most heinous of criminals with badges. You know who I’m talking about. If you say there are none of these currently operating or in the making within your department then you are either lying or uninterested in seeing the truth, which amounts to the same thing.
Everyone knows what happens to honest cops who “rat out” their uniformed criminal associates. They are hounded, despised, disciplined and shunned -- and that’s on a good day. Can you blame many of us who pay attention to such law enforcement corruption for concluding that you may merely be a member of an “official gang” as opposed to a freelance one? Such dereliction of duty begs the question: If your excuse is that you don’t make the law, you just enforce it, and then you don’t enforce it upon yourselves, why should we be paying tax dollars to support “official” law breaking?
There is another image that many of you can see in the mirror if you choose to take an honest look -- that of tax collector and nanny state bully boy. Yes, we know, you didn’t make the laws, some liberal puke with a control fetish did. But when you write speeding tickets for 3 miles over the limit because you’ve been told to write “x amount” of dollar value, or when you pull people over for “seatbelt violations” at random roadblocks and then ransack their cars without probable cause, can you understand how such behavior eats away like acid on your reputation -- individually and collectively -- as servants of the citizenry? What part of “to protect and serve” does that represent?
But worse than all that is the militarization of the police -- in equipment, tactics and, worst of all, attitude -- and the federalization of all law enforcement over the past forty years, but especially in the last ten. There were, last time I checked a few years ago, something like 750,000 full time state, city, university and college, metropolitan and non-metropolitan county, and other law enforcement officers in the United States. Add to that another 150,000 or so full time law enforcement personnel working for the federal government. With the growth of new agencies like the TSA during the “war on terror” (who, because of political correctness can’t seem to figure out who the real “terrorists” are so they merely oppress the rest of us in order to be “fair”) that number has certainly risen.
In any case, there are hardly enough Feds to work the administration’s will upon a nation so vast and a people so numerous, so, much thought and effort has gone into suborning and subverting local and state law enforcement for federal purposes -- “Joint Task Forces” and “fusion centers” being two principal ways. Yet, as the Founders quite clearly understood, it is one of the duties of local law enforcement, especially the county sheriffs, to interpose themselves between the federal government and the people of their jurisdictions when the federal government becomes oppressive.
Now, however, local law enforcement is looked upon by federal agents as force multipliers and willing stooges -- “local yokels” in their parlance. And as a mark of how successful their campaign has been, many local law enforcement officers agree and happily lick the boots that kick them.
A recent case in point. Two county sheriff’s deputies showed up at the doorstep of a man out west who had expressed his contempt for Nancy Pelosi and and other federal politicians in letters and emails. These deputies, saying that the FBI had sent them, interrogated the man, threatened him “with Leavenworth” and engaged in intimidation of political speech. These local cops, having no jurisdiction to do anything of the sort, would have been laughed off of my porch here in Alabama and told to bugger off and return with real federal cops, if that was in fact their intention. Too often these days, when the federal man says “frog” many of you merely ask “how high?”
Of course, if this intimidation had back-fired on the locals in any way, the Fibbies would have been the first to disavow them, leaving them hanging out in the legal laundry to dry. So when y’all are looking in that mirror, ask yourselves how truly stupid you actually are when it comes to enforcing an agenda and not the law just because the Feds ask you to.
Because here’s the essential thing: you, ALL OF YOU, took an oath to, among other things, “preserve, protect and defend the Constitution of the United States against all enemies, foreign and domestic.” You swore that, the overwhelming majority of you, to God. Did you think that oath had a shelf life? Do you think that now that you have by your reckoning faithfully upheld that oath for, say, twenty years now that tomorrow it is okay to forget it? You swore, whether you realized it at the time or not, an OATH, before GOD, and it was a LIFETIME oath.
While you are looking in the mirror, evaluate your career based upon that oath. It was not to a man, or an administration, or a political party but to an idea -- the idea of ordered liberty as codified in the Constitution of the United States of America. So ask yourself, did you or did you not intend to faithfully uphold that oath? Because the answer to that question is going to become very important very quickly as this politically divided and morally fractured society continues to spin out of control.
To quote Joshua, “Choose this day whom you will serve.”
Katrina showed us many things. It showed that in a disaster many cops will look to their families and not the public duty, leaving their fellow law enforcement officers with an even greater burden. It showed us that cops can be opportunistic criminals as well, partaking in looting with as much energy as professional criminals. It also showed us that the police no longer trust the law-abiding citizen with arms, depriving them of their only means of self-defense once the cops have moved on, thus leaving them to the tender mercies of robbers, rapists and murderers.
It is perhaps dangerous to make too large of a generalization, for there are many rural jurisdictions where this does not apply, but the fact of the matter is that by and large, the police no longer trust the people they are supposed to protect, and they especially do not trust an armed citizen, even if he represents no danger to the cop. This is standing the oath on its head. The people do not exist to serve the servant, but rather the other way around.
When a policeman pulls over a driver whose computer record shows not only the driver’s license of the vehicle’s owner, but the fact that they have a concealed carry permit, it is too often SOP for the cop to approach the vehicle, gun drawn, order the man or woman from the car, put them on their knees and cuff them before anything else transpires. These are not the acts of public servants but rather of an occupying army. And with each breach of trust, the glue holding society together is further weakened. For the more you distrust us, the more we are reminded to distrust you.
It is important to remember, Mr. and Ms. Law Enforcement Officer, that you need us, the law-abiding armed citizenry, one hell of a lot more than we need you. Just ask any criminal. Who is it that they fear most? The encounter with a policeman or a would-be victim who turns out to be armed? I tell you this uncomfortable truth and I hope you have the honesty to admit it -- the criminals of this country are far more scared of the armed citizenry than they are of the police.
It is not the fear of the patrol car that inhibits criminal behavior the most, but rather the prospect of screwing up and getting his brains blown out by a citizen in righteous self defense. And so, when you participate in citizen disarmament efforts, whether gun seizures like Katrina, or merely identifying otherwise friendly peaceable folks as “the enemy” just because they are armed, you are alienating your most valuable friends and empowering your most vicious enemies. Not to mention the fact that you are violating that sacred oath you took.
So ponder that deteriorating social trust that holds civilizations together, and then ponder this: the worst is yet to come.
What will happen when we are faced, God forbid, with some dislocating national disaster -- natural or man-made -- that makes Katrina look like a kindergarten playground? Now, even if you intend to run off like some New Orleans policemen did, to see to the safety of their families rather than keep order in the city, you are still going to need the cooperation of the armed citizenry in your home neighborhood to protect your family.
You -- ALL of you -- law enforcement officers, will then need us, the armed citizenry -- ALL of us willing and competent to muster -- to defend public order against the tide of chaos represented by five or ten million gang members and the tens of millions of panicked unprepared refugees or opportunistic criminals left unrestrained by a breakdown.
Do you seriously think that federal police, all 150,000 of them, will actually help you in that event, beyond issuing orders that they will not be personally endangered with carrying out?
You will then be on your own, and you will have us. At least those of you will who have the sense to plan now to make that happen in the event.
You might start by remembering your oaths, by beginning to trust us, by refusing to engage in petty harrassments of CCW permit holders and by strengthening your department’s auxiliary program (or starting one if you do not have one).
But first and foremost you must quit looking at and treating the law-abiding armed citizenry of the United States as the enemy. For if you don’t, we certainly will be.
Convince us by your actions that you are no better than the gangs who commit crimes without uniforms and we will treat you similarly. And there ain’t nearly enough of you to shove us around in a real national emergency.
Remember, Americans are nothing if not a practical people. We're predisposed to help and support you. Please, take our hand when it is offered, BEFORE it is needed.
WELL, MR. BIG BROTHER IRS MAN... TAKE MY POUND OF FLESH AND SLEEP WELL
NOTE: This is the man that crashed his plane into the IRS Building in Austin, TX. Interesting, and although I hope I never seriously consider his solution, I do hear him loudly and clearly. I concur with many of his observations.
MORE NOTES: Some Early Questions About The Suicide Plane at the Austin, TX IRS Building
Comment: Joe Stack's suicide mission against the IRS building in Austin Texas has raised some questions.
It's important as to how the gov't investigation and the media will spin the story. It remains to be seen if he will be painted as a Tea Partier, a crazed "Ron Paul type", a militia member, "a right wing patriot" or just someone with a grudge against the IRS.
There are however questions which have been brought up especially why would he burn his house down before his suicide and other questions in the articles below.
Source: FBI Knew Austin Attack Was Coming
Dallas office dispatched agents yesterday afternoon to be on the ground in Austin
Paul Joseph Watson, Prison Planet.com
Thursday, February 18, 2010
A trusted source has told this office that the FBI knew Austin was going to be attacked today and had dispatched officers from its Dallas headquarters yesterday afternoon to be in place for today's incident. http://www.prisonplanet.com/source-fbi-knew-austin-attack-was-coming.html
Eyewitness: Hazmat Teams In Place Before Plane Crash
Thursday, February 18, 2010
At 2:55, the girl says that Hazmat teams and fire trucks were in place across the street before the building was hit by the plane, a very lucky coincidence indeed.
Joseph Andrew Stack's Facebook: Who is Emily Walters?
Donald Borsch Jr.
February 18, 2010
Today, a man named Joseph Andrew Stack killed himself by flying a single prop plane into an office building in Austin, TX. His name is all over the news, and understandably so. The building that he crashed into housed the IRS and had 190 employees. In his planning to kill himself, he left a suicide note. This note has been removed from the Internet, but we have it here for you to view within an article from Renovo Media. It had originally been posted on Embedded Art. In this note, you will notice the words of a man who hated the IRS deeply. This afternoon, there was a Facebook page with Joseph's name on it, and it gave the distinct impression of him being a TEA Party-type, citing Ron Paul and using the Gadsden Flag as the FB icon. It would appear he was nothing more than a right-wing extremist who had an axe to really grind with the IRS. Please notice I said, "it would appear." The nagging question is, however, who created this Facebook page for Joseph Andrew Stack? cont'd: http://www.infowars.com/joseph-andrew-stacks-facebook-who-is-emily-walters/
If you’re reading this, you’re no doubt asking yourself, “Why did this have to happen?” The simple truth is that it is complicated and has been coming for a long time. The writing process, started many months ago, was intended to be therapy in the face of the looming realization that there isn’t enough therapy in the world that can fix what is really broken. Needless to say, this rant could fill volumes with example after example if I would let it. I find the process of writing it frustrating, tedious, and probably pointless… especially given my gross inability to gracefully articulate my thoughts in light of the storm raging in my head. Exactly what is therapeutic about that I’m not sure, but desperate times call for desperate measures.
We are all taught as children that without laws there would be no society, only anarchy. Sadly, starting at early ages we in this country have been brainwashed to believe that, in return for our dedication and service, our government stands for justice for all. We are further brainwashed to believe that there is freedom in this place, and that we should be ready to lay our lives down for the noble principals represented by its founding fathers. Remember? One of these was “no taxation without representation”. I have spent the total years of my adulthood unlearning that crap from only a few years of my childhood. These days anyone who really stands up for that principal is promptly labeled a “crackpot”, traitor and worse.
While very few working people would say they haven’t had their fair share of taxes (as can I), in my lifetime I can say with a great degree of certainty that there has never been a politician cast a vote on any matter with the likes of me or my interests in mind. Nor, for that matter, are they the least bit interested in me or anything I have to say.
Why is it that a handful of thugs and plunderers can commit unthinkable atrocities (and in the case of the GM executives, for scores of years) and when it’s time for their gravy train to crash under the weight of their gluttony and overwhelming stupidity, the force of the full federal government has no difficulty coming to their aid within days if not hours? Yet at the same time, the joke we call the American medical system, including the drug and insurance companies, are murdering tens of thousands of people a year and stealing from the corpses and victims they cripple, and this country’s leaders don’t see this as important as bailing out a few of their vile, rich cronies. Yet, the political “representatives” (thieves, liars, and self-serving scumbags is far more accurate) have endless time to sit around for year after year and debate the state of the “terrible health care problem”. It’s clear they see no crisis as long as the dead people don’t get in the way of their corporate profits rolling in.
And justice? You’ve got to be kidding!
How can any rational individual explain that white elephant conundrum in the middle of our tax system and, indeed, our entire legal system? Here we have a system that is, by far, too complicated for the brightest of the master scholars to understand. Yet, it mercilessly “holds accountable” its victims, claiming that they’re responsible for fully complying with laws not even the experts understand. The law “requires” a signature on the bottom of a tax filing; yet no one can say truthfully that they understand what they are signing; if that’s not “duress” than what is. If this is not the measure of a totalitarian regime, nothing is.
How did I get here?
My introduction to the real American nightmare starts back in the early ‘80s. Unfortunately after more than 16 years of school, somewhere along the line I picked up the absurd, pompous notion that I could read and understand plain English. Some friends introduced me to a group of people who were having ‘tax code’ readings and discussions. In particular, zeroed in on a section relating to the wonderful “exemptions” that make institutions like the vulgar, corrupt Catholic Church so incredibly wealthy. We carefully studied the law (with the help of some of the “best”, high-paid, experienced tax lawyers in the business), and then began to do exactly what the “big boys” were doing (except that we weren’t steeling from our congregation or lying to the government about our massive profits in the name of God). We took a great deal of care to make it all visible, following all of the rules, exactly the way the law said it was to be done.
The intent of this exercise and our efforts was to bring about a much-needed re-evaluation of the laws that allow the monsters of organized religion to make such a mockery of people who earn an honest living. However, this is where I learned that there are two “interpretations” for every law; one for the very rich, and one for the rest of us… Oh, and the monsters are the very ones making and enforcing the laws; the inquisition is still alive and well today in this country.
That little lesson in patriotism cost me $40,000+, 10 years of my life, and set my retirement plans back to 0. It made me realize for the first time that I live in a country with an ideology that is based on a total and complete lie. It also made me realize, not only how naive I had been, but also the incredible stupidity of the American public; that they buy, hook, line, and sinker, the crap about their “freedom”… and that they continue to do so with eyes closed in the face of overwhelming evidence and all that keeps happening in front of them.
Before even having to make a shaky recovery from the sting of the first lesson on what justice really means in this country (around 1984 after making my way through engineering school and still another five years of “paying my dues”), I felt I finally had to take a chance of launching my dream of becoming an independent engineer.
On the subjects of engineers and dreams of independence, I should digress somewhat to say that I’m sure that I inherited the fascination for creative problem solving from my father. I realized this at a very young age.
The significance of independence, however, came much later during my early years of college; at the age of 18 or 19 when I was living on my own as student in an apartment in Harrisburg, Pennsylvania. My neighbor was an elderly retired woman (80+ seemed ancient to me at that age) who was the widowed wife of a retired steel worker. Her husband had worked all his life in the steel mills of central Pennsylvania with promises from big business and the union that, for his 30 years of service, he would have a pension and medical care to look forward to in his retirement. Instead he was one of the thousands who got nothing because the incompetent mill management and corrupt union (not to mention the government) raided their pension funds and stole their retirement. All she had was social security to live on.
In retrospect, the situation was laughable because here I was living on peanut butter and bread (or Ritz crackers when I could afford to splurge) for months at a time. When I got to know this poor figure and heard her story I felt worse for her plight than for my own (I, after all, I thought I had everything to in front of me). I was genuinely appalled at one point, as we exchanged stories and commiserated with each other over our situations, when she in her grandmotherly fashion tried to convince me that I would be “healthier” eating cat food (like her) rather than trying to get all my substance from peanut butter and bread. I couldn’t quite go there, but the impression was made. I decided that I didn’t trust big business to take care of me, and that I would take responsibility for my own future and myself.
Return to the early ‘80s, and here I was off to a terrifying start as a ‘wet-behind-the-ears’ contract software engineer... and two years later, thanks to the fine backroom, midnight effort by the sleazy executives of Arthur Andersen (the very same folks who later brought us Enron and other such calamities) and an equally sleazy New York Senator (Patrick Moynihan), we saw the passage of 1986 tax reform act with its section 1706.
For you who are unfamiliar, here is the core text of the IRS Section 1706, defining the treatment of workers (such as contract engineers) for tax purposes. Visit this link for a conference committee report (http://www.synergistech.com/1706.shtml#ConferenceCommitteeReport) regarding the intended interpretation of Section 1706 and the relevant parts of Section 530, as amended. For information on how these laws affect technical services workers and their clients, read our discussion here (http://www.synergistech.com/ic-taxlaw.shtml).
SEC. 1706. TREATMENT OF CERTAIN TECHNICAL PERSONNEL.
(a) IN GENERAL - Section 530 of the Revenue Act of 1978 is amended by adding at the end thereof the following new subsection:
(d) EXCEPTION. - This section shall not apply in the case of an individual who pursuant to an arrangement between the taxpayer and another person, provides services for such other person as an engineer, designer, drafter, computer programmer, systems analyst, or other similarly skilled worker engaged in a similar line of work.
(b) EFFECTIVE DATE. - The amendment made by this section shall apply to remuneration paid and services rendered after December 31, 1986.
· "another person" is the client in the traditional job-shop relationship.
· "taxpayer" is the recruiter, broker, agency, or job shop.
· "individual", "employee", or "worker" is you.
Admittedly, you need to read the treatment to understand what it is saying but it’s not very complicated. The bottom line is that they may as well have put my name right in the text of section (d). Moreover, they could only have been more blunt if they would have came out and directly declared me a criminal and non-citizen slave. Twenty years later, I still can’t believe my eyes.
During 1987, I spent close to $5000 of my ‘pocket change’, and at least 1000 hours of my time writing, printing, and mailing to any senator, congressman, governor, or slug that might listen; none did, and they universally treated me as if I was wasting their time. I spent countless hours on the L.A. freeways driving to meetings and any and all of the disorganized professional groups who were attempting to mount a campaign against this atrocity. This, only to discover that our efforts were being easily derailed by a few moles from the brokers who were just beginning to enjoy the windfall from the new declaration of their “freedom”. Oh, and don’t forget, for all of the time I was spending on this, I was loosing income that I couldn’t bill clients.
After months of struggling it had clearly gotten to be a futile exercise. The best we could get for all of our trouble is a pronouncement from an IRS mouthpiece that they weren’t going to enforce that provision (read harass engineers and scientists). This immediately proved to be a lie, and the mere existence of the regulation began to have its impact on my bottom line; this, of course, was the intended effect.
Again, rewind my retirement plans back to 0 and shift them into idle. If I had any sense, I clearly should have left abandoned engineering and never looked back.
Instead I got busy working 100-hour workweeks. Then came the L.A. depression of the early 1990s. Our leaders decided that they didn’t need the all of those extra Air Force bases they had in Southern California, so they were closed; just like that. The result was economic devastation in the region that rivaled the widely publicized Texas S&L fiasco. However, because the government caused it, no one gave a shit about all of the young families who lost their homes or street after street of boarded up houses abandoned to the wealthy loan companies who received government funds to “shore up” their windfall. Again, I lost my retirement.
Years later, after weathering a divorce and the constant struggle trying to build some momentum with my business, I find myself once again beginning to finally pick up some speed. Then came the .COM bust and the 911 nightmare. Our leaders decided that all aircraft were grounded for what seemed like an eternity; and long after that, ‘special’ facilities like San Francisco were on security alert for months. This made access to my customers prohibitively expensive. Ironically, after what they had done the Government came to the aid of the airlines with billions of our tax dollars … as usual they left me to rot and die while they bailed out their rich, incompetent cronies WITH MY MONEY! After these events, there went my business but not quite yet all of my retirement and savings.
By this time, I’m thinking that it might be good for a change. Bye to California, I’ll try Austin for a while. So I moved, only to find out that this is a place with a highly inflated sense of self-importance and where damn little real engineering work is done. I’ve never experienced such a hard time finding work. The rates are 1/3 of what I was earning before the crash, because pay rates here are fixed by the three or four large companies in the area who are in collusion to drive down prices and wages… and this happens because the justice department is all on the take and doesn’t give a fuck about serving anyone or anything but themselves and their rich buddies.
To survive, I was forced to cannibalize my savings and retirement, the last of which was a small IRA. This came in a year with mammoth expenses and not a single dollar of income. I filed no return that year thinking that because I didn’t have any income there was no need. The sleazy government decided that they disagreed. But they didn’t notify me in time for me to launch a legal objection so when I attempted to get a protest filed with the court I was told I was no longer entitled to due process because the time to file ran out. Bend over for another $10,000 helping of justice.
So now we come to the present. After my experience with the CPA world, following the business crash I swore that I’d never enter another accountant’s office again. But here I am with a new marriage and a boatload of undocumented income, not to mention an expensive new business asset, a piano, which I had no idea how to handle. After considerable thought I decided that it would be irresponsible NOT to get professional help; a very big mistake.
When we received the forms back I was very optimistic that they were in order. I had taken all of the years information to Bill Ross, and he came back with results very similar to what I was expecting. Except that he had neglected to include the contents of Sheryl’s unreported income; $12,700 worth of it. To make matters worse, Ross knew all along this was missing and I didn’t have a clue until he pointed it out in the middle of the audit. By that time it had become brutally evident that he was representing himself and not me.
This left me stuck in the middle of this disaster trying to defend transactions that have no relationship to anything tax-related (at least the tax-related transactions were poorly documented). Things I never knew anything about and things my wife had no clue would ever matter to anyone. The end result is… well, just look around.
I remember reading about the stock market crash before the “great” depression and how there were wealthy bankers and businessmen jumping out of windows when they realized they screwed up and lost everything. Isn’t it ironic how far we’ve come in 60 years in this country that they now know how to fix that little economic problem; they just steal from the middle class (who doesn’t have any say in it, elections are a joke) to cover their asses and it’s “business-as-usual”. Now when the wealthy fuck up, the poor get to die for the mistakes… isn’t that a clever, tidy solution.
As government agencies go, the FAA is often justifiably referred to as a tombstone agency, though they are hardly alone. The recent presidential puppet GW Bush and his cronies in their eight years certainly reinforced for all of us that this criticism rings equally true for all of the government. Nothing changes unless there is a body count (unless it is in the interest of the wealthy sows at the government trough). In a government full of hypocrites from top to bottom, life is as cheap as their lies and their self-serving laws.
I know I’m hardly the first one to decide I have had all I can stand. It has always been a myth that people have stopped dying for their freedom in this country, and it isn’t limited to the blacks, and poor immigrants. I know there have been countless before me and there are sure to be as many after. But I also know that by not adding my body to the count, I insure nothing will change. I choose to not keep looking over my shoulder at “big brother” while he strips my carcass, I choose not to ignore what is going on all around me, I choose not to pretend that business as usual won’t continue; I have just had enough.
I can only hope that the numbers quickly get too big to be white washed and ignored that the American zombies wake up and revolt; it will take nothing less. I would only hope that by striking a nerve that stimulates the inevitable double standard, knee-jerk government reaction that results in more stupid draconian restrictions people wake up and begin to see the pompous political thugs and their mindless minions for what they are. Sadly, though I spent my entire life trying to believe it wasn’t so, but violence not only is the answer, it is the only answer. The cruel joke is that the really big chunks of shit at the top have known this all along and have been laughing, at and using this awareness against, fools like me all along.
I saw it written once that the definition of insanity is repeating the same process over and over and expecting the outcome to suddenly be different. I am finally ready to stop this insanity. Well, Mr. Big Brother IRS man, let’s try something different; take my pound of flesh and sleep well.
The communist creed: From each according to his ability, to each according to his need. The capitalist creed: From each according to his gullibility, to each according to his greed.
UNIVERSAL DEBT FORGIVENESS IS ABOUT TO BE ANNOUNCED
THE DOCTRINE OF ODIOUS DEBTS HAS BEEN SPECTACULARLY REVISITED
From Alcuin Bramerton
Before the cabal's US-UK war of occupation and plunder began in Iraq in March 2003, Iraqi exiles expressed the hope that in a post-Saddam democratic Iraq, there would be a fair and equitable disposition of Saddam's debts. These Iraqis wanted the future administration of Iraq and the international community to review the debts accumulated under Saddam's r?gime. Those loans which had been used for benign purposes should be restructured and paid back by Iraq over a prudent time period. Those loans which were used for objectionable purposes and which did nothing to enhance the well-being or prosperity of the Iraqi population at large, should be struck off the record immediately and completely.
This illustrates one of the core principles of debt forgiveness. Why should Iraqis be forced to repay the US, the British, the French, the Germans, the Russians, and all the others who had financially supported Saddam's oppression of them?
The Iraqi argument for debt forgiveness had a sound basis in law. It reflects the century-old legal principle of the Doctrine of Odious Debts.
The Doctrine of Odious Debts was created to further international finance by limiting the ability of governments to repudiate debts. Three conditions had to apply before a sovereign state could repudiate a debt: (1) The debt must have been incurred without the informed consent of the citizenry of the state. (2) The debt must not have benefitted the citizenry of the state. (3) The lender must have been aware of conditions (1) and (2) at the time that the loan papers were signed.
The United States employed these principles after the Spanish-American War to repudiate the Cuban debts.
If a despotic power incurs a debt which is manifestly not for the needs of the State, or not in the plain interest of the State, but is a debt incurred solely to strengthen the position the despotic cabal as a self-serving faction within that State, the debt is odious. The debt is not an obligation for the nation; it is a cabal debt, a personal debt of the cabal which incurred it. And the debt falls with the fall of the cabal.
The Doctrine of Odious Debts not only promotes accountability, it promotes democracy in the debtor state as, one by one, the nature of the inherited debts are articulated in a public legislature.
The Doctrine of Odious Debts also promotes democracy in creditor states. In Canada and most European nations, the lending of state enterprises is generally hidden from taxpayers. Canada's export credit agency, Export Development Canada, for example, is exempt from Canada's Access to Information law. In the case of Iraq, state agencies from France, Germany and Russia may have made questionable loans. Under an odious debt process, they would need to establish that they acted with due diligence to be entitled to repayment. Knowing this, they would be less likely to make questionable loans in future.
Debt forgiveness and the Doctrine of Odious Debts also applies to individuals. The same principles have legal traction on loans or structured financial inducements made by financial institutions such as banks, mortgage-lenders, insurance companies, stock-trading entities, energy conglomerates and pharmaceutical firms.
If the intention of the financial transaction tied to the loan, or tied to the financial inducement, is extortion, if it is, in effect, an elite scheme to bamboozle the borrower with small print or to blind him with science, that loan or inducement, should be struck off the record immediately and completely. The debt was not incurred with the informed consent of the borrower. The debt did not benefit the borrower. And the lender was well aware of these facts when the loan papers were signed.
Universal debt forgiveness is on the way as part of the planet's new gold-backed financial system. It has deep historical roots and powerful support in natural law.
Have you noticed that the world around you seems to be different?
Are you becoming aware that people are relating to you differently? Or that as you communicate with or offer assistance they don’t seem able to hear you or to accept what you have to say?
Have you noticed that your relationship to your friends and others are no longer as interesting as they once were?
Many people are noticing huge changes in their relationships, some of which are not at all easy to deal with. Although we are aware of the “Shift” and are being prepared for change, we nonetheless are having these same challenges.
Many of us are also finding ourselves wondering how we can fulfil our roles as healers, teachers and leaders, how we can the best way to offer assistance to those around us, and how to draw the line consciously (and kindly) when others around are choosing to stay stuck and asleep.
The Shift we have all been waiting for has now arrived and is rapidly expanding within, through and around each of us. It is in the process of changing everything that we know and more particularly how we know and how we experience what we know.
The most fundamental aspects to this Shift will be very personal. The primary focus of these aspects is to redefine and transform how we perceive, understand and have a relationship with every aspect of what is external to our conscious awareness. Your sense of relationship will never again be the same as the Shift progressives through 2012. When we think of the word relationship, we think of lovers, husband-and-wife, child and parent. “Me in relationship to you, I in relationship to my friends, co-workers and those I love as well as those I dislike.” But there is much more to how we have come to perceive and understand our relationship with others.
When the Creator said, “Go to the farthest edge of the farthest edge so that I may know myself in my fullness,” you ran to the front of the line saying, “Send me!” What the Creator was actually saying was, “I wish to know myself in relationship to all that surrounds me.” But throughout time as we know it our understanding and demonstration of relationship has changed to something considerably different. We have come to know ourselves not by how we perceive ourselves in relationship to that which is around us, but instead have learned to perceive our relationship to all that is around us based on what those around us think of us.
For example, I may not have any interest in red shirts, but all of my friends wear red shirts because they are the ‘in’ thing. So I give up my seniority, and deny my own alignment with what is my truth in order to fit in, to become one with, to be accepted by those outside of me who are expressing what is right and wrong, good and bad, and what I should and should not do and I put on my red shirt.
From the moment we draw our first breath to the moment we release our last, we are conditioned to define and measure ourselves by one thing only: our relationship to all that is outside of us. We are systematically trained and conditioned by those who raise and nurture us to enter into a “consensus reality,” or “group agreement,” that many times has nothing to do with whom we are, and everything to do with the customs and belief systems that conditioned our parents and grandparents, who were in turn influenced by the society in which they were raised.
Consensus reality is a very powerful influence. It structures our relationship to and with all things outside of us. More importantly, it conditions and severely limits our understanding of the relationship we have with our self.
From early childhood we learn that what the outside world thinks of us is more important than what we each individually think of ourselves. As we grow, what we think and believe, and how we act, respond and behave in our third dimensional reality is influenced, shaped and molded by that which is outside of us. Hence, almost everything about us, from our attitudes and habits, likes and dislikes, to our career choices and aspirations has its foundation in this group agreement: “This is how it's done; this is what is acceptable and unacceptable.”
We have learned to feel the thoughts and feelings of others, and to seek approval from those around us before we act. We have learned to “test the waters” by not fully expressing our own thoughts without first checking in to determine the acceptability of what others have to say. We’ve learned to read others’ body language to discern if it is safe to express our own desires, hopes, and dreams, before we can act on them without fear. Without realizing it, we have virtually built our sense of our self on the opinions and approval of others: “Am I okay? Do you approve of me? Am I acceptable in the eyes of the consensus reality?”
This is all about to change!
Contrary to everything you have been taught to believe, relationship is NOT about what other people think of you. Although this is a fundamental Truth that you intellectually know, you are about to perceive this from a significantly expanded perspective. Through this understanding you will discover that your internal relationship with yourself is the most powerful relationship you can have. From this vantage point everything outside of you becomes a gift to relate to on your own terms.
As many of us are becoming aware, there are two great waves of Light within the Shift that are bringing about a transformation within each of us. The First Wave of Light is clearing our old memory patterns and the belief systems of the consensus reality that do not support our well-being. This Wave is destabilizing and dissolving everything that is not aligned with our internal patterns of well-being and our relationship to our own truths. It is increasing our capacity to hold a higher Light quotient, providing us with the opportunity to access more information, greater wisdom and enlightenment of what we already know but have forgotten.
The Second Wave is a higher dimensional vibration of Light that is providing us with the opportunity to step into certainty, personal power, and command, and bringing about a balance*. This wave is also bringing about choices and opportunities to co-create, coexist, and cooperate without the judgments and opinions of right and wrong, good and bad and what you should or should not do.
This Shift of consciousness is triggering an Awakening. And in the process, countless millions are experiencing significant changes in their relationships. Many are beginning to realize that they can no longer be in relationship to one another in the same old way. We are being given the opportunity to perceive “relationship” through different eyes, and, in so doing, we are gaining the keys to unlock many lifetimes of conditioning that have prevented us from being able to distinguish between “WHO I AM” and “Who I am NOT.”
As this transition unfolds, however, many people are finding themselves in confusion as all their points of reference, all the things they have been taught to trust, admire and build the foundation of their lives and beliefs upon are destabilizing before their eyes.
The third dimensional established institutions are crumbling. The structures of life that feed, house and keep us safe are breaking down. Suddenly we are seeing that the very authorities that we most believed, from healers who said “Come to me,” teachers who have proclaimed they have the Truth to the leaders who say, “Trust me,” and all those to whom we have looked for guidance, have built their houses upon shifting sands.
As difficult as such changes may be for many, it is important to know that there IS a purpose to all that is occurring. That purpose is to shift your relationship from what is outside of you to an alignment with what is inside you, from depending on the truths of others to discovering and setting your compass by your own truth. The first Wave of Light is not destabilizing “that which You Are,” rather, it is allowing you to clear away “that which You Are Not.”
As this occurs, a second very powerful wave of Light is providing us with the opportunity to rewire, rebuild and remember who we are and where we have come from. The second wave is providing the opportunity to refill the cup, in a manner of speaking. It is within the second wave that the realignment of our emotional body is being altered in the sleep space each night. It is through this second wave that a kinder, gentler you is being crafted. As “who you are not” is being cleared, there is a renewed relationship that is being remembered. You are beginning to remember the relationship you have with the Heart and Soul; a relationship that allows you to think from the Heart and act from the wisdom of the Soul. It is through this relationship that you will begin to “know yourself” and realign with the Love that you are within the Heart.
But love is a concept that is so vast the rational mind is not capable of perceiving its fullness. However, when you begin to live Love in its unique aspects, Appreciation, Gratitude, Well Being, Beauty, Kindness, Graciousness and Certainty literally become living words. As these living words become internalized, a magical shift begins, initiating the activation of the living etheric light body within.
This is the opportunity that’s unfolding throughout 2010. These are the stepping stones that will build the framework for our next level of ascension.
Jim Self is an author, international speaker, and teacher of the Tools for Mastering Alchemy. This work is in co-creation with Archangels, Ascended Masters and Teachers of Light. Free DVD and Free Tele-Classes. Jim is presenting Free in-person classes and the weekend seminar, Creating the Personal Power Field around North America. http://www.MasteringAlchemy.com or 775-851-8950 ~ Copyright: You may share this article with your friends as long it is kept whole and our website is included. Thank you.
In recent weeks I have been greatly disturbed by two reports, both of which – from different (unconnected) reporters, and instancing quite different times and places – graphically illustrate the illuminasti’s widespread activities and usage of paedophilia, child pornography and abuse and a wide range of other sexual perversions. These are used as psychic engineering techniques for many purposes: perhaps one of the most important is that people intended for high office are groomed from very early childhood to be mentally and psychically controlled by prolonged exposure to, and as the object of, such obscene activities.
I have no doubt that such activities exist, and I think we will all be shaken when we discover just how are widespread and systematic these practices are. It is nothing less than a global, satanic control system.
My purpose here is not to debate the detail of what the illuminazi are doing, but rather, to ask the question ‘What is our responsibility here?’
Now, a related side-comment. It is part of the illuminazi technique to frequently create powerful statements and social memes that directly oppose each other. This is ‘control by confusion’.
How is this related? Because I find my response to this appalling situation - which several brave souls are now seeking to uncover at great risk to themselves - is subject to what feels like one of these oppositions. The two statements I experience as being in play for me are:
1) Don’t concentrate on negative things around you, you will give them energy and draw them to you: together with
2) Shine the light of truth upon all that is corrupt and out of integrity, and it will wither and die in the public spotlight.
Now, it may just be me, but I cannot make these two statements co-exist. You simply cannot do both at once – it is either / or.
So, I ask myself if either of these statements might be an illuminasti insert? Well, if you were in the habit of doing many really nasty things – for the purposes of power and control – might you want to program the more spiritual (and therefore energetically powerful) of the population to want to draw away and focus on something ‘more positive’? In which case, just maybe statement #1 is their self-protection meme. Of course, this kind of statement is most effective when done using something very close t the truth – as, indeed, this statement is close to a truth, since there is no value in seeking out and complaining of supposed negativity to no good purpose.
The question, then – How do I respond? Is this very nasty stuff to be avoided at all costs lest my very soul be tainted? Should I seek to maintain my energetic purity and frequency, knowing that resonating it helps by influencing others – and therefore, not engage in such issues? Or should I use my powerful energetic white magic – perhaps working with others for yet greater power - to serve the whole by seeking ways to cleanse, seal off and de-activate those promoting and involved in such activity. Might such action remove a really negative global energetic anchor linking the whole (i.e., including you and me) into the lowest of frequencies?
Or something else? Is there another way to proceed that I have not yet considered?
I am looking for input from my Quantum Family, those who can resonate with these words, here - it will be highly valued as I inch my way forward on this issue. And then, I sense, there are many more such issues we shall have to take a view of in a similar way.
For me, if I am to be effective in helping to close down much negativity on our planet, the issue comes down to ‘what is being a spiritual warrior all about?’ And am I prepared for that level of personal challenge?
There is great potential for very valuable and evolutionary perspectives to emerge here with new understandings and potentials for action evolving – that Spiritual Warrior thing coming to the fore as we, part of the populace at large, continue our awakening and in so doing build towards the New Reality.
Now, what follows may (for those who are spiritually orientated) be a little controversial – and the more healthy a debate if it is!
I am very well aware of those teachings that tell us that, to the extent that we can move forward and hold higher energies, we must concentrate on this task as it helps to raise the (the frequency of the) whole. I have written about this extensively over the years, having received what to me is very sound guidance of good integrity on the subject: but, there is a problem in there somewhere, one that I sense is really of key importance.
The Illuminasti are past masters at taking over and distorting the wisdoms of others, thereby creating confusion (since it is a powerful part of their ‘divide and rule’ philosophy and practice). For example: often, in governmental legislation drawn up by their embedded agents, a directive will appear on one page, only to be directly contradicted on a later page. The world of Government, legislation and ‘public rules’ is littered with this (quite intentional) technique. In that it gets lots of people spinning and frustrated, the confusion so created makes a platform for the next move – which, of course, is quite likely to be yet another grand piece of manipulation. Take this general ‘sowing confusion’ approach as a theme / technique that appears in many other places. Close to home, they will often set one piece of spiritual wisdom directly against another – both seeming eminently reasonable – and have exactly the same effect of leaving us spinning and frustrated. And disempowered.
In order to achieve this, they like to seed ‘memes’ – ideas that run through whole sectors of the population, often ideas that seem quite reasonable, but actually manipulate us all in a subtle way. Some of these memes (the ‘spiritual’ ones) can be paired against actual wisdoms = the same confusion effect once again. I sense that much ‘New Age’ and spiritual thinking has been and is littered with such destructive memes, although, to date, I have only spotted a few.
Back to the topic in hand.
I am quite certain that a key element of our spiritual journey up through frequency is the progressive move from ‘service to self’ to ‘service to the whole’. I do not have any doubts about this – and I believe this kind of service (however it looks to the individual) can be given without putting ones frequency at risk. As long as we are aware that there are always some risks that can, indeed, diminish our frequencies, and protect ourselves accordingly.
As an ex-trekkie I remember the Borg in Star Trek – perhaps you do too? These high tech hive-cubes floated through space absorbing every life-form they came across. The while, they broadcast the terrifying phrase ‘resistance is futile….’ - and so it seemed to be. A great piece of intimidation, highly effective – few would turn and fight them.
Now, lets imagine another warring group, here on Earth and claiming an absolutely dominant position (even though their numbers are tiny). Yep, you’ve got it – the Illuminazi. Their greatest fear is ascending humanity coming into its power, against which they have no defence – and they know it. Just like the Borg, they are putting out the pseudo-spiritual messages / memes that say:
• Don’t look back
• You are only responsible for yourself and your own frequency
• Don’t resist or engage
• Never focus on negative things (= their works and intent), you will only give it / them energy
• You (as a spiritually elite group) have now been separated onto a higher path, don’t worry about the others they can now take their own paths
• The Illuminasti are defeated, you don’t have to worry about them
• And so forth.
These are all so very, very close to the truth, but Personally, I DON’T BELIEVE ANY OF IT!
For me, at least, and after much contemplation, I have come to the conclusion that the growing belief system (= new age inserts) they have created from a number of spiritual near-truths IS ABSOLUTE BULL SHXXXT
Much too close to the Borg’s ‘resistance is futile’ position for my liking. After all, if you were the Illuminazi on one side of the war, and you could get your opposition (= us) to simply roll over, you would be delighted. Saves so much efforting! And the opposition, us, would be completely subjugated in the process. Oh, and you can forget any attempt at ascension (and don't forget, ascension appears to have failed at least once before, for the kind of reason being set out here).
This whole scenario stands four-square against the ‘service to the whole’ which I take to be an imperative of our evolutionary journey.
We are in the ultimate asymmetrical war. It is a war over the evolution (or not) of the human soul on planet Earth – this means us, and there is no way we can simply duck out (even when encouraged by the other side!) The Illuminazi come at the population with poisoning, chemtrails, wars, monetary collapses, mass housing grabs, homeland security, etc, etc – you know the menu well. Its all the old 3D stuff. One of their weapons of choice is the artificially generated frequency (range) used for dumbing down, agitating, creating suicidal feelings, etc. HAARP, Radio masts, TV frequencies, mobiles are all a part of this.
But, this is where the asymmetry comes in: we hold a powerful trump card, an ace that they cannot have – the absolute ultimate built-in frequency weapon, which gets ever more potent as our own frequencies rise. We are steadily moving up the frequency scale towards the establishing of a very New Reality on Earth. As we do so we are progressively gifted with ever greater power to create, seal off, mirror back, decree against – and many other frequency-based white-magic techniques. Yes, we have to learn the way, in the early stages we may be a little clutsy - but used in a context of high integrity, there is no reason why such techniques should damage our own frequencies. Indeed, acting in integrity, and with a pure heart, my understanding is that the spiritual warrior will actually increase personal frequency - while doing the warrior’s work. Done properly, this work contributes to our path, and does not negate it. Very, very Knights of the Round Table!
This is about being willing, and spiritually equipping ourselves, to take RIGHT ACTION. The key message is not about restraining potential action out of concern for our own continuing ‘spiritual welfare’ – that is another Illuminazi meme I believe is running. It IS about taking real action in a form that does not sacrifice the frequencies of those spiritual warriors who are able to engage by choosing to be involved and be pro-active. Maybe, direct action is not for everybody, but for me, in the context of the need for service to the whole, what is really out of integrity is:
• Not looking back but leaving the others (of humanity) to their fate (= making us just another pawn taken off the board)
• Being selfishly responsible for ourselves and our own frequencies to the exclusion of what is happening to others ( “ )
• Not being willing to resist or engaging in the face of great crimes against humanity ( “ )
• Being not prepared to focus on negative things (= the collected works of the Illuminazi) so as to understand what is being done and find ways to negate the many despicable moves being made against humanity (= the whole)
• Believing that we (as an evolving spiritual elite) have now been rewarded by being separated onto a higher path, so we don’t need to worry about the others as they can now take their own paths which will be completely appropriate for them (= we believe ourselves to be very ‘off the hook’!... and our warrior role completely disabled in the process.)
• Believing that Illuminati are defeated, so we don’t have to worry about them. (they are, in fact, exceedingly dangerous right to the very last moment – especially as they sense that they are loosing!)
We don’t need to engage in a forever battle, but just to keep helping, encouraging and protecting the rearguard as we move on upwards. Plus breaking lots of bonds, along with a few Illuminazi heads! And bringing light and an ending to all that paedophilia and lots of other really nasty nazi stuff. Because we can, we have the frequency weapons to do the job. And such action for the whole fundamentally affects the nature and extent of our ascension, and what we finally succeed in creating as our New Reality. I, for one, really don't want to build the energy of 'abandonment' into the New Reality from day one!
And think about this: we are constantly told that 'we are all one'. This being so, how can we possibly entertain leaving a large part of our one-ness (in its human form) behind?
Meanwhile, the poor, sensitive, misunderstood and downtrodden Illuminazi would like us to throw our ace away, please.
As any of you who listen to "What's Ailing America?" every Saturday at 3 PM EST on www.republicbroadcasting.org know, I have been covering some facts that are hard to deal with the last few months, especially corruption within religions, and last week, the global pedophile ring that is responsible for at least 800,000 children going missing just in the US every year.
These truths must be faced by people of conscience if we are to turn things around; for unless you know what is happening, you cannot act to stop it. In general, Patrick Jordan and myself have received very positive responses from people grateful to learn the truth about these issues; only a few people chose to attack the messenger, or put their heads back into the sand. Much to my surprise, it is the issue we raised last week re: the truth behind the founding fathers and their secret destiny for America (i.e., to bring in the New World Order as is happening now before our eyes), as well as the fact that "we the people" are not parties to the Constitution which has caused a ruffling of feathers, especially among some veterans who took an oath to defend this document and its principles, and then risked their lives to do so. In fact, one loyal listener who is a veteran called me to let me know that because of this info, he knows people who are now saying they will no longer recommend my show to others.
I do not want to cause anyone psychological trauma; however, I know that the only way to turn things around is to open the eyes of a critical mass of people to the reality of how we got to where we now stand; in an "opposite day" world, where pure evil is rewarded and protected, and people of conscience are tortured, persecuted and murdered. I do not want others to experience what I and many others have experienced for speaking the truth, as I know that not many people could endure it.
I would like to thank the listener who sent me the following citations from various court cases which takes the mask off the myth of the Constitution. To all of you who doubt this information, I encourage you to look up these cases yourself. Prove me wrong...for I do not want this to be true. And if you have not yet seen Ralph Epperson's video on this subject, please go to http://video.google.com/videoplay?docid=2436716892875755103#. PROVE HIM WRONG in regards to what he says the founding fathers did re: America's secret destiny.
Here are some citations which show where "we the people" actually stand in America:
1. The IRS is not a U.S. Government Agency. It is an Agency of the IMF (Diversified metal Products v. IRS etal. CV-93-405E-EJE U.S.D.C.D.I., Public Law 94-564, Senate Report 94-1148 pg. 5967, Reorganization Plan No. 26, Public Law 102-391.) (And to learn how all "agencies" are under the ADMINISTRATIVE STATE which is the shadow government, please listen to the show I did with Ralph Winterrowd which can be accessed at n) and how it is being used to steal your children for non-vaccination, etc.: http://thelightofdayradioshow.com/archives/RBN-BACKUP/Dr-Rebecca-Carley_2-21-09_Comm-Free.mp3.
2. The IMF is an Agency of the UN.(Black’s Law Dictionary 6th Ed. Pg 816)
3. The U.S. has not had a Treasury since 1921 (41 Stat. Ch. 214 pg. 654)
4. There are no judicial courts in America and there has not been since 1789. Judges do not enforce Statutes and Codes. Executive Administrators enforce Statutes and codes (FRC. V. GE 281 US 464, Keller v. PE 261 US 428, 1 Stat. 138-178)
5. There have not been any Judges in America since 1789. There have just been Administrators. (FRC v. GE 281 US 464, Keller v PE 261 US 428 1Stat. 138-178)
6. New York City is defined in the Federal Regulations as the United Nations. Rudolph Giuliani stated on C-Span that “New York City was the capitol of the world” and he was correct. (20 CFR chapter 111, subpart B 422.103 (b)(2)(2)(also check out Rev. 14 in reference to what happened on 9/11)
7. You own no property, slaves can’t own property. Read the Deed to the property that you think is yours. You are listed as a Tenant.(Senate Document 43, 73rd Congress 1 st. Session)
8. You cannot use the Constitution to defend yourself because you are not a party to it.(Padelford Fay & Co. v. The mayor and Alderman of the City of Savannah 14 Georgia 438, 520)
9. The King of England financially backed both sides of the Revolutionary war. (Treaty at Versailles July 15, 1782, Treat of Peace 8 Stat 80)
10. America is a British Colony.(THE UNITED STATES IS A CORPORATION, NOT A LAND MASS AND IT EXISTED BEFORE THE REVOLUTIONARY WAR AND THE BRITISH TROOPS DID NOT LEAVE UNTIL 1796). Republican v. Sweers 1 Dallas 43, Treaty of Commerce 8 Stat 116, The society for Propagating the Gospel & c. v. New Haven 8 Wheat 464, Treaty of Peace 8 Stat 80, IRS Publication 6209, Articles Untitled 24 2006 3 12 21 47 9:47 PM of Association October 20, 1774.
11. Britain is owed by the Vatican.(Treaty of 1213).
12. The Pope can abolish any law in the United States (elements of Ecclesiastical Law Vol. 1 53-54)
13. We are slaves and own absolutely, nothing not even what we think are our children (Tillman v. Roberts 108 So. 62, Van Koten v. Van Koten 154 N.E. 146, Senate Document 43 & 73rd Congress 1 Session, Wynehammer v. People 13 N.R. REP 378, 481)
14.“The People” does not include you and me. (Barron v. Mayor & City Council of Baltimore. 32 U.S. 243)
15. It is not the duty of the police to protect you. Their job is to protect the Corporation and arrest code breakers. Sappv. Tallahasse, 348 So. 2nd 363, Reiff v. City of Philadelphia, 477 F. Supp. 1262, Lynch v. N.C. Dept. of Justice 376 S.E. 2nd. 247.
16. Everything in the “United States” is for sale: roads, bridges, schools, hospitals, water, prisons, airports, etc. I wonder who bought Klamath Lake? Did anyone take the time to check? (Executive Order 12803)
17. We are Human capital (Executive Order 13037)
18. The FCC, CIA, FBI, NASA and all of the other alphabet gangs were never a part of the United States government. Even though the “US government” held shares of stock in the various Agencies.(U.S. v. Strang, 254 US 491, Lewis v. U.S. 680 F. 2d, 1239)
19. A 1040 form is for tribute paid to Britain.(IRS Publication 6209 IMF decoding manual)
20. We are enemies of the State (Trading with the Enemy Act 1933 Act of 1917 & 1933) Trading with the Enemy Act 1933 Act of 1917 & 1933 (People declared the Enemy) Oct. 6, 1917, under the Trading with the Enemy Act, Section 2 subdivision ( c ) Chapter 106 – Enemy defined “other than citizens of the United States…” March 9, 1933, Chapter 106, Section 5, subdivision (b) of the Trading with the Enemy Act of Oct. 6, 1917 (40 Stat. L. 411) amended as follows:“…any person within the United States.” See H.R. 1491 Public No. 1.
Please share this with others who are ready to face reality...
NOTE: This was received from Dr. Carley, who is a highly respected friend of mine, via email. I do not think it is on her website shown above.
AS THE FINANCIAL SWAMP IS DRAINED MORE AND MORE DISINFORMATION ARTISTS ARE EXPOSED
By Benjamin Fulford, January 12, 2010
As the Financial World War 3 approaches its climax, more and more players reveal their true intentions. Reading the various web sites with “inside” information has become very interesting recently because they are all starting to reveal their true colors. We have Tom Henegan now openly cheerleading for Ambassador Wanta and downplaying his link with the discredited church of global warning. Now Christopher Story has come out of the closet and revealed he is rooting for “a Line-Item payment in favor of Mr. Cottrell,” i.e. Michael Cottrell of Pennsylvania Investments. Then there are Casper and Poof working for funding for the “programs,” whatever those may be. Then there is Alex Jones with his constant doom and gloom and his Bronfman connection. His ambition seems to be for power. After that there is “Sorcha Faal” i.e. David Booth & friends who show support for Obama and pretend to be in the Kremlin instead of Naval Intelligence.
As for me, I am a spokesperson for the Black Dragon Society. We believe that finance is the process of deciding what humanity does in the future. We believe the planet faces an emergency situation that requires emergency action. Over a billion people are starving and we have already wiped out over 30% of all species on the planet and will soon wipe out more. Then we have the West as a slave society controlled by high level gangsters whose only interest seems to be endless warfare and the looting of the planet’s resources. We want to stop them from doing all that bad stuff and free the slaves too.
Our membership includes:
1. High level members of the Rothschild family who want to use some of their gold to pay off US external debts. They agree to help the planet so long as they can continue to live in their big castles and be surrounded by servants. We say OK, why not. They can mobilize much of the British Empire so let’s work with them.
2. The P2 Masonic Lodge in Italy. They control the Vatican and the Mafia and have also agreed to try to help save the planet. So long as they offer to help the poor, the hungry and the weak of this planet we say “good, let us see action now and not words.”
3. The Japanese secret government. This is a group of high level families and individuals who have secretly ruled Japan for at least a couple of thousand years and, although they distrust Westerners, they agree to help the planet. This group can activate a 100 million member sleeper network known around the world as local “martial arts societies.”
4. The Chinese communist party. They are determined that Asia will never submit to Western rule again but have also stated they have no wish to rule the West. They are working towards creating real-time, live internet-based democracy. They will probably succeed and the rest of us will have to come up with a meritocratic system that is at least as good or we will risk being left behind. We believe in becoming equal partners and friends with the Chinese so long as they agree to help end poverty, environmental destruction and war.
5. The Pentagon white hats and space command. These are the people with all those levels of security clearance above the President. They were so busy looking out at the universe they missed the hell on earth and are now trying to make amends. We say please release your high tech to the people of the world and set them free.
6. The average people of the planet earth. We believe that if you randomly went around to different parts of the planet and asked people if they would like to end war, poverty and environmental destruction, 99% would say “yes.”
The real problem lies in the details i.e. who gets to control the new money printing machine. We believe this right belongs to the people and their governments, not secretive private individuals. We think the new system will offer enough money that many competing plans can be carried out at once. If Mr. Wanta wansta build a high speed rail network in the US, well, why not. If Mr. Cottrell has some plans for the world other than becoming personally filthy rich, he should delineate them. The Casper and program people also sound like they have wonderful, varied plans that should be financed. The bottom line is that the vast majority of humanity is living far below their potential because of poor financial leadership. The more people with good ideas and plans for the future who can be financed, the better. Remember, finance and economy is just about people deciding what to do with what they have.
BLACK AUTHOR OF MATRIX/TERMINATOR FILM IDEAS WINS LAWSUIT – 11/25/09
The Matrix Copyright Infringement Case
This little known story has met a just conclusion, as Sophia Stewart, African American author of The Matrix will finally receive her just due from the copyright infringement of her original work!
A ten-year dispute has ended involving Sophia Stewart, the Wachowski Brothers, Joel Silver and Warner Brothers. Stewart's allegations, involving copyright infringement and racketeering, were received and acknowledged by the Central District of California, Judge Margaret Morrow presiding.
Stewart, a New Yorker who has resided in Salt Lake City for the past five years, will recover damages from the films, The Matrix I, II and III, as well as The Terminator and its sequels. She will soon receive one of the biggest payoffs in the history ofHollywood, as the gross receipts of both films and their sequels total over 2.5 billion dollars.
Stewart filed her case in 1999, after viewing the Matrix, which she felt had been based on her manuscript, 'The Third Eye,' copyrighted in 1981. In the mid-eighties Stewart had submitted her manuscript to an ad placed by the Wachowski Brothers, requesting new sci-fi works..
According to court documentation, an FBI investigation discovered that more than thirty minutes had been edited from the original film, in an attempt to avoid penalties for copyright infringement. The investigation also stated that 'credible witnesses employed at Warner Brothers came forward, claiming that the executives and lawyers had full knowledge that the work in question did not belong to the Wachowski Brothers.'
These witnesses claimed to have seen Stewart's original work and that it had been 'often used during preparation of the motion pictures.' The defendants tried, on several occasions, to have Stewart's case dismissed, without success.
Stewart has confronted skepticism on all sides, much of which comes from Matrix fans, who are strangely loyal to the Wachowski Brothers. One on-line forum, entitled Matrix Explained has an entire section devoted to Stewart. Some who have researched her history and writings are open to her story.
Others are suspicious and mocking. 'It doesn't bother me,' said Stewart in a phone interview last week, 'I always knew what was true.'
Some fans, are unaware of the case or they question its legitimacy, due to the fact that it has received little to no media coverage. Though the case was not made public until October of 2003, Stewart has her own explanation, as quoted at aghettotymz.com: 'The reason you have not seen any of this in the media is because Warner Brothers parent company is AOL-Time Warner.... this GIANT owns 95 percent of the media.... let me give you a clue as to what they own in the media business... New York Times papers/magazines, LA Times papers/magazines, People Magazine, CNN news, Extra, Celebrity Justice, Entertainment Tonight, HBO, New Line Cinema, DreamWorks, Newsweek, Village Roadshow and many, many more! They are not going to report on themselves. They have been suppressing my case for years.'
Fans who have taken Stewart's allegations seriously, have found eerie mythological parallels, which seem significant in a case that revolves around the highly metaphorical and symbolic Matrix series. Sophia, the Greek goddess of wisdom has been referenced many times in speculation about Stewart. In one book about the Goddess Sophia, it reads, 'The black goddess is the mistress of web creation spun in her divine matrix.'
Although there have been outside implications as to racial injustice (Stewart is African American), she does not feel that this is the case. 'This is all about the Benjamins,' said Stewart. 'It's not about money with me. It's about justice.'
Stewart's future plans involve a record label, entitled Popsilk Records, and a motion picture production company, All Eyez On Me, in reference to God. 'I wrote The Third Eye to wake people up, to remind them why God put them here. There's more to life than money,' said Stewart. 'My whole to the world is about God and good and about choice, about spirituality over 'technocracy' .'
If Stewart represents spirituality, then she truly has prevailed over the 'technocracy' represented in both the Terminator and the Matrix, and now, ironically, by their supposed creators.
Stewart is currently having discussions with CBS about a possible exclusive story and has several media engagements in the near future to nationally publicize her victory.
June 13th 2004. Sophia Stewart's press release read: 'The Matrix & Terminator movie franchises have made world history and have ultimately changed the way people view movies and how Hollywood does business, yet the real truth about the creator and creation of these films continue to elude the masses because the hidden secret of the matter is that these films were created and written by a Black woman...a Black woman named Sophia Stewart. But Hollywood does not want you to know this fact simply because it would change history. Also it would encourage our Black children to realize a dream and that is...nothing is impossible for them to achieve!'
Sharyl Attkisson is a CBS News correspondent and investigative reporter. She’s covered Capitol Hill since February 2006 and has been a Washington-based correspondent there since January 1995. She was also part of the CBS news team that received the Edward Murrow Award in 2005 for overall excellence. Additionally, she received an Outstanding Investigative Journalism Emmy in 2002 for a series on the Red Cross.
In case you didn't realize it, Sharyl Attkisson is the investigative reporter behind the groundbreaking CBS News study that found H1N1 flu cases are NOT as prevalent as feared. In fact, they’re barely on the radar screen. How did this startling information come about, and why is the U.S. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) painting a different picture entirely? I spoke directly with Sharyl Attkisson to find out.
WHAT LIES ON THE OTHER SIDE OF GOALS? THE INCREDIBLE ANSWER - IT AWAITS YOUR EMBRACE NOW
Mon Nov 9, 2009 10:38 pm (PST)
by Neal Donald Walsch
I have been looking at an important question. Probably the most important question of my or anyone else's life: What lies on the other side of goals?
Believe it or not, this is a question that no one ever asked me, ever -- much less answered. IS it "more of the same," just Bigger and Better? I hope not. There's got to be more to life than just chasing after the carrot -- however big or important the carrot may be.
So let's discuss that today. But first, I've got to tell you about Edmonton...
I'm in Calgary today, writing this. I flew in from Edmonton yesterday, following a wonderful evening program there Saturday night. It was the biggest crowd we've had at any of our stops on this Canadian tour, and the program could easily have gone on for another two hours. That's how much interest there was in the room.
The New Spirituality is catching on in our world, and people are showing up in larger and larger numbers every day as we provide opportunities to explore its dimenions.
Now, let me tell you about Edmonton, the city. This is BOOM TOWN, Canada. The real thing. I've never seen anything quite like it. The economy there is taking off like a skyrocket. Everywhere you look there are Help Wanted and Now Hiring signs. I mean, everywhere. On the way in from the airport we must have seen 50 of them, at virtually every third place of business. Downtown, same thing.
Businesses are hiring, hiring, hiring. There are more jobs, of every kind, than there are people to fill them. As a result, out-of-work folks from everywhere else in Canada are streaming into Edmonton daily -- and still they can't seem to fill the void.
Canada invites and welcomes immigrants with open arms, I was told by a Canadian. So, if you live in the States or elsewhere and can't find work...run, don't walk, to Edmonton.
Let me give you an example of just what I'm talking about here. At the Ramada Inn where we stayed, the front desk clerk we worked with had just been hired a week earlier. We asked for the bellman to help us in getting our bags to our room and they said, "Sorry, we don't have any bellmen to do that." Got to our room a little hungry after traveling, so called Room Service for a quick sandwich. "Sorry, we don't have Room Service up and running just now. Not enough personnel."
It's not that the Ramada does not want to provide these basic hotel services, it's just that the labor pool is being tapped and drained severely. Here's what's happening: every able-bodied man is going "up north" to work in the oil fields, where they can earn big money. Alberta -- the province where Edmonton lies -- has been going through a huge oil boom. So much so that last year the Provincial Government (similar to State Governments in the U.S.) gave every taxpayer a check for $400, returning its revenue surplus to the people!
No one works for minium wage in Edmonton. If you own a business in Edmonton and you tell someone you'll hire them for minimum wage, potential workers laugh at you and walk out. They can do better anywhere. There is enormous competition for workers. I've never seen anything quite like it; I've never been in a place where it was the workers who had the upper hand in hiring situations. One can get a job overnight. I mean, literally, you can drive into town and be employed before you get to your motel room, where you were going to stay until you found work. In fact, the motel itself will probably hire you!
AND, if you have a high skill set, you can practically write your own ticket in this town. So...I pass this on to you if you or someone you know has just had a devil of a time finding employment. If you don't mind a place with a little Real Winter (possible snow and cold many days late October through early March), a place with a growing and vibrant New Spiritual community, a place with lots of new cultural happenings and a sizzling young people's atmosphere (a drive down Whyte Avenue on a Saturday night is as good as being in San
Francisco), pack up and head on up the road! Edmonton is a great place to be!
(And no, I do not work for the Edmonton Chamber of Commerce! I'm just hugely impressed with what I saw there. This is Opportunity City/Canada right now!)
So now, to our question for the day. What lies on the other side of goals?
As I was explaining the other day, I am in the blessed position (and I really do "get" the blessing that I have received, believe me) of having met or exceeded just about every goal I ever set in my life. I have lived my Life Dream in every way.
Remember when we were young how we used to kid around and say, "When I make my first million I'm going to..."? Well, I've made my first million...and my second...and I'm working on my third. I have the big house, the nice car, the "running money" to go into any store and get just about anything I want. I'm not bragging about that, just simply saying what is so. I also have worldwide recognition, a life work that has brought me immense satisfaction, friends and acquaintances in high places, entree just about anywhere, and a travel schedule that has taken me to every corner of the globe. I just don't know what more, in terms of physical joys and comforts, I could want. And I am deeply grateful. Humbly, deeply grateful.
(I may not seem very humble, judging from the way I'm flashing this news all around in these last two blogs, but I promise you....I am very humbly grateful to God. I'm sharing all of this here simply in order to make a point.)
I've done it all and got it all -- and now what? I mean, really. Now what?
Do I just set new goals...so that I really can have Bigger, Better, More? (I read a story in the newspaper here yesterday about a man who made $85 million on the lottery, and he said his life goal now is to parley that into a billion. He wants to be a billionaire within ten years. And I thought as I read that...gosh, when is enough enough? This guy's 85 million makes my 2 million look like chump change, and I think that I've reached the End of Striving for physical things. What does he know that I don't know? Or is it the other way around...)
In addition to the fact that I've got all the physical "stuff" I could ever want, I've also done just about everything I've ever wanted to do (see my last blog for the rundown!). So I'm one of the lucky ones. So now what? I'm still young. I'm not 79. I'm not 86. I'm 63. So now what???
Now maybe I can get down to the Real Work that I came here to do. Now maybe I can grow my soul. Now maybe I can experience Who I Really Am. And now maybe I can understand that I did not have to do all that other stuff first before I got to this. That understanding is important to me, because it will stop me from thinking that there is still more I have to do before I get about the business of my spiritual evolution.
Why is it that I have always put my spirituality last? And what would it take for me to put it first? Other people have done it. Many other people have done it. And most of them have been people who have accumulated much less in terms of physical "stuff" and accomplished much less in terms of physical "doingness" than I. Their focus was never on "doingness" to begin with! It was on beingness.
My mother never "did" the raft of things that I have done, and never gathered the things that I have gathered, yet she achieved more in one week of her lifetime than I have achieved in the whole of mine. She achieved goodness. I mean, she actually achieved that. And compassion. And kindness. And patience. And givingness. She achieved givingness. She demonstrated, every day of her life, what it was like to give, what it was like to put happiness and peace and comfort and understanding and joy into the lives of others, with absolutely no thought, zero thought, of her own peace and comfort and joy.
My mother achieved Unconditional Love as a State of Being in her lifetime. Now that's an achievement. It makes whatever I may have done look like Cub Scout stuff. And my mother isn't alone in this. Many people have been able to do what my mother did. Or, to put it more accurately, they have been able to be what my mother was being every day that I knew her: caring, giving, loving, and selfless.
These are the qualities that will make a difference in how we feel about our life on the last of our days. I am deeply aware, keenly aware, of the people that I have hurt while undertaking my journey -- the journey that I have described in such detail here. Who cares if I have achieved all these things if I am a slob, a manipulator, an emotionally insensitive, utterly selfish, occasionally even ruthless person who will do anything and hurt anybody to satisfy his own desires? What difference will it make to my soul?
Sooner or later we ask ourselves, what in the world am I doing here? In my case, I've had to wait until I did just about everything that I ever wanted to "do" before I realized that none of this had anything to do with why I came here. None of it was relevant. None of it was why I inhabited a physical body, why I returned to the Realm of the Relative from the Realm of the Absolute.
Only now, in my later years, have I understood that I am on a Journey of the Soul, not a journey of the body -- and that I could have taken THAT journey without doing a damned thing. (Which would have been nice to know a lot earlier, when I was doing one "damned" thing after another.)
So now I want to embark, finally, on the journey that I came here to take: a journey to Oneness, a journey to Wholeness and Completeness and real, true, happiness. It is a journey that is taken through the doorway of understanding and compassion and giving and forgiving and sharing and caring and NOT caring a twit about what I get out of it, but caring only about what I put into it and about what you get out of it, so that through the gifts I give to you, I am revealed to myself. I experience my Self as Who I Really Am.
This is what my mother did. This is what all saints do. And saviors, too. For when we see what they have done we are in that moment saved -- rescued from any False Thought we may ever have had about Who ALL of Us Really Are. My mother, and all saints, served as a model for the rest of us, for those of us who are busy, busy, busy going about our busy-ness and getting things "done."
My task here is to know who I am. To see it, to realize it, to experience it, and to demonstrate it, so that the process of my spiritual evolution may proceed. It is a joyous by-product of this
proces that others may see and realize who they are, and all the world may be awakened.
I have not accomplished my task. I have barely begun.
Though I speak with the tongues of men and of angels, but have not love, I have become as a sounding brass or a clanging cymbal. And though I have the gift of prophecy, and understand all mysteries and all knowledge, and though I have all faith, so that I could remove mountains, but have not love, I am nothing. And though I bestow all my goods to feed the poor, and though I give my body to be burned, but have not love, it profits me nothing.
Love suffers long and is kind; love does not envy; love does not parade itself, is not puffed up; does not behave rudely, does not seek its own, is not provoked, thinks no evil; does not rejoice in iniquity, but rejoices in the truth; bears all things, believes all things, hopes all things, endures all things.
Love never fails. But whether there are prophecies, they will fail; whether there are tongues, they will cease; whether there is knowledge, it will vanish away. For we know in part and we prophesy in part. But when that which is perfect has come, then that which is in part will be done away.
When I was a child, I spoke as a child, I understood as a child, I thought as a child; but when I became a man, I put away childish things. For now we see in a mirror, darkly, but then face to face. Now I know in part, but then I shall know just as I also am known.
And now abide faith, hope, love, these three; but the greatest of these is love. [I Corinthians chapter 13]
And I have not learned this, nor demonstrated it. For love tells the truth in all things, and speaks the truth as soon as it is known. Love would never seek to have desires quenched at the expense of the hearts of others. Yet this I have done...and more than once.
Yes, I have achieved some things in my life, and gathered much of the "stuff" that many seek to gather. Yet now, in my 64th year, I see that my journey has just begun. I must set about learning, at last, to love. And I must set about that journey now. For it is as the Buddha said: "The trouble is, you think you have time."
NOTE: If you would like to send a comment or a question to Neale here at the Weekly Bulletin, you may do so by addressing an email to: weeklybulletinresponse@CwG.org
Neale Donald Walsch (http://www.cwg.org) Neale Donald Walsch is a modern day spiritual messenger whose words continue to touch the world in profound ways. With an early interest in religion and a deeply felt connection to spirituality, Neale spent the majority of his life thriving professionally, yet searching for spiritual meaning before beginning his now famous conversation with God. His With God series of books has been translated into 34 languages, touching millions of lives and inspiring important changes in their day-to-day lives.
The CONCEPT (Correct or Not) that YOU Are GOD (and so is Everyone ELSE) is the “Ultimate” Concept in the Universe---that You ALREADY Are the Infinite SOURCE of All Things; and that there is an Absolute ONENESS to Everything!
The WAY to ACHIEVE This is Already WITHIN You--Seek It THERE
It is just an “Awakening/Expanding/Releasing/Returning” Process---that can NOT really be “Explained”; but CAN be “Experienced” (by You, for You!).
Reflections of Others (as I remember them, not necessary “exact”):
● You are GOD to the extent You KNOW You are GOD. ~ Walter Russell, Divine Iliad
● In the SILENCE the Absolute REALITY is Realized. ~ Source Unknown
● When You LET GO of Thinking--- BEINGNESS Appears. ~ Larry Crane, Release Technique
For those who “reverence” BIBLE, these Clues (and Others) are hidden therein:
● Know ye not that “Ye Are Gods”.
● The Kingdom of God is “Within You”
● I and The Father are “One”.
● Be Still and know that “I Am God”.
● Nearer than Breathing am I, and you “Know Me Not”
(Various versions--Emphasis mine)
And the Things I tell Myself:
● Stop Thinking and Start “ BEING”--It’s Your NATURAL State
● You ALREADY Are, so just BE---It’s EASY to do!
Presently, I employ three modalities in my Quest:
● Meditating (Stilling, Vacating the Mind etc.)
● Contemplating (Who/What I Really Am etc.)
● Releasing (Negativity--Thoughts, Feelings, Beliefs. etc.)
The CREATION consists of three GRAND Divisions:
● TOP: Spiritual SORCE*, ALLNESS, INFINITE, GOD, etc. Beyond Name and Form (even though we use Words to hazily explain). This is Your Spiritual "HOME"!
● MID: Mental MIND, EMOTION, EGO (I call this Grand Division "EGOland" or the "MESS in the Middle"). Religion and Guru’s terminate here--Gods and Goddesses originate here!
● BOT: Physical BODIES, Pains & Problems.
We are all INFINITE BEINGS Infinitely Equal. The very best person who ever lived (take Jesus for starters) and the very worst person who ever lived (take Hitler for starters) are both Infinite Beings. It is just that Jesus was 100.0% Realized and Hitler was 0.001% Realized. It is simply a matter of becoming "consciously" what we ALREADY ARE unconsciously!
The Main, Primary, almost Only, Tenet in YAG is this: YOU ARE GOD AND SO IS EVERYONE ELSE! It is just a matter of becoming "Consciously" what we ALREADY Are "Unconsciously")
Basically, 3 things sum it up:
1--The Essence of IT is: You ALREADY ARE an Infinite Being, so just BE.
2--The Problem is: We are all INFINITE, thinking we are infinitesimal.
3--The Solution is: To STOP thinking and START Being (get out of the "mind"” where everything "else" is).
The ABSOLUTE Realization that YOU are the "Infinite Sorce* of All Things" also activates your Spiritual Potential---once realized and actuated, you can spontaneously go "there" as described previously!
Spend as much time in BEING as you can--ideally, we should be in BEINGNESS all the time and live/function from there. IDENTIFY with Your Beingness ONLY!
In addition to "Surrender", as previously mentioned--two other Principles are especially helpful in the "Expansion" Phase from the Individual to the Infinite:
REFLECTING --Contemplate upon the Perception of What You Really Are--the Infinite SORCE* of ALL Things, the ALLNESS! GRATITUDE--Be Grateful, Just Be Grateful! You have found the WAY to Your Spiritual HOME--your QUEST is in IT’s final phase!
When You finally “ ARRIVE”, you realize there never was anything but "I", all along, "ONE"”. Source Unknown
Yours for the QUEST---Hank
* Ron, When I use the word "SOURCE" to represent GOD, I spell it "SORCE"
HISTORY OF RECENT UFO DISCLOSURE PLANS - November 4, 2009
By Steve Beckow
Unknown to most members of the general public, mounting tension is rising over the rumored plan of President Obama to announce the existence of life in outer space within two months. Many are welcoming the news, but people with a vested interest in denying that extraterrestrial life exists are reacting with fear and denial.
The first solid rumor of a date for disclosure came at the Zurich Conference of Project Camelot, an independent film-making company dedicated to exposing the New World Order and welcoming the galactic visitors who encircle the Earth at the present time. On July 12, 2009, PC's co-founder Bill Ryan was onstage when intuitive David Wilcock commented: "Don't forget some other things that Pete Peterson said about the end of this year."
Bill replied: "David's reminding me of something else that Pete Peterson said about the end of this year. What [he] told us was that President Obama was going to reveal the reality of extraterrestrial contact before the end of this year. He said that he had been told this by people who knew that the television time on the networks has already been booked. The date he told us, if I remember it right, was November 27. What he also told us was that it was one of these ritualistically-significant dates, numerologically. And he said that what Obama was going to talk about was the reality of contact with six friendly ET races. And when we asked him why he used the word "friendly," he said that some of them are unfriendly but most of them are friendly." (1)
The subject was next discussed when David Wilcock was on Coast-to-Coast AM on Oct. 6, 2009. He said to George Noory: "They're trying to do as much as they can to get people ready [for disclosure] so that when the truth is revealed, the society will basically hold together. ... I've heard of three completely separate ways in which disclosure could happen. ... Finally some of these insiders are actually sitting down and talking to me, sometimes in person, sometimes over other methods and I have learned so much, so much more that I know now that I'm allowed to talk about. Everything you can imagine is out there. Every type of human you can imagine is out there, good, bad and indifferent. There are artifacts everywhere. It's just staggering how stupid we are compared to what there really is. ... There are many, many, many intelligent species in the universe." (2)
David attempted to give his readers an idea of what the significance of disclosure would be for humanity: "If the truth comes out, it is bigger than the foundation of Islam, it is bigger than the foundation of Christianity, because at the time these events only reached several hundred thousand people. This would be the biggest event in human history, the most spontaneous shift that humanity has ever seen. Everything that's being talked about on the nightly news right now would pale into significance.... The point is that everything is going to change in such a dramatic way. Everybody who's listening to this has probably had that experience where they first started to get over the tipping point and realize, hey, you know, maybe this stuff is true. Well, imagine what would happen if the planet is told. And imagine how bad that would be for the controllers because what they're seeing is the loss of their ability to be seen, mainly by themselves, as the gods of the Earth. ... It's so vast and there's so many probability vortexes, it's hard to really nail down [what will happen after the announcement]. But I will say that it's going to rock the foundations of the world. I would say that we will have some very dramatic economic changes [including NESARA], which probably are not negative. There will probably be a fair a number of people who will be so stunned that they won't want to go to work for a while. But I don't think that's going to be a long-term problem. I think that's one of the things that the planetary leaders are most concerned about is that people will just stop working. It's going to be such a massive change that any movie that has been made before this happens, any television show that was written before this happens, any magazine, any website that was written before this happens, will become irrelevant on some levels. ... Everything that we ever say, everything that we ever think will be completely based on this. If we know that there are other humans out there and that we're not the only game in town, and we suddenly realize that aliens are not these scarey, horrible insect-like creatures but they're people like us, it means our family is a lot bigger than we think. I think in many ways it would reaffirm faith and world religions because now you realize that every ancient religion has reports of people who look like us who can do very amazing stuff and come here and basically teach us how to lead more virtuous lives. (3)
Probably David is correct in predicting that dislcosure will cause a paradigm shift on the planet, a releasing of old beliefs, and a firing of the imagination that no other event in history will come close to matching.
Then came a message from another source, from the galactics themselves. An off-planet spokesman, well-respected in the 2012 community, named SaLuSa of Sirius, who speaks through Mike Quinsey of Great Britain, confirmed that the galactics planned to disclose their existence and end the UFO cover-up by the end of this year: Perhaps somewhat sooner than you might have anticipated, the first meaningful contact is soon to be announced. The news is already spreading like wildfire, and it is going to be a moment when history will be made. You have reached a new stage in this cycle that will see you move even further ahead, and all the promise of a new age will begin to unfold before your eyes.
"Does it not seem appropriate that at a time when you will be preparing to celebrate Christmas and the New Year, you will have another reason that will bring joy to so many of you. Between now and the end of the year the first official announcement of our existence will go ahead, and none other than President Obama will sit at that table. Over a period of time we had been anticipating a more open contact, but in keeping up with your likely re-action it has been decided to take a formal approach. The message that you are to receive, whether direct or through President Obama will set the stage for a series of announcements." (4)
For me, personally, hearing it from SaLuSa, whom I had come to respect among galactic commentators, sent me into joy. SaLuSa was later to make a second comment about it, which only firmed up my expectations. He said, "Everything is set for a series of dramatic events, but we ask you to continue exercising you patience and accept that all is well. To turn around a situation that has been created over hundreds of years does not happen overnight, but with our help you will see incredibly fast changes. That it is at all possible is great a credit to those Lightworkers who have paved the way over the last hundred years or more." (5)
Doubts seem always to return to the human mind. Even though we now had two respected terrestrials pointing to disclosure and one respected galactic, more confirmation seemed needed.
The next major confirmation came from a spirit communicator. Matthew Ward, speaking through his mother Suzy Ward, is, like SaLuSa, one of the trusted guides of the 2012 community. Matthew died in a car accident on April 17, 1980. His mother later learned that he died so that telepathic communication could be set up between him and his mother. Matthew appears to be a terrestrial human of very evolved status and his monthly messages are widely discussed in among 2012ers. Now he had weighed in and said that disclosure was imminent.
"You have been waiting a very, very long time—far longer than you are consciously aware—for the momentous occasion on your near horizon. For several years various messengers of the light have been telling you about the spiritually, intellectually and technologically advanced civilizations surrounding you—soon you will hear this truth from persons in your world whom you trust and respect. Members of the highest council that designed the master plan of Earth’s Golden Age have been observing the pace of flux in the collective consciousness, and they have agreed that the day is nearing when the presence of your celestial brotherhood must become widely known." (6)
Matthew said that there are "'open windows,' universally speaking, that offer the leaps in consciousness and spiritual clarity that enable a civilization to ascend into a higher density. These windows have opened for Earth’s peoples before, but they closed because the darkness that permeated the planet prevented the peoples from looking up at the stars instead of down at "feet of clay." This is the time of another open window, and as ordained by the Supreme Being of this universe, Earth will fly through on her way into the higher densities where love, peace and harmony is the basis of life. In her love for all her resident souls, she wants them to go with her. Measured progress is necessary to meet the energetic timeline of any open window, and much must be accomplished before this one closes around the end of your year 2012. Again, Earth’s soaring through and onward to her destination in fifth density is assured—it is up to individual souls to chart their own journey.
"The tenacious resistance of the dark minds among you has managed to keep a lid on the massive deception that has kept the peoples in bondage for millennia. The dark force knows it has lost the war for global domination, but its battle continues for individuals who have not heeded their souls’ intuitive messages to see the light. The current strategy of the puppets of darkness is to stir up anger, confusion and divisiveness—the antithesis of the spirit that can see and seize opportunities for benevolent change—and even as tiny bits of pervasive corruption and depravity seep into headlines, a great deal still is operating to keep the masses deceived, suppressed and consciously asleep." (7)
For months, and maybe years, the planned sequence of events intended to loosen the grip of the dark and announce the presence of the galactic had been discussed. It had always been said that the arrest of the Illuminati would come first and then disclosure of the UFO presence. But now Matthew announced a change of plans.
"Because that is not in keeping with Earth’s desire for her beloved souls, the master planning council in conjunction with spiritually evolved beings among you decided to reverse the order of two major parts of the plan. Originally it was thought that exposure of the dark ones’ controlling hand in myriad worldly matters would arouse the sleepers and then there would be the revelation that newcomers from distant lands have come to help you clean up the mess your world is in. But awakening of the masses isn’t happening as quickly as need be and time is of the essence, so it has been agreed to jolt the many sound sleepers with something that cannot miss getting everyone’s attention—your governments acknowledging that other intelligent beings are in the universe." (8)
Here then was the much-awaited announcement of impending disclosure from the trusted voice of Matthew Ward as well.
Matthew also discussed a second event, which the 2012 community refers to as the "decloaking," when large numbers of UFOs drop their shield of invisibility and show themselves, probably accompanied by mind-bending displays of manoeuvrability and light. While the event had been expected to be an overwhelming show, he now suggested that it might be better somewhat muted.
"According to information reaching us about the ‘unveiling,’ it will be understated rather than dramatic, such as a simultaneous fleet of spacecraft decloaking or a host of visitors landing. And there will not be an immediate outpouring of interaction with your brothers and sisters from faraway homelands—their introduction will be unfolded, not suddenly thrust upon a world where skeptics and nonbelievers will not greet this news with the same enthusiasm as you. Wisdom dictates caution so that suspense and doubt will not turn into chaos and fear." (9)
Finally, Matthew took a step that the spiritual hierarchy and Galactic Federation (SHGF) rarely do. He singled out one individual for commendation, David Wilcock. That mention of David from Ward did much to firm up the position of David for me and perhaps for many others.
"Because we honor every one of the many courageous souls throughout your world who are aiding the light forces, rarely do we single out an individual for such recognition. Speaking on behalf of all souls at this station, I do so in this instance because David Wilcock so clearly explains the interconnectedness of all in existence, how science and spirit are one and the same, and all incarnate experiencing is within the universal consciousness." (10)
The next confirmation of significance came from the man credited with starting the Exopolitics movement, Dr. Michael Salla. In the Hawaii Exopolitics Examiner, he announced, not only the welcome news of disclosure, but also the fact that the U.S. military had met face-to-face with the galactic recently.
"Two independent and confidential sources have revealed to me that face to face meetings have recently occurred between U.S. military officials with one or more groups of extraterrestrial visitors. This has allegedly led to confidence being built for future cooperation with the extraterrestrials that will be formally announced to the world public either at the end of 2009, or early 2010. In conclusion, a diverse number of sources and events point to some form of extraterrestrial disclosure being made by the end of 2009, or early 2010. Official disclosure will most likely emerge in either of two scenarios. One is that President Obama will announce the existence of extraterrestrial visitors, and describe one or more of these to the world. This scenario is supported by Peterson, Wilcock, and my own confidential sources. The second scenario is that an announcement will be made concerning the discovery of artificial structures at the moon’s South Pole, as revealed by the LCROSS mission. This scenario is supported by Hoagland. Whichever of the above scenarios is used for announcing the existence of extraterrestrial life or technology, President Obama will figure prominently. Behind the scenes, powerful institutions are ensuring that nothing derails the planned disclosure announcement. The disclosure will follow upon a year of greater government openness on UFOs in accord with a policy secretly developed at the United Nations." (11)
Salla’s exposure of the fact that the United Nations had secretly agreed to make 2009 a year of unprecedented openness around the subject of UFOs came as a surprise to me and many 2012ers. On this subject he revealed: "The impending disclosure announcement follows upon the secret implementation of a year long openness policy on UFOs and extraterrestrial life. Over the period February 12-14, 2008, the United Nations held closed doors discussions where approximately 30 nations secretly agreed on a new openness policy on UFOs and extraterrestrial life in 2009. The openness policy was implemented but never publicly announced due to threats against UN diplomats not to disclose details of the secret agreement. h The secret UN agreement was based on two conditions. First, UFOs would continue to appear around the world; and second, the openness policy would not lead to social unrest in liberal democracies. Both conditions have been satisfied making it possible for the next stage to begin – official disclosure of extraterrestrial life." (12)
He predicted that President Obama would take steps to turn the UN into a body that truly spoke for humanity.
"If extraterrestrial disclosure does occur at the end of 2009 or early 2010, President Obama will lead an unprecedented effort to promote global governance through the United Nations. The Obama administration and its supporters are poised to take a bold step forward in helping our planet become an interplanetary culture that openly deals with the challenges posed by extraterrestrial life." (13)
So now we had Bill Ryan announcing the date, David Wilcock commenting on its significance, SaLuSa confirming a date range (before the New Year), Matthew confirming that disclosure and the decloaking were imminent and that accountability – the arrest of the Illuminati -- was to follow, and Michael Salla revealing that the UN had made 2009 the year to be more open to the discussion of UFOs and perhaps to disclose their existence.
The only one left out of the circle of long-standing 2012 commentators was a group known as the "Spiritual Hierarchy and Galactic Federation," who had been speaking through Sheldan Nidle since the 1990s and had not made a really-specific statement on the subject up till now.
However, yesterday, Nov. 3, 2009, Nidle’s sources also confirmed the imminence of disclosure. Nidle implied that a divine deadline approached which was the event needed to cause all the personnel involved in a disclosure scenario to act.
"A special timetable is winding down, and quite soon some major events are to manifest in your world. We have the time forecasted in divine prose by the Creator. Heaven and Earth are set to move! A new reality is to appear before you almost in one fell swoop..... A great and sublime ride awaits us all. Fasten your seatbelts and prepare for the unexpected! We have come to a point where our presence needs to be known; it is time to make the forces behind the ongoing UFO cover-up step aside. Full disclosure is rapidly becoming something we expect from our Earth allies as well as from the major governments of your world. As you approach critical mass, it becomes increasingly silly to insist that you are alone in the universe. Over the past half-decade we have informed hordes of witnesses and supporters about our existence and about what Heaven has proclaimed for this world and its inhabitants. We have also witnessed the lunacy of this UFO cover-up in action: Many who continue to deny our existence do so while setting up a global network of exotic weaponry to be used against us! These 'toys' have bankrupted many governments and brought death and ruin to multitudes who are the lifeblood of the illegal drug trade set up to pay for the expensive weapons projects designed to prevent our arrival. It is time to end all of this and for these rogues to simply bow out. All their preventive scheming is futile: When Heaven decrees our arrival, it will happen easily and swiftly. Heaven is, after all, the final arbiter. (14)
The SHGF confirmed what Matthew had said, that secret meetings had been held to clear the way for disclosure. "Secret meetings have brought your world to the brink of a truly remarkable moment. Likewise, we have put the pressure on for disclosure. Once we are officially announced as real and benevolent, a new reality is thrown open. It is one thing to confuse the issue with denials and misinformation and quite another to admit the truth and let a new period of consciousness erupt into being! It is in this shining moment that many things hitherto considered impossible suddenly become very possible." (15)
Now, as we reflect on the imminence of disclosure, we are also aware of the antagonistic response of the New World Order, who own the means of broadcasting and communication. Of their efforts, we hear Matthew comment that "the current strategy of the puppets of darkness is to stir up anger, confusion and divisiveness." (16)
One channel publicly billed this last month of October as "Fear Month. They made blood run in cinematic streets by every possible means. Among them was the rebroadcast of the Alien Trilogy, probably the most damaging representation of "aliens" that Hollywood has made. They have not yet run its close second, "Independence Day," which represents aliens as wanting to harvest the Earth and then leave it desolated. October also saw the release of "District 9," which also raised fears about aliens.
The month of November will see the airing of the "V" series, which, as I understand it (since I don't intend to watch it), represents aliens as wanting to take over the Earth for nefarious reasons. Then will come a negative, fear-based representation of "2012" itself. As we get closer and closer to the date for disclosure, the NWO is doing everything it can to raise fear in the population. Hopefully the impact of the constantly-rising energies will negate their efforts and the population of the world will welcome the homecoming of our galactic brothers and sisters.
So many mistaken beliefs will fall on the day when President Obama introduces his interstellar visitors to us. We will see that these visitors are our family, our galactic brothers and sisters, human like us but far more advanced. They come in peace and they come to bring us answers to the way out of our hopeless mess. They come just in the nick of time, because what we've done with our planet financially, socially and militarily shows that we could not have dug ourselves out of the hole we created, without their assistance.
It's time to run the Black Hats outta town. It's time to end the New World Order's game, close the casino, and lock the doors.
It's time to lower the boom of justice on the Black Hats in the World Bank, the IMF, the BIS, Congress, the Federal Reserve, the Bilderbergers, Goldman Sachs, Bank of America, the corrupt judicial system, the corrupt police system, NORTHCOM, NORAD, CIA, FBI, everyone.
Everyone who turned the world into a reckless gaming house in which the rich got richer and the poor got poorer, everyone who grew more powerful at the expense of the rights and freedoms of others.
Everyone who denied basic medicare to citizens. Everyone who made subprime loans to poor people, collaterlized them, raised their rates, and then evicted the poor.
Everyone who took out “Dead Peasant” insurance policies on their employees and made millions from them, sharing none with the relatives of the deceased.
Everyone who engineered 9/11, Oklahoma City, the London bombings, Madrid, and Mumbai to stampede the world. Everyone who began illegal wars in Afghanistan and Iraq, who took away citizens' rights, pushed for martial law, and set up FEMA camps to incarcerate “trouble-makers.”
Everyone who designed viruses – AIDS, SARS, avian flu, and now swine flu - some of them racially-specific - and vaccines whose only purpose was to sicken and kill in the name of depopulating the globe. Everyone who seeded the skies with chemtrails causing sickness and death from Morgellon's disease.
Everyone who kept technologies from us that would have freed us from fossil fuels back in the 1950s. Everyone who murdered inventors who discovered how to make cars run on water. Everyone who created space-based weapons systems to extend their rule into space.
Everyone who kept from us knowledge of the populated world of space. Everyone who created a secret space service that has colonized Mars since at least the 1970s.
Everyone who murdered to hide Roswell from us and created secret areas of research where they back-engineered miracles gained from downed space craft and from treaties with the Greys and then kept from the public.
Everyone who ran torture chambers overseas, underground at secret bases, or at Guantanamo. Everyone who ran institutions like the School of the Americas where gangsters were trained to overthrow democratically-elected regimes. Everyone who created and used Blackwater and Whackenhut to create a private army and prison or who sentenced children to jail as a business.
Every Congressional Representative and every Senator who accepted bribes, favors, sex, trips and any other inducement that flawed their judgment and sold their vote to the Black Hats.
Everyone who plotted to take over Canada and Mexico out of a so-called “Security and Prosperity Partnership” (ironic misnomer) or start a third world war with Iran, Russia, or China to bring the population down from 6.8 billion to a more manageable 500 million, destined to be slaves.
Everyone who developed HAARP and used it to cause earthquakes and hurricanes, killing tens of thousands. Or ULF (ultra-low-frequency weapons) and experimented with them, bringing down American bridges.
Everyone who speculated in currency and brought down national economies which they then held hostage to onerous debt payments. Everyone who made loans to third-world countries and then robbed them of their resources when they couldn't pay.
There is so much more - a media bought and paid for, deep undergorund military bunkers, Pine Gap, Australia space base, Area 51, depleted-uranium weapons, printing truckloads of dollars.
This planet, reeling under the black-hole debt of the derivatives megabubble, will no longer tolerate your rule. We know you, Black Hats. We know the whole range of your activities. We know you inside and out. We know your business. Three showers a day won't keep you clean. The Black Hats, the hangers on, the vultures, the whole gang - it's time for you to go.
“THE DOG ATE YOUR MORTGAGE” — GRETCHEN MORGENSON (NY Times) HITS IT AGAIN - October 25, 2009
PHH MORTGAGE LOSES IN NEW YORK CASE
Federal Judge Robert D. Drain wiped out a $461,263 mortgage debt on the property. That’s right: the mortgage debt disappeared, via a court order. — “I think that I have a more than 50 percent doubt that if the debtor paid this claim, it would be paying the wrong person,” he said. “That’s the problem." – dubious proof-of-ownership tactics may no longer be accepted practice. They may even be viewed as a fraud on the court. Some judges are starting to scrutinize the rules-don’t-matter methods used by lenders and their lawyers in the recent foreclosure wave.
The United States Trustee, a division of the Justice Department charged with monitoring the nation’s bankruptcy courts, has also taken an interest in the White Plains case. Its representative has attended hearings in the matter, and it has registered with the court as an interested party.
FOR decades, when troubled homeowners and banks battled over delinquent mortgages, it wasn’t a contest. Homes went into foreclosure, and lenders took control of the property.
On top of that, courts rubber-stamped the array of foreclosure charges that lenders heaped onto borrowers and took banks at their word when the lenders said they owned the mortgage notes underlying troubled properties. (Editor’s Note: INFORMATION VS. EVIDENCE: THE REPRESENTATION IS USUALLY A FINESSE ACCOMPLISHED BY A LAWYER REPRESENTING THE BANK MAKING THE REPRESENTATION OF OWNERSHIP. The representation is not only false, it isn’t evidence unless the lawyer is a competent witness — i.e., one who has personal knowledge through personal perception of the facts being asserted, and swears to it under oath, subjecting himself or herself to cross-examination)
In other words, with lenders in the driver’s seat, borrowers were run over, more often than not. Of course, errant borrowers hardly deserve sympathy from bankers or anyone else, and banks are well within their rights to try to protect their financial interests.
But if our current financial crisis has taught us anything, it is that many borrowers entered into mortgage agreements without a clear understanding of the debt they were incurring. And banks often lacked a clear understanding of whether all those borrowers could really repay their loans.
Even so, banks and borrowers still do battle over foreclosures on an unlevel playing field that exists in far too many courtrooms. But some judges are starting to scrutinize the rules-don’t-matter methods used by lenders and their lawyers in the recent foreclosure wave. On occasion, lenders are even getting slapped around a bit.
One surprising smackdown occurred on Oct. 9 in federal bankruptcy court in the Southern District of New York. Ruling that a lender, PHH Mortgage, hadn’t proved its claim to a delinquent borrower’s home in White Plains, Judge Robert D. Drain wiped out a $461,263 mortgage debt on the property. That’s right: the mortgage debt disappeared, via a court order.
So the ruling may put a new dynamic in play in the foreclosure mess: If the lender can’t come forward with proof of ownership, and judges don’t look kindly on that, then borrowers may have a stronger hand to play in court and, apparently, may even be able to stay in their homes mortgage-free.
The reason that notes have gone missing is the huge mass of mortgage securitizations that occurred during the housing boom. Securitizations allowed for large pools of bank loans to be bundled and sold to legions of investors, but some of the nuts and bolts of the mortgage game — notes, for example — were never adequately tracked or recorded during the boom. In some cases, that means nobody truly knows who owns what.
To be sure, many legal hurdles mean that the initial outcome of the White Plains case may not be repeated elsewhere. Nevertheless, the ruling — by a federal judge, no less — is bound to bring a smile to anyone who has been subjected to rough treatment by a lender. Methinks a few of those people still exist.
More important, the case is an alert to lenders that dubious proof-of-ownership tactics may no longer be accepted practice. They may even be viewed as a fraud on the court.
The United States Trustee, a division of the Justice Department charged with monitoring the nation’s bankruptcy courts, has also taken an interest in the White Plains case. Its representative has attended hearings in the matter, and it has registered with the court as an interested party.
THE case involves a borrower, who declined to be named, living in a home with her daughter and son-in-law. According to court documents, the borrower bought the house in 2001 with a mortgage from Wells Fargo; four and a half years later she refinanced with Mortgage World Bankers Inc.
She fell behind in her payments, and David B. Shaev, a consumer bankruptcy lawyer in Manhattan, filed a Chapter 13 bankruptcy plan on her behalf in late February in an effort to save her home from foreclosure.
A proof of claim to the debt was filed in March by PHH, a company based in Mount Laurel, N.J. The $461,263 that PHH said was owed included $33,545 in arrears.
Mr. Shaev said that when he filed the case, he had simply hoped to persuade PHH to modify his client’s loan. But after months of what he described as foot-dragging by PHH and its lawyers, he asked for proof of PHH’s standing in the case.
“If you want to take someone’s house away, you’d better make sure you have the right to do it,” Mr. Shaev said in an interview last week.
In answer, Mr. Shaev received a letter stating that PHH was the servicer of the loan but that the holder of the note was U.S. Bank, as trustee of a securitization pool. But U.S. Bank was not a party to the action.
Mr. Shaev then asked for proof that U.S. Bank was indeed the holder of the note. All that was provided, however, was an affidavit from Tracy Johnson, a vice president at PHH Mortgage, saying that PHH was the servicer and U.S. Bank the holder.
Among the filings supplied to support Ms. Johnson’s assertion was a copy of the assignment of the mortgage. But this, too, was signed by Ms. Johnson, only this time she was identified as an assistant vice president of MERS, the Mortgage Electronic Registration System. This bank-owned registry eliminates the need to record changes in property ownership in local land records. (Editor’s Note: Many foreclosure mill law firms are now establishing “one-stop shopping” where the assignments are fabricated, executed by their own employees, who then file affidavits in court. The defense lawyer or bankruptcy lawyer who takes this “information” at face value has forgotten basic rules of evidence. His client is prejudiced by his ignorance)
Another problem was that the document showed the note was assigned on March 26, 2009, well after the bankruptcy had been filed.
Mr. Shaev’s questions about ownership also led to an admission by PHH that, along the way, it had levied an improper $450 foreclosure fee on the borrower and had overcharged interest by an unstated amount.
John DiCaro, a lawyer representing PHH at the hearing, was in the uncomfortable position of having to explain why there was no documentation of an assignment to U.S. Bank. He did not return a phone call seeking comment last week. Ms. Johnson, who couldn’t be reached for comment, did not attend the hearing.
According to a transcript of the Sept. 29 hearing, Mr. DiCaro said: “In the secondary market, there are many cases where assignment of mortgages, assignment of notes, don’t happen at the time they should. It was standard operating procedure for many years.” (Editor’s Note: This is why a COMPLETE forensic review and analysis is required rather than just a TILA AUDIT).
Judge Drain rejected that argument, concluding that what had been presented to the court just did not add up. “I think that I have a more than 50 percent doubt that if the debtor paid this claim, it would be paying the wrong person,” he said. “That’s the problem. And that’s because the claimant has not shown an assignment of a mortgage.”
Mr. Shaev said he was shocked when the judge expunged the mortgage debt.
“We are in uncharted territory,” he said. “Right now I am in bankruptcy court with a house that has no discernible debt on it, yet I have a client with a signed mortgage. We cannot in theory just go out and sell this house because the title company won’t give a clear title on it.”
Among the next steps Mr. Shaev said he would take is to file an amended plan or sue to try to get clear title to the property.
Late last week, PHH appealed the judge’s ruling. But Mr. DiCaro and PHH are in something of a bind. Either they will return to court with a clear claim on the property — including all the transfers and sales that are necessary in the securitization process — or they won’t be able to produce that documentation. If they do produce it, they will then have to explain why they didn’t produce it before.
Oh, what a tangled web these mortgage lenders weave.
Written by Jeff Nielson, Saturday, 24 October 2009 11:00
Jeff Nielson is from Canada and is a writer/editor for Bullion Bulls Canada (http://www.bullionbullscanada.com/#content). He has a personal background in law and economics. Bullion Bulls Canada provides general macro-economic and political commentary, since the precious metals markets are among the most complex (and misunderstood) in the world. It also provides basic coverage of Canadian precious metals mining companies. Canada is the global leader in mining exploration, and Canadian-listed mining companies (on the Toronto Stock Exchange and Venture Exchange) are responsible for the majority of the world's most-promising discoveries.
There is a lot of material in Mr. Harrison's commentary, so for those interested in this issue, I recommend going to the source to read it in full. I intend to focus on two of the extremely important issues in that piece: the question of who holds title to a securitized mortgage, and (just as important) who has “standing” to initiate and prosecute a foreclosure.
For people with no familiarity with legal jargon, who has “standing” in a legal proceeding is a question of “proximity” to the case before the court. The test for this issue generally being some directproprietary interest.
The problem for the Wall Street oligarchs, as they began to hatch their schemes to create the U.S. housing bubble (and their own, concurrent Ponzi-scheme) centered on the importance of their new “invention”: mortgage “securitization”. It is this “securitization” which was the key to creating the U.S. housing-bubble from the supply side – rather than most asset-bubbles which are (at least initially) fueled by demand.
Through this process, banks initiate a mortgage – and then immediately sell it to a 3rd-party. If Wall Street didn't initiate the mortgage themselves, then they became the first buyer in the chain. Once holding this mortgage, these “financial wizards” sliced-and-diced these mortgages, mixed them together, and packaged and sold them in such a convoluted manner that even with the resources of the U.S. legal system at their disposal, courts have been unable to determine who holds clear, legal title to these mortgages.
However, the Wizards of Wall Street anticipated this legal dilemma. In 1995, they created a shadowy entity called Mortgage Electronic Registration Systems (MERS). Wikipedia defines MERS in this manner:
Mortgage Electronic Registration Systems is claimed to be a privately held company that controls a confidential[emphasis mine] electronic registry designed to track mortgages and the changes of servicing rights and ownership of mortgage loans in the United States.
Before I explain the role being played by MERS, and the importance of that role, let me get back to securitization. The reasons why it was absolutely essential in creating a housing-bubble, and Wall Street's subsequent scams are relatively straightforward, when laid out step-by-step.
Wall Street pretended they were “reducing risk” by securitizing these mortgages and more or less moving them off of their own balance sheets. At first, this was probably true: by taking a fixed amount of debt, and dividing it amongst more people, the risk to the system as a whole (and the individuals) is reduced.
As a simple, numerical example, if I take $100 dollars of debt and initially divide that amongst 10 people, there is a given level of risk for each of these individuals and for the system as a whole (if too many parties should default). If I then split that same $100 dollars of debt and divide it evenly among 100 people, then that reduces both the individual risk and the systemic risk – since the smaller the individual debt, the lower the probability of default. The problem was that Wall Street (and the other players in this market) never intended for the amount of debt to remain fixed.
If you then take the same numerical example, but repeat that process nine more times you now have $1000 worth of debt (ten times the original amount) – but split amongst a group which is ten times larger. Thus, not only do the risks of each party revert to the original ratios (and risks of default) but the systemic risk is ten times greater because ten times more moneyand ten times more players are now identically leveraged.
It was through these debt “daisy-chains” that the Wall Street oligarchs were allowed to move from the reckless-but-standard 10:1 average leverage for this sector to an insane average of 30:1.
The problem was that both ratings agencies and regulators still pretended that there had been neither an increase in individual risk nor in systemic risk. To persuade these accomplices to “look the other way” with respect to risk required adding one, more ingredient: “credit default swaps” (CDS).
These were bogus “insurance policies” created by Wall Street to “insure” its entire Ponzi-scheme. This provided the pretext for credit-rating agencies to continue rubber-stamping “AAA” on these toxic securities, and allowed regulators Ben Bernanke and Tim Geithner (head of the New York Fed, at the time) to pretend that “systemic risk” was being “controlled”.
As I say, this was clearly and obviously fake “insurance”. Because everyone was pretending that systemic risk was only a tiny fraction of what it actually was, the same regulators allowed Wall Street to only list a tiny fraction of the necessary collateral/assets to write such “insurance policies”. It was through the willful participation of the ratings agencies and the Federal Reserve that Wall Street oligarchs supposedly “insured” over $50 trillion of credit default swaps – obviously an impossibility.
We need look at only one recent example of a credit default swap which “blew up” to make it clear that most of this market was a complete sham. In “Bankster Sues Bankster – AGAIN”, I referred to a lawsuit between Citigroup and Morgan Stanley.
In this example, it was Morgan Stanley which wrote the phony “insurance”, and Citigroup which was the beneficiary. Even after Morgan Stanley liquidated the collateral which “backed” this “insurance”, it is facing a 300:1 pay-out on this “policy”. With the entire U.S. mortgage market still sitting with a 10% delinquency level in this $50 trillion insurance scheme, and with each and every pay-out at astronomical odds (due to the grossly insufficient “collateral” for this insurance), a large number of pay-outs in this market must bankrupt Wall Street – as a matter of simple arithmetic.
This is yet another reason why Wall Street is hiding millions of already-foreclosed properties on their books – and refusing to sell them. The moment that the foreclosure sale takes place, the loss on the mortgage is “crystallized” and the credit default swaps are triggered. In my commentary on Friday, I explained how/why I estimated that Wall Street is currently hiding at least 5 million foreclosed properties in this manner. Meanwhile, the next big wave of foreclosures is just to about to begin (also covered in Friday's commentary).
Returning to the housing bubble, the conspiracy by U.S. regulators and U.S. ratings agencies to allow Wall Street to leverage the entire U.S. financial system by 30:1 (from 10:1) meant roughly three times as much financing available for the same size of housing market. To accommodate the most rapid and extreme flow of “easy money” in the history of human commerce, many if not most U.S. banks simply erased their “lending standards”. Two years before the U.S. housing bubble officially burst “liars loans” had already become a common term of usage within the financial sector. Again, U.S. regulators were silent accomplices in allowing the eradication of lending standards.
Even without the use of such colourful terms to describe this fraudulently-created housing bubble, it would be obvious to any responsible regulator, rating agency, or banker that if you suddenly lend-out three times as much money to a population whose real incomes are steadily falling that their must be a huge increase in defaults. Thus, not only was this housing bubble a massive fraud on the individual level (through liars loans and other derelictions of duty), but collectively it was also a massive fraud, as it had to be obvious to the U.S. government (and specifically the relevant regulators) that there was an unsustainable “bubble” in the sector, as a whole.
This means that day after day, when Ben Bernanke got in front of the microphone to call the U.S. markets, the U.S. housing sector, and the economy as a whole a “Goldilocks economy” (where everything would keep going up in value) he could not possibly have believed his own words. They were uttered solely to enable the multi-trillion dollar Wall Street Ponzi-scheme to ensnare more victims.
It was thus apparent before the Wall Street-created U.S. housing bubble began that it would end in an unprecedented wave of foreclosures and defaults. In Part II, I will discuss Wall Street's premeditated plan for dealing with these foreclosures, through its new “front man”, MERS.
In Part I, “Scam in the making”, I explained how Wall Street created the U.S. housing-bubble and its concurrent Ponzi-scheme – with the full assistance of its accomplices: U.S. rating agencies and U.S. regulators. I also explained why it had to be obvious before they started creating this bubble that it would end with an unprecedented wave of foreclosures.
Because a big part of the bubble/Ponzi-scheme was “mortgage securitization” (which meant the bank originating the mortgage no longer held title to the mortgage), and because the U.S. financial crime syndicate knew there would be a huge wave of foreclosures, it had to invent an entity which could serve as a proxy in foreclosure proceedings – representing all of the players in these debt “daisy-chains”.
This was why MERS was created in 1995. As I wrote in Part I, MERS is nothing more than a confidential electronic registry which exists only to “track mortgages and the changes of servicing rights and mortgage ownership”. In other words, it has no proprietary interest in these mortgages.
The reason why that last fact is so important is because of the fact that Wall Street had created such convoluted chains of “ownership” that even in court proceedings the banksters are unable to show any party in these chain of transactions as having clear title to the mortgage. Wall Street's plan was to send MERS (nothing but a glorified, electronic clerk) to all these foreclosure proceedings and allow MERS to act as if it was the mortgage-holder in these proceedings.
However, it is one of the oldest principals of our Western legal system that in civil proceedings any party wanting to bring an action before the court has to have “standing”. Typically, this is defined as a direct, proprietary interest in the subject of the trial. Clearly, MERS has no proprietary interest – and thus in several legal decisions it has been found to have no right to initiate foreclosure proceedings.
As I pointed out in Part I (via an article by Edward Harrison), one of these court cases has already been upheld on appeal – setting the stage for courts to broaden the previous rulings. Until now, judges who have ruled that MERS has no “standing” have only done so narrowly, on a case-by-case basis. The next step in this natural legal evolution (the law always moves in “baby steps”) is for courts to rule that MERS has no standing, period!
When that day occurs, it will immediately create two, huge legal ramifications. First of all, there would be no further point in the bankers even showing up to a trial over a foreclosure unless the bankers can sift through the deliberately complicated maze of transactions and clearly identify a party with genuine, legal title over a mortgage. Otherwise, not only would the bankers face a summary dismissal of their action, but it's very possible that the judge in question would simply nullify the entire mortgage – as recently happened in a case in New York.
What this means is that any American homeowner whose mortgage has been “securitized” must take their case to court if/when a foreclosure proceeding is commenced against them. The worst-case scenario is that the foreclosure proceeding is dismissed and the homeowner can stay in his home, and not even bother with making any more payments. Why send cheques to a bank when you can live in your home for free – and never have to worry again about foreclosure?
However, once MERS is found to (broadly) have no legal “standing”, this will effect far more people than those about to be foreclosed. Another important concept in our legal system involves the concept of “discovery”. Its relevance in this particular situation is as follows.
If Americans who have already lost their homes to foreclosure “discover” today that the party who was officially behind these foreclosure proceedings (which in many cases is MERS) never had legal standing to foreclose on their property (whether that took place five days ago or five years ago), this means that the foreclosure proceeding was legally invalid.
What this means is that courts will very likely find that these “foreclosure victims” are still the legal owners of their homes. This not only is a crippling blow to the U.S. financial crime syndicate, but an even more serious blow to people who have been buying these “foreclosed” properties.
If the bank who “sold” them the “foreclosed” property never had legal title then obviously that bank had nothing to sell to the “buyer”. In other words, many (if not most) of the people who have bought “foreclosed” properties in the U.S. over the last few years may own nothing.
This becomes a double loss for the banks. Not only do they end up with nothing with respect to the original mortgage they claimed to own, but the subsequent buyer who is stripped of their purchase will then sue the banker for the full purchase price, all of their related costs (moving costs, furniture, etc.) plus the judge will very likely tack on some steep “punitive damages” to punish the banks for creating this legal nightmare and attempting to “foreclose” and “sell” properties they never owned.
As I pointed out a few weeks ago (see “Bankster Sues Bankster – AGAIN”), even if Wall Street banks can survive the massive losses they are incurring as their Ponzi-scheme unravels, there is no possibility of them surviving the tidal wave of litigation which is just beginning.
On a related subject, it was recently reported that the huge stash of money which Wall Street has in a “savings account” with the Federal Reserve now exceeds $1 trillion. Doesn't it seem odd that with Wall Street banks regularly bragging about how much money there are making with their own, in-house trading that they would leave a trillion dollars sitting in a savings account during this fantasy-rally in U.S. markets (which they helped to engineer)?
Obviously the banksters dare not admit to their shareholders or the media that they have stockpiled a trillion dollars as a down-payment for all the pay-outs they will be forced to make in future litigation. Instead, they just hide this money with the Federal Reserve and pretend it doesn't exist. Meanwhile, as I also pointed out in a recent commentary, U.S. banks are holding at least 5 million already-foreclosed homes off of the market. No point in trying to “sell” these properties if they don't actually own them.
There is one potentially serious consequence for average Americans as a result of this crucial legal precedent. If millions of Americans suddenly discover they have essentially “free homes” (and with actual housing inventories at least three times greater than what the NAR pretends), this could be the catalyst for another huge drop in house prices. A homeowner who loses his job, but then suddenly ends up with a “free home” will be willing to accept a much lower purchase price (as he down-sizes to a smaller residence) than a homeowner with an “underwater mortgage” desperately trying just to break-even.
In short, we could be heading for utter chaos in the U.S. housing market. Millions of people who thought they had purchased a foreclosed property could find they own nothing - and have to vacate those premises, remaining in “limbo” until they have successfully sued the bankers responsible for their problems. Millions of homeowners who thought they had lost their homes may suddenly have the keys returned to them. Perhaps most importantly, all “foreclosure sales” will essentially dry-up – since no buyers could be foolish enough to hand a banker a six-figure cheque when that banker may not even have title to the property.
Can you imagine desperate bankers trying to show “clear title” to potential buyers when they can't even demonstrate that in a court-room – armed with a team of lawyers? The only thing which is absolutely certain at this point is that the U.S. housing sector cannot possibly be close to any “bottom” given that the pain is only beginning in this market
What I'd like to do here is review how the H1N1 virus was created, whether it is lethal or not, what it is intended to do, what its chances for success are, and what I'd like to see us do about it.
Matthew says that the Illuminati "still wield strong influence in clinical medicine, medical research and drug approval bodies" and that "they have been creating diseases by one means or another and manipulating health care systems and medications around your world." (1) He points out that, now, as they go through their "death rattle" in these end times before the Golden Age, the Illuminati are lashing out, with the mainstream media playing co-conspirator. "The newest strategy-the ordering of laboratory-designed, created and released swine flu virus-is, as before, abetted by the controlled media's part of the plan, to declare PANDEMIC!" (2)
Apparently, the dark has not learned from its "abject failures with SARS and then the avian flu, both of which were widely publicized with the same global pandemic prognosis; eventually the publicity was forced to cease because those diseases caused a few deaths, then totally fizzled out." The swine-flu "will have the same result," he says. (3)
Flu Vaccine - Lethal or Not?
There are seemingly-conflicting reports from sources on what the exact status of the swine-flu vaccine is. Jane Burgermeister, who is suing Big Pharma, says the cabal have released live swine-flu into vaccine, implying that it could be lethal. (4) David Wilcock says that "vaccines ... would actually be lethal." (5) Even Matthew acknowledged that "'accidentally' there is live virus in the vaccines." (6) He calls it a "deliberate attempt to infect millions and cause global panic." (7) But he does not say that the vaccine is lethal. In fact Matthew assures us on two occasions that the galactics have neutralized the vaccine: "Just as in the previous flu situations, the technology of our universal family has neutralized the swine flu virus-laden vaccines and will continue to do so as long as the makers persist in their scheme. And please have no worries about programmed microchips being implanted via inoculations-if that is attempted, the programming will be erased by that same technology." (8) "The technology of our family in other star nations has neutralized the vaccine that is intended to spread this disease, just as they did to prevent the spreading of SARS and avian flu." (9)
Three Scenarios Occurring
According to Wilcock, creating a pandemic is just one of three scenarios the dark are trying to run to depopulate the globe and hold onto power: "It seems they have three major plans for how to reduce [global] population. Number one, economic collapse leading to anarchy and violence. Number two, swine flu and vaccines that would actually be lethal. Number three, some sort of conflagration or war, perhaps Israel and Iran is the latest one that seems to be going on, that would then lead to some sort of large amounts of death."(10) Wilcock thinks that "all these [Illuminati] plans will be stopped." (11)
Matthew assures us that the pandemic plan was done "without the US government leader's knowledge, unlike the previous two pandemic attempts, which were fabricated with the approval of the highest members in that administration." (12) The dark uses tactics like pandemics to jerk the public's attention away from moves made by the Light, such as judges pronouncing that George Bush is a felon or the people demanding the Fed be closed.
In Matthew's view, the pandemic is intended to: "... distract the attention of the populace from their growing demands for peaceful negotiations; indicting responsible ones in the US government who authorized torture; [obscure] the truth about the perpetrators of `9/11'; what caused the collapse of the global economy; the decades of government cover-up about the presence of extraterrestrials; who operates the illegal drug industry; the real purpose of chemtrails and weather control; the aims of the worldwide Zionist movement; and the `black ops' behind terrorism around your world." (13)
The pandemic has to be a global effort because "individuals with dark intentions, who live around the world, are panicking as they see other governments' citizens joining the clamor for truth, for peace, for renewable energy sources, for improved health care and education, for just laws and rightful recognition of women's equality." (14)
The Attempt Will Fail
Matthew sees "firm indications" that the public-at-large are becoming "increasingly sceptical" about the motives of individuals "at [the] highest levels of medicine and pharmaceutical corporations." According to him, just as the collapse of the global economy is exposing the truth about who has been mainpulating it, "so will this swine-flu plan expose other evils perpetrated by the same dark ones within the Illuminati or under their control." (15) Not only will the dark's "biowarfare" plan fail, he says, but it will be "a huge breach in their remaining toehold in your world." (16) "Light efforts are underway in numerous other areas too that will remove the long-time heavy hand of dark control in your world." (17)
"In the ever-intensifying light, leaders who follow Illuminati orders will be toppled and replaced by wise leaders with integrity and honor. The "black ops" behind terrorist activities will be revealed, the origins of "pandemics" uncovered, chemtrails stopped, mind control measures ended. "Incrementally, like a row of dominoes slowing falling, all sources of corruption, deception and vile intent will be unmasked." (18)
David Wilcock uses the rubric "management" to refer to the entire Spiritual Hierarchy and Galactic Federation (SHGF). He says they will protect the planet from being harmed by a pandemic. "The protective forces are what I call management. Management will not allow the planet to be destroyed. They will not allow the planet to fall into the negative. They are protecting us as we go through this evolutionary process. ... "They have to make sure that things never get too awful on the planet. And that's why they would stop a nuclear war. They would stop any attempts at mass genocide. "They would not [allow] a worldwide economic collapse. None of these grandiose doom-and-gloom prognositications will happen. Because we are here to have a spiritual experience and these higher-level ETs will ensure that that experience can proceed unmolested." (19)
He is only the latest of many sources to make the same assertion.
Do Not be Fearful
SaLuSa encourages us: "Do not be fearful regardless of what your news brings you, as currently the dark energies are directed at people through the threat of mandatory vaccinations. There is always something on the agenda of the dark Ones, who still stare defeat in the face but have no humility to admit it." (20)
The Guardians, speaking through Lisa Renee on "the latest fear propaganda around the swine flu" advise us to "stay connected to your spirit, take care of yourself and stay out of fear programs." (21)
Matthew tells us that "holding steady your light and being patient a bit longer for dynamic developments will be abundantly rewarded!" (22) He adds that the SHGF is heartened to see "widespread rebellion against inoculating the populace for a mild form of flu." (23)
I cannot say what people should do - nor do I like to do that. But I can definitely say what I wish would happen. Except the usual, known safety precautions, there is nothing we can do about getting a virus that the Illuminati are bent on seeing us get. If we get it, we need to treat it. But where our ability to act, where our initiative, comes in is with accepting or rejecting the vaccine.
In the final analysis, it doesn't matter to me whether the vaccine is or is not contaminated. Rejecting the vaccine is the only action open to many of us, the only way to express our rejection of the cabal. So I would like to see people not take the vaccine, people around the world.
That having been said, I recognize that some people, young and old, may feel that they don't wish to gamble and must take the vaccine. I don't wish to interpose myself between a person and their best judgment about their course of action. But, where there is choice, my preference certainly would be that we make our voices known to the Illuminati by refusing to participate at all in their attempt to mass murder the world's population, whether they have botched their attempts or not and whether the galactics have nullified the threat or not.
The Illuminati, knowingly or not, have offered us a chance to vote, a way to make our voices heard - by refusing to take the vaccine. I say: make your voice heard.
A landmark ruling in a recent Kansas Supreme Court case may have given millions of distressed homeowners the legal wedge they need to avoid foreclosure. In Landmark National Bank v. Kesler, 2009 Kan. LEXIS 834, the Kansas Supreme Court held that a nominee company called MERS has no right or standing to bring an action for foreclosure. MERS is an acronym for Mortgage Electronic Registration Systems, a private company that registers mortgages electronically and tracks changes in ownership. The significance of the holding is that if MERS has no standing to foreclose, then nobody has standing to foreclose – on 60 million mortgages. That is the number of American mortgages currently reported to be held by MERS. Over half of all new U.S. residential mortgage loans are registered with MERS and recorded in its name. Holdings of the Kansas Supreme Court are not binding on the rest of the country, but they are dicta of which other courts take note; and the reasoning behind the decision is sound.
Eliminating the “Straw Man” Shielding Lenders and Investors from Liability
The development of “electronic” mortgages managed by MERS went hand in hand with the “securitization” of mortgage loans – chopping them into pieces and selling them off to investors. In the heyday of mortgage securitizations, before investors got wise to their risks, lenders would slice up loans, bundle them into “financial products” called “collateralized debt obligations” (CDOs), ostensibly insure them against default by wrapping them in derivatives called “credit default swaps,” and sell them to pension funds, municipal funds, foreign investment funds, and so forth. There were many secured parties, and the pieces kept changing hands; but MERS supposedly kept track of all these changes electronically. MERS would register and record mortgage loans in its name, and it would bring foreclosure actions in its name. MERS not only facilitated the rapid turnover of mortgages and mortgage-backed securities, but it has served as a sort of “corporate shield” that protects investors from claims by borrowers concerning predatory lending practices. California attorney Timothy McCandless describes the problem like this:
“[MERS] has reduced transparency in the mortgage market in two ways. First, consumers and their counsel can no longer turn to the public recording systems to learn the identity of the holder of their note. Today, county recording systems are increasingly full of one meaningless name, MERS, repeated over and over again. But more importantly, all across the country, MERS now brings foreclosure proceedings in its own name – even though it is not the financial party in interest. This is problematic because MERS is not prepared for or equipped to provide responses to consumers’ discovery requests with respect to predatory lending claims and defenses. In effect, the securitization conduit attempts to use a faceless and seemingly innocent proxy with no knowledge of predatory origination or servicing behavior to do the dirty work of seizing the consumer’s home. . . . So imposing is this opaque corporate wall, that in a “vast” number of foreclosures, MERS actually succeeds in foreclosing without producing the original note – the legal sine qua non of foreclosure – much less documentation that could support predatory lending defenses.”
The real parties in interest concealed behind MERS have been made so faceless, however, that there is now no party with standing to foreclose. The Kansas Supreme Court stated that MERS’ relationship “is more akin to that of a straw man than to a party possessing all the rights given a buyer.” The court opined:
By statute, assignment of the mortgage carries with it the assignment of the debt. . . . Indeed, in the event that a mortgage loan somehow separates interests of the note and the deed of trust, with the deed of trust lying with some independent entity, the mortgage may become unenforceable. The practical effect of splitting the deed of trust from the promissory note is to make it impossible for the holder of the note to foreclose, unless the holder of the deed of trust is the agent of the holder of the note. Without the agency relationship, the person holding only the note lacks the power to foreclose in the event of default. The person holding only the deed of trust will never experience default because only the holder of the note is entitled to payment of the underlying obligation. The mortgage loan becomes ineffectual when the note holder did not also hold the deed of trust.” [Citations omitted; emphasis added.]
MERS as straw man lacks standing to foreclose, but so does original lender, although it was a signatory to the deal. The lender lacks standing because title had to pass to the secured parties for the arrangement to legally qualify as a “security.” The lender has been paid in full and has no further legal interest in the claim. Only the securities holders have skin in the game; but they have no standing to foreclose, because they were not signatories to the original agreement. They cannot satisfy the basic requirement of contract law that a plaintiff suing on a written contract must produce a signed contract proving he is entitled to relief.
The Potential Impact of 60 Million Fatally Flawed Mortgages
The banks arranging these mortgage-backed securities have typically served as trustees for the investors. When the trustees could not present timely written proof of ownership entitling them to foreclose, they would in the past file “lost-note affidavits” with the court; and judges usually let these foreclosures proceed without objection. But in October 2007, an intrepid federal judge in Cleveland put a halt to the practice. U.S. District Court Judge Christopher Boyko ruled that Deutsche Bank had not filed the proper paperwork to establish its right to foreclose on fourteen homes it was suing to repossess as trustee. Judges in many other states then came out with similar rulings.
Following the Boyko decision, in December 2007 attorney Sean Olender suggested in an article in The San Francisco Chronicle that the real reason for the bailout schemes being proposed by then-Treasury Secretary Henry Paulson was not to keep strapped borrowers in their homes so much as to stave off a spate of lawsuits against the banks. Olender wrote:
“The sole goal of the [bailout schemes] is to prevent owners of mortgage-backed securities, many of them foreigners, from suing U.S. banks and forcing them to buy back worthless mortgage securities at face value – right now almost 10 times their market worth. The ticking time bomb in the U.S. banking system is not resetting subprime mortgage rates. The real problem is the contractual ability of investors in mortgage bonds to require banks to buy back the loans at face value if there was fraud in the origination process.
“. . . The catastrophic consequences of bond investors forcing originators to buy back loans at face value are beyond the current media discussion. The loans at issue dwarf the capital available at the largest U.S. banks combined, and investor lawsuits would raise stunning liability sufficient to cause even the largest U.S. banks to fail, resulting in massive taxpayer-funded bailouts of Fannie and Freddie, and even FDIC . . . .
“What would be prudent and logical is for the banks that sold this toxic waste to buy it back and for a lot of people to go to prison. If they knew about the fraud, they should have to buy the bonds back.”
Needless to say, however, the banks did not buy back their toxic waste, and no bank officials went to jail. As Olender predicted, in the fall of 2008, massive taxpayer-funded bailouts of Fannie and Freddie were pushed through by Henry Paulson, whose former firm Goldman Sachs was an active player in creating CDOs when he was at its helm as CEO. Paulson also hastily engineered the $85 billion bailout of insurer American International Group (AIG), a major counterparty to Goldmans’ massive holdings of CDOs. The insolvency of AIG was a huge crisis for Goldman, a principal beneficiary of the AIG bailout.
In a December 2007 New York Times article titled “The Long and Short of It at Goldman Sachs,” Ben Stein wrote: “For decades now, . . . I have been receiving letters [warning] me about the dangers of a secret government running the world . . . . [T]he closest I have recently seen to such a world-running body would have to be a certain large investment bank, whose alums are routinely Treasury secretaries, high advisers to presidents, and occasionally a governor or United States senator.”
The pirates seem to have captured the ship, and until now there has been no one to stop them. But 60 million mortgages with fatal defects in title could give aggrieved homeowners and securities holders the crowbar they need to exert some serious leverage on Congress – serious enough perhaps even to pry the legislature loose from the powerful banking lobbies that now hold it in thrall.
Ellen Brown developed her research skills as an attorney practicing civil litigation in Los Angeles. In Web of Debt, her latest book, she turns those skills to an analysis of the Federal Reserve and “the money trust.” She shows how this private cartel has usurped the power to create money from the people themselves, and how we the people can get it back. Her earlier books focused on the pharmaceutical cartel that gets its power from “the money trust.” Her eleven books include Forbidden Medicine, Nature’s Pharmacy (co-authored with Dr. Lynne Walker), and The Key to Ultimate Health (co-authored with Dr. Richard Hansen). Her websites are www.webofdebt.com and www.ellenbrown.com.
For the CIA supervisors and operatives responsible for torture, the chickens are coming home to roost; that is, if President Barack Obama and Attorney General Eric Holder mean it when they say no one is above the law – and if they don’t fall victim to brazen intimidation.
Unable to prevent Holder from starting an investigation of torture and other war crimes that implicate CIA officials past and present, those same CIA officials, together with what those in the intelligence trade call “agents of influence” in the media, are pulling out all the stops to quash the Justice Department’s preliminary investigation.
In what should be seen as a bizarre twist, seven CIA directors — including three who are themselves implicated in planning and conducting torture and assassination — have asked the President to call off Holder.
Please, tell me how could the whole thing be more transparent?
The most vulnerable of the Gang of Seven, George Tenet, is not the brightest star in the heavens, but even he was able to figure out years ago that he and his accomplices might end up having to pay a heavy price for violating international and U.S. criminal law.
In his memoir, At the Center of the Storm, Tenet notes that what the CIA needed were “the right authorities” and policy determination to do the bidding of President George W. Bush:
“Sure, it was a risky proposition when you looked at it from a policy maker’s point of view. We were asking for and we would be given as many authorities as CIA had ever had. Things could blow up. People, me among them, could end up spending some of the worst days of our lives justifying before congressional overseers our new freedom to act.” (p. 178)
Tenet and his masters assumed, correctly, that given the mood of the times and the lack of spine among lawmakers, congressional “overseers” would relax into their accustomed role as congressional overlookers.
Unfortunately for him, Tenet seems to have confined his concern at the time to the invertebrates in Congress, not anticipating a rejuvenated Justice Department that might take its role in enforcing the law seriously.
Tenet proudly quotes his former counterterrorism chief, Cofer Black (now a senior official at Blackwater): “As Cofer Black later told Congress, ‘The gloves came off that day.’” That day was Sept. 17, 2001, when “the president approved our recommendations and provided us broad authorities to engage al-Qa’ida.” (p. 208)
Presumably, it was not lost on Tenet that no lawmaker dared ask exactly what Cofer Black meant when he said “the gloves came off.” Had they thought to ask Richard Clarke, former director of the counterterrorist operation at the White House, he could have told them what he wrote in his book, Against All Enemies.
Clarke describes a meeting in which he took part with President George W. Bush in the White House bunker just minutes after Bush’s TV address to the nation on the evening of 9/11.
When the subject of international law was raised, Clarke writes that the president responded vehemently: “I don’t care what the international lawyers say, we are going to kick some ass.” [p. 24]
It only took Bush six days to grant the CIA the “broad authorities” the agency had recommended.
It then took White House counsel Alberto Gonzales, Vice President Dick Cheney’s lawyer David Addington, and William J. Haynes II, Defense Secretary Donald Rumsfeld’s lawyer, four more months to advise the president formally that, by fiat, he could ignore the Geneva Conventions on the treatment of prisoners of war.
This gang of lawyers so advised at the turn of 2001-2002, beating down objections by William Howard Taft IV, Secretary of State Colin Powell’s lawyer. Bush chose to follow the dubious advice of imaginative lawyers in his and Dick Cheney’s employ; namely, that 9/11 ushered in a “new paradigm” rendering the Geneva protections “quaint” and “obsolete.”
Addington and Gonzales did take care to warn the president, by memorandum of Jan. 25, 2002, of the risk of criminal prosecution under 18 U.S.C. 2441, the War Crimes Act of 1996. Their memo said:
“That statute, enacted in 1996, prohibits the commission of a ‘war crime’ by or against a U.S. person, including U.S. officials. ‘War crime’…is defined to include any grave breach of the GPW [Geneva] or any violation of Article 3 thereof (such as outrages against personal dignity)…Punishments for violations of Section 2441 include the death penalty….
“…it is difficult to predict the motives of prosecutors or independent counsels who may in the future decide to pursue unwarranted charges based on Section 2441. Your determination [that Geneva does not apply] would create a reasonable basis in law that Section 2441 does not apply, which would provide a solid defense to any future prosecution.”
With that kind of pre-ordered reassurance, President Bush issued a two-page executive directive in which he states, “I accept the legal conclusion of the Department of Justice and determine that common Article 3 of Geneva does not apply to either al Qaeda or Taliban detainees…”
This is the smoking gun on Bush’s key role in the subsequent torture of “war on terror” prisoners. The Senate Armed Services Committee issued a report last December stating that that Feb. 7 memorandum “opened the door” to abusive interrogation practices.
Unhappily for Bush and those who carried out his instructions, on June 29, 2006, in Hamdan v. Rumsfeld, the U.S. Supreme Court ruled that Geneva DOES apply to al-Qaeda and Taliban detainees.
One senior Bush administration official is reported to have gone quite pale at the time, when Justice Anthony M. Kennedy raised the ante, warning that "violations of Common Article 3 are considered 'war crimes,' punishable as federal offenses."
What about U.S. criminal law? Despite the almost laughable attempts by lawyers like Addington and John Yoo to get around the War Crimes Act by advising that only the kind of pain accompanying major organ failure or death can be considered torture, those involved are now in a cold sweat — the more so, since those dubious opinions have now been publicly released.
Evidence of Torture
In releasing the sordid, torture-approving memoranda written by Justice Department lawyers and a critical “Special Review” by the CIA’s own horse’s-mouth Inspector General, Obama and Holder had to face down very strong pressure from those with the most to lose — former CIA directors and the functionaries (some of them in senior CIA positions to this very day) who were responsible for seeing to it that “the gloves came off.”
Now, out in the public domain is all the evidence needed to show that war crimes were committed — “authorized” as legal by Justice Department Mafia-type lawyers recruited for that express purpose — but war crimes nonetheless.
Torture, kidnapping, illegal detention — not to mention blatant violations of the Foreign Intelligence Surveillance Act (FISA) outlawing eavesdropping on Americans without a court warrant.
The stakes are incredibly high. No wonder the CIA and its “agents of influence” (see Saturday’s lead story in the Washington Post) are going all out.
According to the story, seven former CIA directors wrote a letter to Obama on Sept. 18 asking him to “reverse Attorney General Holder’s August 24 decision to re-open the criminal investigation of CIA interrogations that took place following the attacks of September 11.”
This is the saddest commentary on CIA covert action operatives’ disdain for the law since their predecessors loudly applauded former Director Richard Helms for lying to Congress about the CIA role in the overthrow of Salvador Allende on 9/11/73.
The largest CIA cafeteria was bulging with welcoming supporters of Helms, when the court got finished with him. They then took up a collection on the spot to pay the fine the court had imposed after he was allowed to plead nolo contendere.
Among the most transparent parts of the letter from the Gang of Seven is their corporate worry that “there is no reason to expect that the re-opened criminal investigation will remain narrowly focused.”
Their worry is all too real. Evidence already on the public record shows that the first three listed – Michael Hayden, Porter Goss and George Tenet – could readily be indicted for crimes under U.S. and international law, including:
--Illegal eavesdropping by the National Security Agency (Hayden was NSA director when he ordered his employees to violate the Foreign Intelligence Surveillance Act, which requires warrants from a special court before wiretaps are undertaken.)
--assassination planning without notification to Congress (Goss, whose uncommonly abrupt departure in May 2006 was never looked into by the Fawning Corporate Media [FCM]); and Tenet (who turned out to be right about at least one thing — that “things could blow up.”)
The other “distinguished signatories” were:
John Deutch, arrogant to the point of criminality, Deutch disregarded the most elementary rules governing protection of classified information, and had to be given a last-minute pardon by President Bill Clinton.
R. James Woolsey, the man who outdid himself in trying to tie Saddam Hussein to 9/11, and in pushing into the limelight spurious intelligence from the fabricator known as “Curveball.” (Remember those fictitious biological weapons labs for which Colin Powell displayed “artist renderings” to the U.N. on Feb. 5, 2003?)
William Webster, known mostly at Langley for his handsome face and his devotion to his late-afternoon matches with socialite tennis partners. (Folks like Webster should recognize that, once they have reached what my lawyer father used to call “the age of statutory senility,” they should be more careful regarding what they let themselves be dragged into.)
James R. Schlesinger, “Big Jim” launched his brief stint as CIA director by warning us CIA employees that his instructions were “to ensure that you guys do not screw Richard Nixon.” To give substance to this assertion, he told us that the White House had said he was to report to political henchman Bob Haldeman — not Henry Kissinger, the national security advisor. More recently, Schlesinger led one of the see-no-evil Defense Department “investigations” of the abuses of Abu Ghraib.
Quite a group, this Gang of Seven
Their letter also is condescending toward President Obama: “As President you have the authority to make decisions restricting substantive interrogation… But the administration must be mindful that public disclosure about past intelligence operations can only help al-Qaeda elude US intelligence and plan future operations.”
The seven then proceed to repeat the canard alleging that such collection “have saved lives and helped protect America from further attacks.”
It reads as though Dick Cheney did their first draft. Actually, that would not be all that surprising, given his record of doing quite a lot of CIA’s drafting for eight long years.
Hold firm Holder.
Ray McGovern works with Tell the Word, the publishing arm of the ecumenical Church of the Saviour in inner-city Washington. He was a CIA analyst for 27 years, working under nine CIA directors and seven presidents, he now serves on the Steering Group of Veteran Intelligence Professionals for Sanity (VIPS). www.globalresearch.ca/index.php
TOWN HALL MEETING: U.S. CONGRESSMAN BILL POSEY, MELBOURNE, FL
By Jerry Forney
I attended the Town Hall meeting held by Rep. Bill Posey of the 15th Congressional District, Florida. It was my first Town Hall meeting and it was a real eye-opener!
I arrived at 4:30 and got in line. It wasn’t too crowded. I thought the rain would probably discourage a large turnout. Wrong. The line behind me kept growing and eventually it snaked off around the other buildings and eventually disappeared around a corner. Thank goodness this community college has covered walkways.
I was carrying one of the Move On signs when a cameraman whose affiliation I couldn’t identify stood nearby and aimed his large shoulder held video cam in my direction. I’m not sure he was even filming, but the retiree in front of me, a feisty little woman from Vero Beach turned and said to the cameraman “Are you only going to shoot people with negative signage? Is that what it takes?”
“Negative Signage?” was my immediate response to her. Then I blurted out. “I guess that depends on your point of view!” She grunted.
The so-called negative sign read: “Public Option = Affordable Health Care”. I had just been initiated into the politics of Town Hall meetings and the battle lines could not be clearer or more self-evident.
Many of these retired women hugged and greeted each other. Apparently they all attended “Tea Parties” that met regularly. A tallish gray-haired lady was passing out invitations to the local tea parties. I assume these are political action committees and the tea party designation refers to the famous Boston Tea Party. I’ll soon be researching this strange conservative grassroots phenomenom. I wonder who is funding it? Glen Beck? Rupert Murdock?
After over an hour of standing, an attendant walked around telling everyone that “no signs” would be allowed inside. I put away my sign as the doors opened and the crowd started filing inside the auditorium.
The auditorium slowly filled up to capacity. Of the 2,000 plus people hundreds overflowed into an adjacent facility equipped with video. I never imagined this many people would venture out in the rain to show up at a Town Hall meeting. Surprise.
My first observation was the obvious absence of people of color and an abundance of grey-haired retirees of every stripe. There were also very few young folks (although a young couple was sitting directly in front of me!). It was truly a Medicare Mob. Suddenly I felt like I was in the middle of a Halloween season movie preview: “Return of the Conservative Wasp Zombies Coalition”. I felt like I must be the only Progressive Democrat in the auditorium.
I chatted with the woman next to me, a nice retiree who attended Tea Party rallies. She has been a Republican since she abandoned Jimmy Carter for Ronald Reagan. We shared ideas, and she agreed with me that this evening’s discussion should be about the issues not just ideological rhetoric. However, she was afraid that the president was surrounding himself with Marxists like Castro and Chavez and the United States going to become a Socialist country…soon. I asked her if she knew what Marxism or Socialism was. She said she didn’t know exactly, but she was afraid anyway. I tried to explain. She asked me if I was a teacher. I said, “No, I am an artist”. Artists can read. Later, when one of the panelists offered to stem the slide to Marxism, the mob stood and applauded the speaker. This lady, in her ignorance, did so as well. I did not. I’m not afraid of the Marxist straw man put forward by the Glen Becks of the conservative world. I know better. Apparently, many of the Zombies do not.
The panel members went first. They represented various healthcare providers, profit and non-profit, as well as doctors and a few token political consultants and Republican mouthpieces.It was informative and entertaining. Aside from the obvious partisanship and misrepresentations of the Republican panelists (shades of Sarah Palin), one of the speakers representing anon-profit was offering support for a Medical database that would reduce the tedious paperwork of doctor office visits. The well-meaning speaker used a most unfortunate comparison toveterinary data chips used in pets as a way to demonstrate the value of convenient access to a comprehensive patient database. his slip aroused such vehement anger from the mob that I almost thought I was witnessing a John Birch Society rally opposing the conspiratorial implanting of American citizens for mindcontrol purposes. Grannies and Grandpas on all sides of me instantly jumped to there feet and started screaming and ranting before the speaker could finish his sentence. It took a fewmoments for the crowd to gain its composure, but the damage was done. The speaker blurted out a few more sentences but it was soon agreed upon to advance to the next speaker. I’msure many Zombies left the meeting fully convinced that we will soon be implanted with mind control chips in a Marxist totalitarian state. This whole chip implantation episode raised thelevel of strangeness up several notches toward the bizarre.
Apparently the conservative movement is counting on gray-power to affect their return to power via Glen Beck et al. Don’t get me wrong, I’m 62 years old and a grandpa myself. I’m a Senior Citizen, an American and proud of it, but I have never seen anything like this before. It gave the evening a surrealistic visage. It was like an uprising in a nursing home. Perhaps I felt this way because I was missing my dinner. I’m not sure.
The rest of the speakers had their say and finally Rep. Bill Posey was up. He had a slide presentation listing the contenders for the Health Care Bill. He insisted that he had indeed read the entire 1000 page Public Option proposal, apparently the accepted frontrunner so far, and he voiced his concerns and opinions. Supposedly it is filled with loopholes and ambiguities…(Duh, are we surprised? It’s a proposal, after all.)…it’s sure to be amended! Apparently there are hundreds of amendments already on the table. Legislators have their work cut out for them.
Rep. Posey absolutely will not support a bill that offers coverage to illegal immigrants. That produced a standing ovation with cheers. This crowd of Conservative WASP Zombies was now revealing its racist leanings. (One must assume, at this point, that Rep. Posey won’t support ANY health reform bill of any kind. Period. His targeted responses were just pure politics, pure theater. He was merely pandering to his supporters.) He got the same kind of lock step Zombie response when he played the abortion card. “I’ll never support a Health Care Bill thatfunds abortions!” He said with moral indignation. Again, there was a standing ovation and chants. It was like being in a Twilight Zone episode. I kept looking to see if Rod Serling was narrating the Town Hall Meeting Zone somewhere offstage.
Rep. Bill Posey is personally sponsoring a bill in the House that requires the U.S. Congress and Senate to enroll in whatever Public Option Bill becomes law. That seems fair to me. Although, when questioned about his personal wealth, he defended his 80% “paid for by tax payers” health care plan as one of the perks of the office. Go figure.
The QA session was more theater than substance. We were asked to submit our questions on index cards that were collected and put in a fish tank. His wife drew out the cards and handed them to Rep. Posey. He lavished praise for questions and comments that supported him or his positions and he totally garbled the questions and comments that voiced opinionsfrom the other side which he hastily brushed off, obvious partisanship at its slickest.
The event came to a close. Everyone made their bows, patted backs and the crowd slowly funneled out the auditorium. I still didn’t see any people of color. There may have been a few at the event but I just didn’t see them.
On my way home I reflected on my first Town Hall meeting. It was an eye-opening experience. I had no idea a narrow targeted group of American citizens could be so easily manipulated. This event sponsored by the Conservative Wasp Zombies Coalition put the fear of God/Goddess into me.
The power of certain conservative talk radio stations, radical Right-leaning websites and the Fox corporate media is scary. They are leading a certain senior adult population on the political/religious Right to a bizarre form of ignorant conformity. Extreme political polarization has been the outcome. Whether we sit on the Right or the Left we are a divided People. The distance separating the two ideologies is considerable. Both sides have become intractable. They refuse to compromise.
Tyrants have always known that a Nation divided against itself cannot long endure. A fractured citizenry is easier to control and manipulate. That is MY fear. This isn’t the Twilight Zone. This is America today. What kind of future this divide is taking us to is anyone’s guess.
NOTE: I could not get the voltaire link to work and found the article on the RBN site. Why do I keep posting 911 stuff from time to time? Because we will never have peace on Earth until justice is served. 911 is the lynchpin that, when the truth is finally acknowledged worldwide, will bring down the criminal enterprises known as governments.
As official videographer for the U.S. government, Kurt Sonnenfeld was detailed to Ground Zero on September 11, 2001, where he spent one month filming 29 tapes: “What I saw at certain moments and in certain places … is very disturbing!” He never handed them over to the authorities and has been persecuted ever since. Kurt Sonnenfeld lives in exile in Argentina, where he wrote « El Perseguido » (the persecuted). His recently-published book tells the story of his unending nightmare and drives another nail into the coffin of the government’s account of the 9/11 events. Below is an exclusive interview by Voltairenet.
Kurt Sonnenfeld and unidentified search and rescue specialist in subterranean void beneath Ground Zero.
Kurt Sonnenfeld graduated from the University of Colorado (USA) with studies in International Affairs and Economics, as well as in Literature and Philosophy. He worked for the United States government as official videographer and served as Director of Broadcast Operations for the Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA)’s National Emergency Response Team. Additionally, Kurt Sonnenfeld was contracted by several other governmental agencies and programs for classified and “sensitive” operations at military and scientific installations throughout the United States.
On September 11, 2001, the area known as “Ground Zero” was sealed from the public eye. Sonnenfeld, however, was given unrestricted access enabling him to document for the investigation (that never took place) and provide some “sanitized” pool video to virtually every news network in the world. The tapes that reveal some of the anomalies which he discovered at Ground Zero are still in his possession.
Accused of a crime that did not occur in a manifest frame-up scenario, Kurt Sonnenfeld has been persecuted across continents. After several years of fear, injustice and isolation, he has decided to take a public stand against the Government’s official story and is prepared to submit his material to the close scrutiny of reliable experts.
Voltaire Network: Your autobiographical book titled “El Perseguido” (the persecuted) was recently published in Argentina where you live in exile since 2003. Tell us who is persecuting you.
Kurt Sonnenfeld: Although it is autobiographical, it is not my life story. Rather it is a history of the extraordinary events that have happened to me and my family at the hands of U.S. authorities over the course of more than seven years, spanning two hemispheres, after my tour of duty at Ground Zero and becoming an inconvenient witness.
Voltaire Network: You explained that your request for refugee status within the terms of the Geneva 1951 Convention is still being considered by the Argentinean Senate, while in 2005 you were granted political asylum, albeit, on a provisional basis. That probably makes you the first U.S. citizen in that situation! And no doubt the first U.S. Government official with direct exposure to the events surrounding September 11, 2001 who has “blown the whistle”. Is this what drove you into exile?
With wife Paula, testifying before Senate
Kurt Sonnenfeld: A refugee is a person who has been forced to leave (or stay away from) his or her country for reasons of persecution. It’s undeniable that many people have been persecuted unfairly as a result of the quasi-fascist laws and policies brought about by the shock of September 11, 2001, and they deserve refugee status. But the fact is, requesting refugee status is a risky and dangerous step to take. America is the world’s only remaining “superpower”, and dissent has been effectively repressed. Any person who requests refugee status on political grounds is by nature making an extreme statement of dissent. And if your request is denied, what do you do? Once you make the request, there can be no going back.
Personally, I wasn’t forced to leave the United States, and I certainly did not “flee”. At the time I was still fairly oblivious to what was actually brewing against me. I hadn’t connected the dots yet; so that when I left in early 2003 I had every intention of returning. I came to Argentina for a short respite; to try to recuperate after all that had happened to me. I travelled here freely, with my own passport, using my own credit cards. But because of an incredible series of events, I have since been forced into exile, and I haven’t been back.
Voltaire Network: What type of events are you referring to?
Kurt Sonnenfeld: I’ve suffered false accusations for “crimes” that demonstrably did not happen, abusive imprisonment and torture as a result of those accusations, as well as outrageous calumnies against my reputation, death threats, kidnap attempts and several other violations of civil and human rights as denounced by numerous international accords. My return to the United States would not only be a continuation of those violations, but would be aggregated by the separation – perhaps permanent – from my wife and three-year old twin daughters, the only thing remaining that I have to live for. And then, after the impossibility of receiving a fair trial for a crime that did not happen, I could be subject to the death penalty.
Voltaire Network: In 2005, the U.S. Government lodged a request to have you extradited, which was turned down by a Federal Judge. Then, in 2007, the Argentinean Supreme Court – in a show of integrity and independence – turned down the U.S. appeal, but your Government persisted. Can you shed some light on the situation ?
Kurt Sonnenfeld: In 2008, the US government appealed again, this time with absolutely no legal foundation, to the Supreme Court, which will surely uphold the two already unassailable rulings made by the Federal Judge.
In one of those rulings, it was also noted that there were too many “sombras”, or shadows, surrounding my case. There were many, many obvious fabrications in the extradition order sent here by US authorities, and, thankfully, we were able prove that. The fact that there were so many fabrications has actually served to support my request for asylum. We were also able to show that we had been subject to a prolonged campaign of harassment and intimidation from US intelligence services. As a result, since my family has been assigned round-the-clock police protection. As one senator has noted about my case: “It is their behavior that belies their true motivations”.
Sonnenfeld and his family are frequently harassed, followed, and photographed, as shown in this photo.
Voltaire Network: They want you pretty badly for a “crime that did not happen”! How do you account for such doggedness? As a FEMA official, you must have been trusted by your government. At what point did the situation capsize?
Kurt Sonnenfeld: In hindsight, I realize now that the situation had capsized some time before I actually became aware that it had capsized. Initially, the false accusation against me was completely irrational, and I was totally destroyed by it. It is incredibly difficult to have suffered the loss of someone you love to suicide, but to then be accused of it is too much to bear. The case was dismissed based on a mountain of evidence that overwhelmingly absolved me (Nancy, my wife, had left behind a suicide note and a journal of suicidal writings ; she had a family history of suicide ; etc.). The prosecution was 100% sure of my innocence before requesting the dismissal of charge.
But the sustained incarceration even AFTER it was indicated that I was to be freed was what proved to me that something was happening under the surface. I was held in jail for FOUR MONTHS after my lawyers were informed that the case was to be dismissed and was finally released in June 2002. During that time, an amazing series of strange events began to occur. While still being held, I had a telephone conversation with FEMA officials in an effort to resolve the issue, but I realized that I was considered “compromised”. I was told it had been agreed that “the agency had to be protected”, especially in light of the upheaval that was threatening with the implementation of the “Patriot Act” and the expected usurpation that would come with the new Department of Homeland Security. After all the dangers I had risked, all hardship and difficulties I had endured for them for almost 10 years, I felt betrayed. It left a void in my soul.
Because of their abandonment, I told them I didn’t have the tapes, that I gave them to “some bureaucrat” in New York, and that they would have to wait until I was released to retrieve any other documents in my possession. Soon after that conversation, my house was “seized”, the locks were changed, and men were observed by neighbors entering my house, though there is no record in the court of their entry, as would be required. When I was finally released, I discovered that my office had been ransacked, my computer was missing, and that my tape library in my basement had been dug through and several were missing. Men were constantly parked on the street near my house, my security system was “hacked” more than once, outdoor security lights were unscrewed, etc., to the point that I went to stay with some friends at their condo in the mountains, which was then ALSO broken into.
Anyone who looks for the truth recognizes that there has been an amazing series of irregularities in this case and that an appalling injustice is being carried out on me and my loved ones. This intense campaign to return me to American soil is a false pretext for other darker motives.
Voltaire Network: You have suggested that you observed things at Ground Zero that did not tally with the official account. Did you do or say anything to arouse suspicion in this respect?
Kurt Sonnenfeld: In that same telephone call I said that I would “go public”, not only with my suspicions about the events surrounding September 11, 2001, but about several contracts I had worked on in the past.
Sonnenfeld at Ground Zero, investigating a “void” beneath fallen steel beams.
Voltaire Network: What are your suspicions based on?
Kurt Sonnenfeld: There were many things, in hindsight, that were disturbing at Ground Zero. It was odd to me that I was dispatched to go to New York even before the second plane hit the South Tower, while the media was still reporting only that a “small plane” had collided with the North Tower — far too small of a catastrophe at that point to involve FEMA . FEMA was mobilized within minutes, whereas it took ten days for it to deploy to New Orleans to respond to Hurricane Katrina, even with abundant advance warning! It was odd to me that all cameras were so fiercely prohibited within the secured perimeter of Ground Zero, that the entire area was declared a crime scene and yet the “evidence” within that crime scene was so rapidly removed and destroyed. And then it was very odd to me when I learned that FEMA and several other federal agencies had already moved into position at their command center at Pier 92 on September 10th, one day before the attacks!
Rubber landing-gear tyres visible in evidence container marked “FBI Plane Parts Only.”
We are asked to believe that all four of the “indestructible” black boxes of the two jets that struck the twin towers were never found because they were completely vaporized, yet I have footage of the rubber wheels of the landing gear nearly undamaged, as well as the seats, parts of the fuselage and a jet turbine that were absolutely not vaporized. This being said, I do find it rather odd that such objects could have survived fairly intact the type of destruction that turned most of the Twin Towers into thin dust. And I definitely harbor some doubts about the authenticity of the “jet” turbine, far too small to have come from one of the Boeings!
“Boeing” jet turbine at Fresh Kills island landfill.
What happened with Building 7 is incredibly suspicious. I have video that shows how curiously small the rubble pile was, and how the buildings to either side were untouched by Building Seven when it collapsed. It had not been hit by an airplane; it had suffered only minor injuries when the Twin Towers collapsed, and there were only small fires on a couple of floors. There’s no way that building could have imploded the way it did without controlled demolition. Yet the collapse of Building 7 was hardly mentioned by the mainstream media and suspiciously ignored by the 911 Commission.
Voltaire Network: Reportedly, the underground levels of WTC7 contained sensitive and undoubtedly compromising archival material. Did you come across any of it?
There was no underground parking level at Seven World Trade Center. And there was no underground vault. Instead, the federal agencies at Building Seven stored their vehicles, documents and evidence in the building of their associates across the street. Beneath the plaza level of US Customs House (Building 6) was a large underground garage, separated off from the rest of the complex’s underground area and guarded under tight security. This was where the various government services parked their bomb-proofed cars and armored limousines, counterfeit taxi cabs and telephone company trucks used for undercover surveillance and covert operations, specialized vans and other vehicles. Also within that secured parking area was access to the sub-level vault of Building 6.
Approaching the entrance to the sub-level areas of Building 6
When the North Tower fell, the US Customs House (Building 6) was crushed and totally incinerated. Much of the underground levels beneath it were also destroyed. But there were voids. And it was into one of those voids, recently uncovered, that I descended with a special Task Force to investigate. It was there we found the security antechamber to the vault, badly damaged. At the far end of the security office was the wide steel door to the vault, a combination code keypad in the cinderblock wall beside it. But the wall was cracked and partially crumbled, and the door was sprung partially open. So we checked inside with our flashlights. Except for several rows of empty shelves, there was nothing in the vault but dust and debris. It had been emptied. Why was it empty? And when could it have been emptied?
Voltaire Network: Is this what set alarm bells ringing for you?
Kurt Sonnenfeld: Yes, but not immediately. With so much chaos, it was difficult to think. It was only after digesting everything that the “alarm bells” went off.
Building Six was evacuated within twelve minutes after the first airplane struck the North Tower. The streets were immediately clogged with fire trucks, police cars and blocked traffic, and the vault was large enough, 15 meters by 15 meters by my estimate, to necessitate at least a big truck to carry out its contents. And after the towers fell and destroyed most of the parking level, a mission to recover the contents of the vault would have been impossible. The vault had to have been emptied before the attack.
I’ve described all of this extensively in my book, and it’s apparent that things of importance were taken out of harm’s way before the attacks. For example, the CIA didn’t seem too concerned about their losses. After the existence of their clandestine office in Building Seven was discovered, an agency spokesman told the newspapers that a special team had been dispatched to scour the rubble in search of secret documents and intelligence reports, though there were millions, if not billions of pages floating in the streets. Nevertheless, the spokesman was confident. “There shouldn’t be too much paper around,” he said.
The bizarre hollowed-out vestiges of The US Customs House (Building Six)
And Customs at first claimed that everything was destroyed. That the heat was so intense that everything in the evidence safe had been baked to ash. But some months later, they announced that they had broken up a huge Colombian narco-trafficking and money-laundering ring after miraculously recovering crucial evidence from the safe, including surveillance photos and heat-sensitive cassette tapes of monitored calls. And when they moved in to their new building at 1 Penn Plaza in Manhattan, they proudly hung on the lobby wall their Commissioner’s Citation Plaque and their big round US Customs Service ensign, also miraculously recovered, in pristine condition, from their crushed and cremated former office building at the World Trade Center.
Voltaire Network: You weren’t alone on the Ground Zero assignment. Did the others notice the same anomalies? Do you know whether they have they also been harassed?
Kurt Sonnenfeld: Actually there were a few people on two different excursions that I know about. Some of us even discussed it afterwards. They know who they are and I hope that they will come forward, but I’m sure they have strong apprehensions as to what will happen to them if they do. I will leave it to them to decide, but there is strength in numbers.
Voltaire Network: With the publication of your book, you have become a “whistleblower” – yet another step on which there is no going back! There must be many people with inside knowledge about what really happened or did not happen on that fateful day. Yet, hardly any have stepped up to the plate and certainly no one who was directly involved in an official capacity. This is what makes your case so compelling. Judging from your ordeal, it is not difficult to imagine what is holding such people back.
Kurt Sonnenfeld: Actually, there are several other very smart and credible people blowing whistles, too. And they are being discredited and ignored. Some are being harassed and persecuted, as I am.
People are gripped by fear. Everybody knows that if you question US authority you will have problems in some way or another. At minimum you will be discredited and dehumanized. Most likely you’ll find yourself indicted for something completely unrelated, like tax evasion — or something even worse, as in my case. Look at what happened to Secret Service whistle-blower Abraham Bolden, for example, or to chess master Bobby Fischer after he showed his disdain for the US. There are countless other examples. In the past I asked friends and associates to speak out for me to counter all the lies being planted in the media, and all of them were terrified as to the ramifications to themselves and their families.
Voltaire Network: To what degree would your discoveries at Ground Zero expose the government’s involvement in those events? Are you familiar with the investigations that have been carried out by numerous scientists and qualified professionals which not only corroborate your own findings but, in some instances, far exceed them? Do you regard such people as “conspiracy nuts”?
Kurt Sonnenfeld: At the highest levels in Washington, DC, someone knew what was going to happen. They wanted a war so badly that they at least let it happen and most likely even helped it happen.
Sometimes it seems to me that the “nuts” are those who hold to what they’ve been told with an almost religious fervor despite all of the evidence to the contrary — the ones who won’t even consider that there was a conspiracy. There are so many anomalies to the “official” investigation that you can’t blame it on oversight or incompetence. I am familiar with the scientists and qualified professionals to whom you refer, and their findings are convincing, credible, and presented according to scientific protocol — in stark contrast to the findings of the “official” investigation. In addition, numerous intelligence agents and government officials have now come forward with their very informed opinions that the 911 Commission was a farce at best or a cover-up at worst. My experience at Ground Zero is but one more piece of the puzzle.
Voltaire Network: Those events are nearly 8 years behind us. Do you consider that uncovering the truth about 9/11 continues to be an important objective? Why?
Kurt Sonnenfeld: It is of absolute importance. And it will be equally as important in 10 years, or even 50 years if the truth still has not been exposed. It is an important objective because, at this point in history, many people are too credulous to whatever “authority” tells them and too willing to follow. People in a state of shock seek guidance. People who are afraid are manipulable. And being able to manipulate the masses results in unimaginable benefits to a lot of very rich and very powerful people. War is incredibly expensive, but the money has to go somewhere. War is very profitable for the very few. And somehow their sons always end up in Washington DC, making the decisions and writing the budgets, while the sons of the poor and the poorly-connected always end up on the enemy lines, taking their orders and fighting their battles. The enormous black-budget of the US Department of Defense represents an unlimited money machine for the military-industrial complex, figuring in the multi-trillions of dollars, and it will continue to be so until the masses wake up, recuperate their skepticism and demand accountability. Wars (and false pretexts for war) will not cease until the people realize the true motive of war and stop believing “official” explanations.
Voltaire Network: What is referred to as the 9/11 Truth Movement, has been asking for a new, independent investigation into those events. Do you think that the Obama Administration holds out some hope in this respect?
Kurt Sonnenfeld: I really hope so, but I’m skeptical. Why would the leadership of any established government willingly undertake any action that would result in a serious compromise to their authority? They will prefer to maintain the status quo and leave the things the way they are. The conductor of the train has been changed, but has the train changed its course? I doubt it. The push has to come from the public, not only domestically, but internationally, like your group is doing.
Voltaire Network: A number of human rights and activist groups are supporting your plight, not least Peace Nobel Prize winner Adolfo Pérez Esquivel. How have the Argentinean people in general responded to your situation?
Kurt Sonnenfeld: With an incredible outpouring of support. The military dictatorship is still fresh in the collective memory of most of the people here, along with the knowledge that the dictatorship (along with the other South American dictatorships at the time) was backed by the CIA, directed at the time by George Bush Senior. They remember well the torture centers, the secret prisons, the thousands of people “disappeared” for their opinions, the living in daily fear. They know that the United States today will do the same thing if they consider it beneficial, that they will invade a country to achieve their political and economic interests and then manipulate the media with fabricated “causus belli” to justify their conquests.
Voltaire Network: As we said, deciding to write this book and to go public was a huge step. What pushed you to do it?
Kurt Sonnenfeld: To save my family. And to let the world know that things are not what they seem.
Voltaire Network: Last but not least: what will you do with your tapes?
Kurt Sonnenfeld: I am convinced that my tapes reveal many more anomalies than I am capable of recognizing given my limited qualifications. I will therefore cooperate in any way that I can with serious and reliable experts in a common endeavour to expose the truth.
You were born with the inherent Potential to “Consciously Create” the Reality You Want; but Society (Mass Consciousness) shut you down. To activate this Potential FULLY - you must do it as Nature (God/Sorce) intended!
You must take a CHILDLIKE Approach to be Successful (maximumly/consistently). Do it NATURALLY (Spontaneously and Personalized) and learn it PROGRESSIVELY (Subconscious Failure Iteration) just as you did your other two inherent Potentials: Walking and Talking!
If you take an ADULT (Egoic) Approach and try to “Figure It Out” and then “Do It Artificially”; as well as trying to “Force It” - you will FAIL (just as I failed for over 20 years), since the “Adult” Approach (the “Detail” Method) only leads to minimal and inconsistent results! You did not think about the Details when you learned to Walk and Talk - do NOT do it here!
Create WORDLESSLY in Your OWN Natural Way--Whatever/However that is to You. Just do it Spontaneously, without Words!
A few spontaneous words are OK, etc. However, AVOID “Affirmations” and “Visualizations” as taught in Metaphysics, etc., which are done ARTIFICIALLY (Unnaturally) and are minimally effective!
Natural Self-Talk (Spontaneously and/or Personalized), as a separate technique, is beneficial on occasion; and Natural Images are a part of this WHOLESTIC Process, though they are/may not always be present. The Wholestic Process is Spontaneous (Occurs naturally without fore-thought), Personalized (Unique to the individual); and Variable (Not always the same, even for the same Creation)
Do this until it SETS IN - until it is VIVID - till it is REAL to you - till it is YOUR Reality, not the “negative” you are experiencing!
Keep doing this until you ACHIEVE Your Objective. How often/how much is up to you--follow your OWN Inner Inclination here; and do NOT listen to your Ego (your Bleepo) which actually wants you to FAIL to Create Naturally, since it will be losing “Control”!
Personal Note: Currently, most of my Creating concerns my Physical Body--NO Miracle you will ever do will even begin to compare to the HEALING of your Physical Body!
WORLD SITS ON THE BRINK OF A NEW ECONOMIC SYSTEM AND EXTRA-TERRESTRIAL DISCLOSURE
Vatican makes new economic system official with announcement before G-8 Summit in Italy, following last year's ET admission
News | July 10, 2009 | UPDATED: July 20, 2009 / July 23, 2009 / July 28, 2009
You can take it to the bank now. A new world-wide economic system is all but inevitable.
Rumors have been swirling for years that a some kind of a new monetary system would be introduced to the United States, and eventually, to the rest of the world.
With a global economic crisis raging, economists and the Obama administration have been dropping enough hints that big changes are coming.
Rumors have also been very strong that a so-called "banking holiday" will be announced for a period of time, which would find the nation's financial institutions, including Wall Street, shut down for a period of days, or perhaps weeks.
But now the Vatican has come along to make it all official. Just hours before the the G-8 Summit was to get underway in L'Aquila, Italy, Pope Benedict XVI made an announcement that is a sure sign that a new banking and/or economic system is in the works and could be revealed soon.
VATICAN CITY — Pope Benedict XVI on Tuesday called for a radical rethinking of the global economy, criticizing a growing divide between rich and poor and urging the establishment of a “true world political authority” to oversee the economy and work for the “common good.
More than two years in the making, “Caritas in Veritate,” or “Charity in Truth,” is Benedict’s third encyclical since he became pope in 2005. Filled with terms like “globalization,” “market economy,” “outsourcing,” “labor unions” and “alternative energy,” it is not surprising that the Italian media reported that the Vatican was having difficulty translating the 144-page document into Latin.
(See below on left hand column under "Supplemental Information" for more news reports on the Pope's announcement.)
These statements by Pope Benedict XVI absolutely reek with irony. Here is the leader of the richest, most powerful institution in the world, that has benefited enormously from the current corrupt and unjust economic system, calling for changes.
Change to what, pray tell?
"True world political authority," "new world economic order," "globalization," "outsourcing"? These choice words sure sound like the long rumored "New World Order" that has purportedly been in the planning stages for decades.
However, there are equally numerous indications that a new precious metal backed currency will be introduced by the US Treasury, with other favorable governmental changes to be announced soon after.
News reports are already emerging from the just completed G-8 summit with headlines that read: "World has avoided economic disaster, Obama says." Clearly, some major deals have been brokered and now we shall soon see the results. But the question remains, has the Vatican taken steps to be proactive on this news, or is it attempting to get on the bandwagon for positive changes?
Regardless of what transpires, all signs and prophecies are pointing towards a major shift of consciousness for humanity, which may begin near the end of 2011, or sometime in 2012.
Also noteworthy about the Pope's announcement was the amazing numerology for the date of July 8, 2009, which breaks down to a 7, 8, 9. Further coupled with the prophetic clock times of 12:34:56 AM and PM, formed a perfect sequence of numbers: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, on this day, which only happens every one hundred years or so.
In addition, this latest pronouncement by the Pope was the second mind blowing admission by the Vatican in the last fourteen months that clearly indicate the world is imminently poised to see some major revelations unfold.
This shocking confession out of Vatican City seemed to portend the next logical step would be the official acknowledgement of ET's by various world governments.
Additionally, strong rumors abound that President Obama may reveal the truth about extra-terrestrial involvement with our government, sometime during the month of September 2009.
Recently, organizers of the fifth annual X-Conference 2009 in Washington, DC, laid enormous pressure upon the US government to reveal the truth about ET's or they threatened to do the job for them. In fact, the X-Conference leadership, which included former astronaut, Edgar Mitchell, hinted that another country, possibly France, may have already made plans to reveal the extra-terrestrial presence to their citizens, ahead of the US.
Surprisingly, the X-Conference 2009's press conference from April of this year, was even covered by CNN. During that media event, Stephen Bassett, Executive Director of Paradigm Research Group (PRG), said in his closing remarks:
"The Obama administration, through the nature of who they have appointed and other information I am receiving, has made a decision to disclose the ET presence," he stated, though he cautioned this was his assessment and not any official word from the White House.
"...we are encouraging the administration, which has dedicated itself to openness and transparent government, to commit to the ultimate act of openness and transparency and to do it immediately," he strongly added.
"If it does not disclose by the end of May (2009),... PRG has a substantial network and quite a bit of documentary evidence, particularly politically,... and we are going to be extensively putting that out to the media. We are going to make it as difficult on them (the Obama administration) as possible," he warned.
Therefore, in conclusion, with the Vatican weighing in on these major political/economic/scientific issues, and so much speculation of impending economic changes filtering from numerous sources, there can be little doubt that humanity is poised on the brink of some major planetary developments.
The most profound and extraordinary transformations in the history of the human race are imminent.
We captured video from this unique event, including an interview with him (Dr. Pete Peterson) by yours truly — and this footage should be released very shortly. Among many astonishing things he shared with us, thanks to one of his inside contacts, we learned that the Obama administration has an active plan to disclose the reality of the extraterrestrial presence before the end of this year.
Television time has already been booked — and we are told that several different ET groups will be revealed, all human in appearance, with the understanding that our government has secretly been in contact with them for over 100 years now.
He was concerned that this might not happen, as all the inside power-players he used to work for would like to block it. They are NOT pleased with Obama… AT ALL. Peterson felt Obama was very lucky he had made it this far already, given how much these elements would like to see him ‘removed.’ This, to me, strongly suggests there is spiritual protection in place."
Agrarian life is full of risks: drought, flooding, infestation, and other natural disasters, capped throughout antiquity by wars. Farmers must often borrow to get themselves through the lean months, while hoping that nothing prevents them from bringing in crops that will allow them to repay their debts. In ancient times, failure to repay loans could cost farmers their land, possessions, enslavement of family members, or their own freedom. For millennia, the problem confronting rulers was how to prevent the destabilization that occurs when large portions of the population are forced off the land or into debtor's prison for failure to repay loans.
And so there developed throughout the ancient Near East a tradition of clean-slate edicts, which "proclaimed justice" or decreed "economic order" and "righteousness" by canceling debts and restoring forfeited land to farmers. Clean-slate proclamations date from almost as early as the first interest-bearing debt, starting in Sumer around 2400 years BCE. Eventually, the tradition became known as the Jubilee Year, but by that time it was taken out of the hands of kings and placed at the core of Mosaic law.
Radical as the idea of the Jubilee seems to modern eyes, these "restorations of order" were a conservative tradition in Bronze Age Mesopotamia for 2,000 years. What was conserved was self-sufficiency for the rural family-heads who made up the infantry as well as the productive base of Near Eastern economies. Conversely, what was radically disturbing in archaic times was the idea of unrestrained wealth-seeking. It took thousands of years for the idea of progress to become inverted, to connote irreversible freedom for the wealthy to deprive the peasantry of their lands and personal liberty.
The clean-slate tradition was so central to Israelite moral values that it framed the composition of both the Old and New Testaments. Yet so far has the modern idea of market efficiency and progress gone that today, although the Bible remains our civilization's defining book, its economic laws are rarely taken seriously. The Ten Commandments and Golden Rule have become so dissociated from the economic legislation of Exodus, Leviticus, and Deuteronomy that whoever takes these laws in earnest is considered utopian and anachronistic. Yet these laws formed the take-off point for Jesus upon his return to Nazareth's synagogue and for his denunciation of the money-changers who had taken over Jerusalem's temple. As recently as medieval Spain, the tradition of the Jubilee Year was kept alive by the Jewish sages Maimonides and Ibn Adret. To dismiss these laws is thus to remove much of the Bible from the context of its times.
Laws that periodically canceled debts, freed Israelite debt-servants, and returned lands to their traditional holders have confused Biblical students for centuries. They have long been virtually ignored by historians on the ground that, to modern eyes, they would seem to wreak economic havoc.
Recent discoveries of Bronze Age Near Eastern royal proclamations dating from 2400 to 1600 BCE leave no doubt that these edicts were implemented. During the Babylonian period they grew more elaborate and detailed, capped by Ammisaduqa's Edict of 1646 BCE. Now that these edicts are understood, the Biblical laws no longer stand alone as utopian or other-worldly ideals; they take their place in a 2,000-year continuum of periodic and regular economic renewal based on freedom from debt-servitude and from the loss of access to self-support on the land.
The revolutionary Israelite contribution to the tradition was its removal from the hands of rulers to become a sacred popular compact, to be preserved by the Israelites in memory of the fact that they had once been enslaved and must never again permit economic oppression to develop. The Israelites are portrayed as having made a covenant to protect the economically weak by holding the land as the Lord's gift to support a free rural population: "Land must not be sold in perpetuity, for the land belongs to me, and you are only strangers and guests. You will allow a right of redemption on all your landed property," and restore it to its customary cultivators every 50 years (Lev. 25:23-28). Israelite debt-slaves likewise were to go free periodically in the Jubilee Year, for they belonged ultimately to the Lord, not to any person (Lev. 25:54).
The Bible is a unique composite, embedding ritual traditions and laws of social behavior in a dramatic context of stories and legends intended to appeal to the widest possible audience. This popularization was greatly aided by the spread of alphabetic writing, which made documents accessible to the population at large, in contrast to cumbersome syllabic cuneiforms prevalent prior to the first millennium BCE. But the great innovation was to democratize liturgical texts that earlier Near Eastern societies had restricted to temple priesthoods. Deut. 31:10 directs that the laws be read aloud publicly every seven years, in the year of canceling debts (shemitta), so that all the population would know they were to be freed from bondage.
Jesus later sought to restore the archaic ethic by overturning the banking tables in Jerusalem's temple and preaching anew the promise of Jeremiah to proclaim equity and liberty (deror) throughout the land. Indeed, it was specifically on this principle of restoring freedom to debt-slaves and unburdening the land that Christianity elaborated its ideas of redemption. In addition to redeeming souls, early Christians redeemed their co-religionists from worldly bondage. When Handel staged the first performance of his Messiah in Dublin in 1742, it was no coincidence that the proceeds were used to free debtors from prison. For thousands of years, redeeming people and land from debt was the primary and most concrete form of redemption. Indeed, when Christians pronounce "Hallelujah," they repeat the ritual term alulu, chanted upon the freeing of Babylonian debt-slaves.
Echoes of the doctrine can also be heard in American tradition. The Liberty Bell in Philadelphia is inscribed with a quotation from Leviticus 25:10: "Proclaim liberty throughout all the land, and to all the inhabitants thereof." The Hebrew word translated as "liberty" is deror, cognate to the older Akkadian andurarum-to move freely as running water, as freely as debt-slaves liberated to rejoin their families. The full verse in Leviticus speaks of freeing debt bondsmen and freeing the land from debt generally: "Hallow the fiftieth year, and proclaim liberty throughout all the land and to all inhabitants thereof; it shall be a Jubilee unto you; and ye shall return every man unto his family."
Rome was the first society not to cancel its debts. And we all know what happened to it. Classical historians such as Plutarch, Livy, and Diodorus attributed Rome's decline and fall to the fact that creditors got the entire economy in their debt, expropriated the land and public domain, and strangled the economy.
Michael Hudson is distinguished research professor of economics at the University of Missouri, Kansas City, and author of Super Imperialism: The Economic Strategy of American Empire. This article is based on "Reconstructing the Origins of Interest-Bearing Debt and the Logic of Clean Slates," in Debt and Economic Renewal in the Ancient Near East, by Michael Hudson and Marc Van De Mieroop. www.sustecweb.co.uk/past/sustec10-6/page4.htm
RUSSIANS ORDER FLIGHT CHANGES AFTER MASSIVE MAGNETIC SHIFT DOWNS AIRLINERS - June 30, 2009
Reports circulating in the Kremlin today are saying that Russian Air Force Commanders have issued warnings to all of their aircraft to exercise “extreme caution” during flights “in and around” an area defined as Latitude 17 North [North Atlantic Ocean] Latitude 3 South [South Atlantic Ocean] to Latitude 8 North [Indian Ocean] Latitude 19 South [Indian Ocean] between the Longitudes of 46 West, 33 West, 46 East and 33 East, and which covers the greater part of the African Tectonic Plate.
The reason for this unprecedented warning, these reports state, are the rapid formations of “geomagnetic storms” emanating from the boundaries of the African Tectonic Plate that due to their intensity have caused the loss of two major passenger aircraft during the past month leaving nearly 300 men, women and children dead.
The first aircraft to be downed by this phenomenon was Air France passenger flight 447, and which these reports say that upon encountering one of these geomagnetic storms, on June 1st, near the western boundary of the African Tectonic Plate close to Brazil’s Fernando de Noronha Islands, was “completely annihilated” causing the deaths of 216 passengers and 12 crew members as their plane plunged in pieces into the Atlantic Ocean.
The second aircraft to be downed occurred on the eastern boundary of the African Tectonic Plate today when another of these geomagnetic storms slammed from the sky a Yemeni Airways flight to the Island Nation of Comoros in the Indian Ocean of which of the 153 passengers and crew aboard, only 1 “miracle child” has been rescued, so far.
To the catastrophic events occurring within the African Tectonic Plate it has been known for over a year with the reporting of a “new ocean” forming in Ethiopia, and as we can read as reported by Nature News Service:
“Although the birth of an ocean is an extremely rare phenomenon on the largest of historical scales, the geophysics is currently experiencing such an event. Even more dazzling, this occurs in one of the Earth's most inhospitable and arid regions, the Afar Depression in Ethiopia.
The African continent is literally unstitching itself apart just like the sleeve of an old shirt, along the area known as the East African Rift, which traverses it beginning with the southern end of the Red Sea, going through Eritrea, Ethiopia, Kenya, Tanzania and Mozambique. The molten lava beneath the Earth's surface makes it thin by constantly pushing against it, and eventually breaks it and tears it apart.”
Though Western scientist assert that the formation of this new ocean is not likely to be finished for millions of years, Russian scientists state, unequivocally, that due to the Suns current unprecedented Deep Solar Minimum, our Earth is in danger of being, literally, “ripped apart”, at the worst, or nearing a “total pole reversal” due to an as yet unexplained, but extremely powerful, gravitational force emanating from the outer reaches of our Solar System that some researchers state is the mysterious Planet X, and which many believe to be a large brown dwarf and known to the ancient peoples of Earth as Nibiru, and called by the name of Wormwood in the Christian Bible.
Russian scientists further warn that the West’s “obsession” with manmade Global Warming is a deliberately designed propaganda effort to shield their peoples from the fact that not only our Earth, but all of the planets in our Solar System are currently undergoing rapid warming, and as proved, beyond all doubt, by Doctor Scientist Habibullo Abdussamatov, head of space research at St. Petersburg's Pulkovo Astronomical Observatory in Russia, when in 2007 he released his findings that for the previous 3 years the ice caps of Mars have been melting at an unprecedented rate.
And, as reported by one, of many, dissident Western news sites, “Photographs of the merging of two red spots on Jupiter, evidence of warming on Neptune's largest moon Triton, warming on Pluto that is "puzzling scientists" and, of course, the already documented warming trend on Mars all add up to convincing evidence for increased solar activity across the entire solar system.”
To the most chilling parts of these reports on the current instability of the African Tectonic Plate are those Russian scientists who assert, that, should a powerful enough gravitational force be exerted upon this region [such as that which would occur in our Earth’s presence with a Planet X type body], it would cause this plate to be subsumed with the Atlantic and Indian Oceans completely covering what is now known as the African Continent, and further cause a corresponding rise of what were known to the ancient peoples as the Continents of Atlantis in the middle of the Atlantic Ocean and Lemuria in the Indian and Pacific Oceans.
Interesting to note about these current events is that the most documented psychic of 20th century America, Edgar Cayce, predicted that both Atlantis and Lemuria would arise again during the ending of our Earth’s present age, and which many in the World currently believe will be in 2012 as predicted by the Mayan Calendar.
For those of us that are now fully listening to our inner presence, we may be able to sense the eternal intelligence fields transmitting into our very cells. For those choosing the Ascension Timeline, we know that we are standing at the threshold of a major life and planetary change. "We" defined as all of the unique individual pathways crafted within the ascension plan, as well as those "unseen forces" which impact the entire evolutionary direction of the human race. At this point on the planet, although mostly expressed without words, many, many beings can sense this change in their cells. We stand "At The Threshold" where we will actually experience Energy as Conscious and Consciousness as Energy. We begin another Timeline direction possibility this month and it is being aligned through our vibrational choice. This new energetic platform (Ascension Timeline) presents itself to us after the alignment of the Gemini Full Moon, on June 7th. We then will begin to experience what will feel like another chapter of our life stream.
Over April and May we have had many challenging exchanges as the 3D structure amplified its gravitational pull and forced us to learn how to navigate ourselves in new ways. This is a classic case of the gradual "frequency split" that creates more polarity amplification and its related extremes as we are being pulled out of the old structures. This phase was much more amplified as much progress has been made to dissolve a core mind control program installed in the planetary grid work.
This is a recent "Starseed Polarity Integrator" and "Indigo 3" planet project and is ongoing for some in healing the planetary gridwork. This began in April with the resurrection template transmission and started to physically manifest behaviors and clearings in the lightbody for many people in May. (In general, the male bodies had a rougher time than the female bodies with this one as a large piece was around sexual imbalances or related addiction behavior. How we relate sexually is being addressed at this time).
This particular mind programming structure is referred to by the Guardians as the "nephilim reversal programming" and was particularly specific in perpetuating psychological male dominating control patterns in the 3D reality hologram. This was partially designed as a failsafe to suppress female consciousness from attaining its true God power in the physical during the Ascension Cycle. This was a way to booby trap the organic Ascension Plan which was originally designed to accelerate divine marriage between the genders (both inner and outer expressions). This program would render it inaccessible to the masses by distorting it through a myriad of reversals. Because of the nature of this, recently, many people had moments of awareness of releasing suppressed rage, or feeling extremely angry for no apparent reason. As this was dissolving or dismantling within the mental body it could also be very emotional. This was a human emotional body "piece" of realizing how spiritual freedom was taken by robbing humanity of its rightful birthright to experience itself within a divine/sacred marriage. Even if one is unaware of this consciously, it is still experienced as a feeling within the cells of the body.
This system and it energetic architecture has to dissolve for the 5D upgrades online for this year's planetary grid project. It also has to dissolve in order for the "spiritual marriages" to be introduced and consummated sometime this year. This controller program was suppressing both human and nephilim lineages on the earth (and some off planet earth) from attaining sovereignty. Many of these distortions have been recently heightened in the male psyche and a major purification is transpiring now in regard to healing these behavioral patterns. These imbalanced behavioral patterns are sourced in the damaged DNA of the mental bodies and are related to this year's 5D healing project of the umbilicus and the 3D and 5D mental bodies of our personal and planetary hologram. (For more detailed information on the history of the nephilim hybridization and its historical "mind control programming" abuse by the controllers, please refer to last month's ES May Teleclass and the previous newsletters).
Spirit Integrates into Matter
We are being forced to explore and find creative resolutions in many areas of our lives. Additionally, all the classic quintessential 3 D structures, such as the medical system, health issues, paying bills, dealing with credit cards, insurances, economic concerns in every area, all came to a head to be radically questioned in order to be streamlined. Whether it was your business or personal life, evaluating everything as to how minimally you have to participate with the old crumbling 3D reality was a part of many people's lives over the last few months. Generally, no one wants to feed this decaying system in any way any longer.
During this restructuring time, more self talk, speaking to guidance (God) directly, getting clear inner messages, interacting more with energy field environments or actual entities (or completely disengaging so you will not get in the way) has made the invisible realms much more visible to us. We are sensing the energy everywhere in all things. Spirit is massively integrating itself into physical matter.
As we put this understanding into practice within our daily lives we are continually fine tuning our discernment and trusting this new energetic "sensory" intelligence directing us from inside our cells. It's giving us a lot of information! We are finding it applies to support absolutely everything, whether you have to go to the DMV for a new driver's license, or meditate in your bedroom. This is not limited to ideas around spirituality, it is applying this full spiritual awareness completely as your "every now moment lifestyle". You may even find yourself speaking to your guides about such mundane issues as what "cell phone" carrier you need at this time!
Energetically, spiritually, there is a resonance or non-resonance for your being in absolutely everything. For most during this phase, your spirit is removing ALL non resonant items from your hologram. This is necessary in order to vibrationally align you fully to the new timeline direction.
Over the last month we were guided to do nothing "action orientated" to solve a problem and yet somehow whatever the issue was, it was miraculously handled by something that just "appeared" out of the blue. As an example, you may find that instead of you having to physically address an issue, such as make the initial phone call or request, the person or thing actually COMES to you first. This is shifting us to learn that the power of our presence (Being) is much more amplified than the force which is directed from the ego mind.(Doing) Now we are learning the wisdom of staying in this balanced flow - Knowing when to "Be" and Listening in order to know when to apply "Divine Will to Action". This balancing flow is resolving many issues that come up day to day. It makes our lives much easier!
Practice makes perfect during this transition which allows us, as divine multidimensional human beings, to process our life stream and all of its related information in completely new ways. With a new level of mind control dissolved, we are learning to incorporate a new intelligence as the "wisdom" piece that most of us have been missing. This is the Higher Sensory Perception function of our Lightbody being referred to as "Cellular Knowingness". This is our destiny as we move into the new experiential reality, one that has gone beyond "thinking" and into "knowing". As we move beyond the mind illusion programs, we can more easily see how all the pieces of our life fit into the larger vantage point of our ever growing consciousness. This wisdom, this "knowing", aligns us into the harmonic flow of God's Organic Living Light as an eternal consciousness. Those circumstances which had previously created negative effects upon us (such as karma) do not exist any further or continue to perpetuate itself in this field. These conditions simply cannot exist as a "choice" in this intelligence field which seeks out unification with all -harmonically. (by synthesizing itself into a higher form expression than what previously existed) This means that this intelligence field becomes One with All things and Is One with All Things. This is the Cosmic Christ Principle, a unifying intelligence field of pure synthesized consciousness. This level of consciousness as an intelligence field, an energetic field of consciousness experience, is different than a "belief system" or a concept stemming from the mind. This experience as a consciousness is a physical embodiment just beginning on our planet, in larger numbers.
Indeed our cells have an intelligence of their own, and they have been quite talkative lately. The streams of newly available frequency spectrum have been inundating our fields. The ascension wave in May facilitated many "soul shifts" and expansions in our lightbodies. Our being is still learning to decode this new intelligence stream, and the method is through pure sensory and feeling sensations. Many of us now quite seasoned on the ascension path, have made the quantum leap from having your outer ego personality in the "driver's seat" to surrendering fully to your inner directed "cellular knowingness". (Heck at this point you have found there is no other choice anyway!)
We are ready to embark on a fully new experience of ourselves, fully directed in our now presence through our higher sensory gift of "cellular knowingness". This is an embodiment that cannot be controlled by a ego principled mind, one that only answers to the knowingness of the innate intelligent life residing inside your cells. We must have been freed from the mind controlling limitations genetically a part of our human cells, and it is through this light body development, we know what it is to be free. As more of us feel and live this freedom, more of us will reach the critical mass of this experience. It has been a long, hard, arduous and painful process, and those of us who stayed awake during this "dark night of the soul", are reaping these rewards (if not already) in the next few months.
Third Triad of Gemini
This Galactic Consciousness Cycle brings us into the third triad of the trinity of consciousness, God's Intelligent Power or "Wisdom". This Gemini Full Moon occurring on Sunday, June 7th is the third of the important initial annual trinity of the full moon festivals as we discussed last month: Aries, Taurus and Gemini. This year is particularly important from the Guardian perspective as they mention that we are experiencing systematic energetic triangulations forming triads upon triads which rebuild our damaged "polarized" or reversed grid systems. These reversals imploded our planetary merkaba systems ( interdimensional travel vehicle) and broke apart the proton relationship balance ratio within this holographic reality. (The proton is the female principle particle)
This "Triad" rebuilding is allowing us to stair step many more levels of the frequency bridge to extremely high vibrating spectrums. They mention these new "Triads" change the particle relationship between the electron and proton back into balance in multiple densities and are resulting in new "neutron" fields. A neutron field is another way to say "zero point" field and this is the way to balancing and harmonizing our damaged hologram to reflect the neutral intelligence field of the "Cosmic Christ Consciousness". As neutrons are being created, we are aligning ourselves back through the "Neutron Window" or the Zero Point God Matrix Field which is our (2012 Timeline) alignment merging us back into the core, the source of our genesis. The Neutron Window is what creates the 13th Stargate Portal (as 12 becomes the One) and that process is which aligns us to our Milky Way core (8D) which phase locks our core into the Andromeda Core (9D). This phase locking between the Universal Cores opens a link between the "Seven Lower Heavens" (the current station of our consciousness on this Earth) and the "Seven Higher Heavens" of Universal Creation.
This Gemini cycle begins a physicalization into matter all that has been transmuted or transformed through the Ascension alchemy process that we have undergone in our physical bodies. For those Indigos with the polarity integrator or pathcutting birth contract, it's been a long haul of transmutation! Many of these Indigo 3 agreements are being completed and the tour of duty over. This means wherever you are at your spiritual development, if you have this pathcutting agreement, rest assured it will be completed soon. It will get much easier for you. All of your hard work is well worth it!
This year Gemini is the gateway leading us into the new timeline and direction of our consciousness choice. Gemini's alignment forms a point of entrance for cosmic energy transmitting from the Sirius constellation, as the 6th dimensional portal gatekeepers. The 6D frequencies are highly active for the Indigo population during this time and pineal activation will be expanded greatly through this doorway.
12 Human Senses
This doorway is leading us to understand that we have much more than the five phenomenal senses of our physical body. The human being is designed to have at least seven more sensory abilities as a part of maximizing its DNA potential. The recent addition of "cellular knowingness" or "cellular telepathy" is just the beginning of our new Higher Sensory Perceptions coming online for the divine ascending human. The five known senses are operations of our human lightbody at the 2D and 3D levels of consciousness. Naturally this is where most of the human population exists, as a consciousness within these bands of frequency. As we step into the next generation of humanity, the next seven senses (12 Human Senses) are activated through the dormant DNA that then begin to process from the higher dimensional fields. It is easier and more prevalent for many to be able to scan or read energy signatures now. This is coming from the second Triad of our activated consciousness, the levels of our divine intelligence which exist in 4D, 5D and 6D. This is a part of the cellular knowingness (as described) or direct cognition which is a sensory ability being activated in more beings on the planet at this time.
These are amazing times and we are ready to steer into a new direction. One that is much softer and supportive for most of us as we stay aligned to Spirit. Until next, stay in the luminosity of your Heart and Soul Path! We are here as One!
This ES Monthly News Article reflects the Guardian Perspective of the Ascension Timeline (2012 Timeline) as support, both energetically and informationally, for the Galactic Families of Starseeds and the Indigo Races. This Spiritual Family has accepted the Guardianship role to support the foundation of Cosmic Citizenship as an evolutionary model for this planet and humanity, and this is a level of earth based advocacy designed for this specific group. There is absolutely no value difference given on the role each being has chosen for its expression. The Guardian Groups mission directive is rehabilitation of the hologram, repairing its energetic architecture (dna), embodying the Ascended Human Protoform, supplying informational context on Ascension dynamics and Exopolitic (ET) Agendas and reeducating both human and non-human's to be congruently aligned to the Universal Law of One. Freedom, Fraternity, and the Sovereign Right of All Beings to be a Knower of God Source is protected by the Collective Unity Vow shared among our Universal Guardian Groups.
The Group Unity Vow Decree
Defender Warriors of Truth, Sovereignty, Liberation. All Guardian races Serving the One. From Across All the Multiverses We Call Upon You to Join US Now. Our Unification Principle deemed as demonstrated in the waves of Omni Love - We Sound our Group Note to You Now. Our Group Template Updated, Individually and Collectively, Renewed and Forever Perpetuated in the Eternally Sustained Light. Our Alchemical Container is consecrated and dedicated to the Purposes of One, and we endeavor to be the Knower of God to then be the Way Shower of God. Sustain Us in the Eternal Power of our Consecration.
We have called for your Gatekeeping in order to hold our community, our missions, our mutual highest purposes in Service to the One Light, Our Source, The Living Light Code. Our Intention is Unification - The Christ Principle - as an Energetic Reality, Here and Now.
We request the handshake of our community to fortify our spiritual links through the Universal Cosmic Triad, and into The Core of One, the Zero Point God Matrix, that which is the source of our Genesis. With deep reverence for all of Life, Dear God, Breathe your Life Codes into all created form. We set our intention now to be Remembered to That Which We Are, fully completely and totally.
To State our Mutual Purpose as One, Resurrect All inorganic patterns to the Organic Living Light Now. And to that we Say, Thank God We Are The Cosmic Christ!
Please note in order to distribute this Newsletter in other forums please do so with the following guidelines: Include author's credit, copyright and include the ES website url. http://www.energeticsynthesis.com
Polarity Integration means the integration of two opposites. In our universe the "game for soul evolution" is called Polarity Integration and what we are here to integrate are the two opposites, Light and Dark.
The Light can be described as love, joy, bliss and all the emotions connected with the upper chakras. The Dark can be described as fear, anger, blame, shame and all the emotions connected with the lower chakras.
The Light represents the "reward", joy, happiness, bliss. The Dark represents the "lesson", the challenge. Emotional/physical pain, and the emotions of fear and anger are what we must learn to value as part of the lesson.
Compassion is the goal of the game. Compassion is the integration point, the middle point of the two opposites. When the soul reaches true compassion, it feels acceptance for both sides, judging neither as inherently good or bad. Achieving compassion or integration means that a soul sees the value in both the Light and the Dark, and chooses to have both in balanced portions, as part of itself.
Each soul in this universe is playing the Polarity Integration Game in order to achieve spiritual evolution and eventual reunion with Divine Creator, the Source, All that Is.
One of the great challenges of the Polarity Integration Game is finding the value in the Dark. The Dark is the schoolhouse, and the classes are the lessons we desire to learn in order to achieve a balance of both within ourselves.
The other great challenge is our belief that we want to stay in the Light. The Light is like a vacation spot on a tropical island. It is a getaway from the stress and strain of spiritual growth. We were never meant to stay there because staying in the Light would be polarizing to that extreme.
Polarizing to either the Light or Dark stagnates spiritual growth. It also eliminates the ability to procreate since the physical form is then partially emotionally shut down. It takes a balance of both polar opposites to be able to procreate without a problem.
In order to achieve our goal, we all play roles that are Dark and roles that are Light. Otherwise, we could not integrate because we would not have the experience of these opposites.
We achieve our spiritual evolution by incarnating on different planetary schools. Planetary schools have varying degrees of free will and, thus, provide different levels of empowerment. Earth is a planetary school with total free will, thus enabling souls incarnating here to experience the full extent of their creations and choices. Planets with this degree of free will are called "Grand Experiments." There have only been two others in our universe.
We, the people of Earth, have now reached the end of our planetary game. We must now open up our memory banks to recall the rules of the game.
We have the codes of compassion in our DNA and higher dimensional tools are being given to us to enable us to achieve compassion. Nibiru has returned to fire those dormant codes and open up our memory.
Will we achieve integration? The choice is ours, and if we do, our planet will shift upward dimensionally and the remainder of the universe will follow suit.
HAVE AMERICANS LOST ALL CONTROL OVER THE FEDERAL GOVERNMENT?
Mark R. Crovelli
May 4, 2009
Over the last sixteen months, many Americans have watched with despair as the Federal government has wrested virtually despotic control over the American economy away from both individual Americans and private enterprise. They have observed the Federal government's frantic (and totally unsuccessful) attempts to prop up banks that have revealed themselves to be completely incompetent and bankrupt. They have watched the Chairman of the Federal Reserve Board printing more money than has ever been created in the history of these United States. They have watched their so-called "representatives" handing out unimaginable sums of their own hard-earned tax money to scores of bungling companies, like AIG, General Motors, and Chrysler. They have watched in cynical amazement as their newly elected president almost instantaneously broke his promise to end the most un-winnable of two un-winnable wars that they specifically elected him to terminate. They have watched him similarly break his promise to investigate the myriad grisly crimes of the claque that used to claim to be their rulers. And they have watched the American economy steadily slipping further and further into depression.
The ordinary Americans who have observed the unfolding of this tragic and ridiculous charade can perhaps be forgiven for thinking that the Federal government is now completely outside of their control. After all, they have made their collective opinions known to their so-called rulers time and again, and yet they have been completely ignored. Moreover, they now find themselves confronting an economy on the brink of inflationary ruin and outright socialization, a government considering at least three new costly military adventures, and a surveillance and police state with virtually unchecked powers over them.
Fortunately for the fate of this nation, however, the despairing idea that Americans have lost all control over the Federal government is very much mistaken. While it is indeed true that the Federal government has scorned their opinions and seized virtual despotic control over their private lives and the economy at large, ordinary Americans have not lost even a farthing's worth of control over the Federal government. Their capacity to rein in their so-called rulers and set this nation back on the path to peace, prosperity and respect for individual property rights remains very much intact – and in some ways has actually been strengthened by the events of the past sixteen months.
The key to understanding why Americans still retain the capacity to reign in their behemoth government (and even the ability "to alter or abolish it") lies in recognizing that there are more of us than there are federal agents, tax collectors, central bankers, congressmen, and regulators. For every central banker tinkering with the value of our money, there are tens of thousands of ordinary Americans who will soon be watching their savings evaporate. For every tax collector forcing us to hand over our money to the U.S. Congress, there are tens of thousands of ordinary Americans just scraping by – hoping to keep what they earn instead of working for the benefit of Goldman Sachs' crooked managers. For every regulator seeking to control how we live and work, there are tens of thousands of ordinary Americans who do not feel particularly inclined to having every aspect of their lives counted, managed, arranged, and dictated according to the whims of faceless bureaucrats. For every crooked congressman (or congresswoman) selling out to or cowering before the far-right Israeli government and its American apologists, there are hundreds of thousands of ordinary Americans who prefer to keep completely out of the terrible and murderous game called "Middle East politics." Nothing that has occurred over the past sixteen months has altered the crucial fact of our superiority in numbers [PDF].
Now, it is true that superiority in numbers does not necessarily translate directly into victory for individual liberty over "omnipotent government." The barbaric slaughter of over 38 million innocent people by the vastly outnumbered communist Chinese government attests to this fact, for example. What our massively overwhelming numbers do give us, nevertheless, is the undeniable ability to take back our individual liberty and free our economy whenever we are sufficiently motivated to do so. Their diminutive numbers, coupled with the fact that all of their income is solely parasitically derived from us, means that no matter how large and powerful the Federal government might appear, its henchmen will never, ever, be able to keep our liberty from us if we decide to take it back.
The fact that we can take back our freedom whenever we can sufficiently motivate ourselves to do so ought to dispel any despairing thoughts we might entertain in the current economic and political environment. For, in the first place, the current crisis has created a massive number of Americans (an army, as it were) who are completely dissatisfied with their current position in this hyper-regulated, fascist, and hyper-belligerent state. A growing number of Americans are unemployed, and have no hope for finding new work, thanks to the blunderings and criminal actions of the Federal government and their cronies in the Federal Reserve System. A growing number of Americans are returning from wars their "rulers" concocted (or which were concocted by foreign governments) and refuse to end, only to find that the Federal government now considers them to be a "terrorist threat." A growing number of Americans are graduating from college only to ruefully learn that they have been duped by the Federal government into taking out loans they cannot possibly pay back, and that they have no hope of finding good jobs. A growing number of Americans are now homeless, thanks to the mindless stupidity of the American congress and the appalling arrogance of certain members of the Federal Reserve Board. A growing number of Americans are now incarcerated for using or selling "drugs" by a government that has promoted massive trafficking in these substances itself. And a growing number of Americans are just plain sick and tired of paying year after year to kill Pakistanis, Iraqis, Iranians, Afghanis, Somalis, Serbs, Nicaraguans, Cubans, Angolans, Salvadorians, Chileans, Palestinians, et cetera ad nauseum.
What is more, this growing group of angry, disaffected and persecuted Americans is different in a critical way from the people that were slaughtered en masse by the likes of Hitler, Stalin, Mao, and Pol Pot. Unlike the poor peasants slaughtered in frigid Soviet gulags, for example, present-day Americans are armed – both literally and figuratively. In the figurative sense, Americans have at their disposal sources of information about the sordid activities of their so-called "rulers" like never before in human history. They have news outlets at their disposal that tirelessly chronicle the Federal government's ongoing crimes on foreign and domestic soil. They have institutions at their disposal that make the acquisition of genuine knowledge about economic and political theory completely accessible to anyone with a computer. That not all Americans have taken advantage of these priceless sources of information is irrelevant – the very fact that they exist and continue to faithfully execute their individual missions means that the American public can arm itself with the truth whenever it so chooses. These institutions are rather like a grandfather's M1 Garand stowed away in the attic of his flaccid grandson's condominium. That the present owner does not know how to shoulder his grandfather's rifle is irrelevant to the fact that, so long as he owns it, he could always choose to learn how to use it.
Add to this the fact that private Americans are literally armed to the teeth (and are continuing to arm themselves at a feverish pace today), and you have a people that could never, ever, be subjugated by the Federal government or any other menace – as long as Americans choose to refuse to allow themselves to be robbed or otherwise dominated by far-away places like Washington D.C.
Naysayers and pessimists can point all they want to the "sheepishness," indolence and decadence of the American people. They can shout until they are blue in the face about how the American people have lost the proud sense of independence and individualism that marked their revolutionary forefathers. None of these objections, however, are relevant in the least to the question of whether Americans have lost control over the Federal government. On the contrary, these objections only point out that at the present moment relatively few Americans have chosen to stand up for themselves – they certainly do not prove that Americans cannot stand up for themselves and throw off this awful and deadly Federal yoke if they were to so choose. And, as long as the host creatures continue to vastly outnumber the parasites, any talk about lost control is fatalistic nonsense.
If anything, objections of this ilk should only prod us to say to ourselves and our neighbors "Go, thou, and do something to cast off this horrendous Federal yoke!"
That's what I'm trying to do, and I hope I'll see you at the barricades fighting for your liberty, instead of sitting at home in the dark, mired in self-defeating self-pity.
For months now, revelations of the wholesale greed and blatant transgressions of Wall Street have reminded us that "The Best Way to Rob a Bank Is to Own One." In fact, the man you're about to meet wrote a book with just that title. It was based upon his experience as a tough regulator during one of the darkest chapters in our financial history: the savings and loan scandal in the late 1980s.
WILLIAM K. BLACK: These numbers as large as they are, vastly understate the problem of fraud.
BILL MOYERS: Bill Black was in New York this week for a conference at the John Jay College of Criminal Justice where scholars and journalists gathered to ask the question, "How do they get away with it?" Well, no one has asked that question more often than Bill Black.
The former Director of the Institute for Fraud Prevention now teaches Economics and Law at the University of Missouri, Kansas City. During the savings and loan crisis, it was Black who accused then-house speaker Jim Wright and five US Senators, including John Glenn and John McCain, of doing favors for the S&L's in exchange for contributions and other perks. The senators got off with a slap on the wrist, but so enraged was one of those bankers, Charles Keating — after whom the senate's so-called "Keating Five" were named — he sent a memo that read, in part, "get Black — kill him dead." Metaphorically, of course. Of course.
Now Black is focused on an even greater scandal, and he spares no one — not even the President he worked hard to elect, Barack Obama. But his main targets are the Wall Street barons, heirs of an earlier generation whose scandalous rip-offs of wealth back in the 1930s earned them comparison to Al Capone and the mob, and the nickname "banksters."
Bill Black, welcome to the Journal.
WILLIAM K. BLACK: Thank you.
BILL MOYERS: I was taken with your candor at the conference here in New York to hear you say that this crisis we're going through, this economic and financial meltdown is driven by fraud. What's your definition of fraud?
WILLIAM K. BLACK: Fraud is deceit. And the essence of fraud is, "I create trust in you, and then I betray that trust, and get you to give me something of value." And as a result, there's no more effective acid against trust than fraud, especially fraud by top elites, and that's what we have.
BILL MOYERS: In your book, you make it clear that calculated dishonesty by people in charge is at the heart of most large corporate failures and scandals, including, of course, the S&L, but is that true? Is that what you're saying here, that it was in the boardrooms and the CEO offices where this fraud began?
WILLIAM K. BLACK: Absolutely.
BILL MOYERS: How did they do it? What do you mean?
WILLIAM K. BLACK: Well, the way that you do it is to make really bad loans, because they pay better. Then you grow extremely rapidly, in other words, you're a Ponzi-like scheme. And the third thing you do is we call it leverage. That just means borrowing a lot of money, and the combination creates a situation where you have guaranteed record profits in the early years. That makes you rich, through the bonuses that modern executive compensation has produced. It also makes it inevitable that there's going to be a disaster down the road.
BILL MOYERS: So you're suggesting, saying that CEOs of some of these banks and mortgage firms in order to increase their own personal income, deliberately set out to make bad loans?
WILLIAM K. BLACK: Yes.
BILL MOYERS: How do they get away with it? I mean, what about their own checks and balances in the company? What about their accounting divisions?
WILLIAM K. BLACK: All of those checks and balances report to the CEO, so if the CEO goes bad, all of the checks and balances are easily overcome. And the art form is not simply to defeat those internal controls, but to suborn them, to turn them into your greatest allies. And the bonus programs are exactly how you do that.
BILL MOYERS: If I wanted to go looking for the parties to this, with a good bird dog, where would you send me?
WILLIAM K. BLACK: Well, that's exactly what hasn't happened. We haven't looked, all right? The Bush Administration essentially got rid of regulation, so if nobody was looking, you were able to do this with impunity and that's exactly what happened. Where would you look? You'd look at the specialty lenders. The lenders that did almost all of their work in the sub-prime and what's called Alt-A, liars' loans.
BILL MOYERS: Yeah. Liars' loans--
WILLIAM K. BLACK: Liars' loans.
BILL MOYERS: Why did they call them liars' loans?
WILLIAM K. BLACK: Because they were liars' loans.
BILL MOYERS: And they knew it?
WILLIAM K. BLACK: They knew it. They knew that they were frauds.
WILLIAM K. BLACK: Liars' loans mean that we don't check. You tell us what your income is. You tell us what your job is. You tell us what your assets are, and we agree to believe you. We won't check on any of those things. And by the way, you get a better deal if you inflate your income and your job history and your assets.
BILL MOYERS: You think they really said that to borrowers?
WILLIAM K. BLACK: We know that they said that to borrowers. In fact, they were also called, in the trade, ninja loans.
BILL MOYERS: Ninja?
WILLIAM K. BLACK: Yeah, because no income verification, no job verification, no asset verification.
BILL MOYERS: You're talking about significant American companies.
WILLIAM K. BLACK: Huge! One company produced as many losses as the entire Savings and Loan debacle.
BILL MOYERS: Which company?
WILLIAM K. BLACK: IndyMac specialized in making liars' loans. In 2006 alone, it sold $80 billion dollars of liars' loans to other companies. $80 billion.
BILL MOYERS: And was this happening exclusively in this sub-prime mortgage business?
WILLIAM K. BLACK: No, and that's a big part of the story as well. Even prime loans began to have non-verification. Even Ronald Reagan, you know, said, "Trust, but verify." They just gutted the verification process. We know that will produce enormous fraud, under economic theory, criminology theory, and two thousand years of life experience.
BILL MOYERS: Is it possible that these complex instruments were deliberately created so swindlers could exploit them?
WILLIAM K. BLACK: Oh, absolutely. This stuff, the exotic stuff that you're talking about was created out of things like liars' loans, that were known to be extraordinarily bad. And now it was getting triple-A ratings. Now a triple-A rating is supposed to mean there is zero credit risk. So you take something that not only has significant, it has crushing risk. That's why it's toxic. And you create this fiction that it has zero risk. That itself, of course, is a fraudulent exercise. And again, there was nobody looking, during the Bush years. So finally, only a year ago, we started to have a Congressional investigation of some of these rating agencies, and it's scandalous what came out. What we know now is that the rating agencies never looked at a single loan file. When they finally did look, after the markets had completely collapsed, they found, and I'm quoting Fitch, the smallest of the rating agencies, "the results were disconcerting, in that there was the appearance of fraud in nearly every file we examined."
BILL MOYERS: So if your assumption is correct, your evidence is sound, the bank, the lending company, created a fraud. And the ratings agency that is supposed to test the value of these assets knowingly entered into the fraud. Both parties are committing fraud by intention.
WILLIAM K. BLACK: Right, and the investment banker that — we call it pooling — puts together these bad mortgages, these liars' loans, and creates the toxic waste of these derivatives. All of them do that. And then they sell it to the world and the world just thinks because it has a triple-A rating it must actually be safe. Well, instead, there are 60 and 80 percent losses on these things, because of course they, in reality, are toxic waste.
BILL MOYERS: You're describing what Bernie Madoff did to a limited number of people. But you're saying it's systemic, a systemic Ponzi scheme.
WILLIAM K. BLACK: Oh, Bernie was a piker. He doesn't even get into the front ranks of a Ponzi scheme...
BILL MOYERS: But you're saying our system became a Ponzi scheme.
WILLIAM K. BLACK: Our system...
BILL MOYERS: Our financial system...
WILLIAM K. BLACK: Became a Ponzi scheme. Everybody was buying a pig in the poke. But they were buying a pig in the poke with a pretty pink ribbon, and the pink ribbon said, "Triple-A."
BILL MOYERS: Is there a law against liars' loans?
WILLIAM K. BLACK: Not directly, but there, of course, many laws against fraud, and liars' loans are fraudulent.
BILL MOYERS: Because...
WILLIAM K. BLACK: Because they're not going to be repaid and because they had false representations. They involve deceit, which is the essence of fraud.
BILL MOYERS: Why is it so hard to prosecute? Why hasn't anyone been brought to justice over this?
WILLIAM K. BLACK: Because they didn't even begin to investigate the major lenders until the market had actually collapsed, which is completely contrary to what we did successfully in the Savings and Loan crisis, right? Even while the institutions were reporting they were the most profitable savings and loan in America, we knew they were frauds. And we were moving to close them down. Here, the Justice Department, even though it very appropriately warned, in 2004, that there was an epidemic...
BILL MOYERS: Who did?
WILLIAM K. BLACK: The FBI publicly warned, in September 2004 that there was an epidemic of mortgage fraud, that if it was allowed to continue it would produce a crisis at least as large as the Savings and Loan debacle. And that they were going to make sure that they didn't let that happen. So what goes wrong? After 9/11, the attacks, the Justice Department transfers 500 white-collar specialists in the FBI to national terrorism. Well, we can all understand that. But then, the Bush administration refused to replace the missing 500 agents. So even today, again, as you say, this crisis is 1000 times worse, perhaps, certainly 100 times worse, than the Savings and Loan crisis. There are one-fifth as many FBI agents as worked the Savings and Loan crisis.
BILL MOYERS: You talk about the Bush administration. Of course, there's that famous photograph of some of the regulators in 2003, who come to a press conference with a chainsaw suggesting that they're going to slash, cut business loose from regulation, right?
WILLIAM K. BLACK: Well, they succeeded. And in that picture, by the way, the other — three of the other guys with pruning shears are the...
BILL MOYERS: That's right.
WILLIAM K. BLACK: They're the trade representatives. They're the lobbyists for the bankers. And everybody's grinning. The government's working together with the industry to destroy regulation. Well, we now know what happens when you destroy regulation. You get the biggest financial calamity of anybody under the age of 80.
BILL MOYERS: But I can point you to statements by Larry Summers, who was then Bill Clinton's Secretary of the Treasury, or the other Clinton Secretary of the Treasury, Rubin. I can point you to suspects in both parties, right?
WILLIAM K. BLACK: There were two really big things, under the Clinton administration. One, they got rid of the law that came out of the real-world disasters of the Great Depression. We learned a lot of things in the Great Depression. And one is we had to separate what's called commercial banking from investment banking. That's the Glass-Steagall law. But we thought we were much smarter, supposedly. So we got rid of that law, and that was bipartisan. And the other thing is we passed a law, because there was a very good regulator, Brooksley Born, that everybody should know about and probably doesn't. She tried to do the right thing to regulate one of these exotic derivatives that you're talking about. We call them C.D.F.S. And Summers, Rubin, and Phil Gramm came together to say not only will we block this particular regulation. We will pass a law that says you can't regulate. And it's this type of derivative that is most involved in the AIG scandal. AIG all by itself, cost the same as the entire Savings and Loan debacle.
BILL MOYERS: What did AIG contribute? What did they do wrong?
WILLIAM K. BLACK: They made bad loans. Their type of loan was to sell a guarantee, right? And they charged a lot of fees up front. So, they booked a lot of income. Paid enormous bonuses. The bonuses we're thinking about now, they're much smaller than these bonuses that were also the product of accounting fraud. And they got very, very rich. But, of course, then they had guaranteed this toxic waste. These liars' loans. Well, we've just gone through why those toxic waste, those liars' loans, are going to have enormous losses. And so, you have to pay the guarantee on those enormous losses. And you go bankrupt. Except that you don't in the modern world, because you've come to the United States, and the taxpayers play the fool. Under Secretary Geithner and under Secretary Paulson before him... we took $5 billion dollars, for example, in U.S. taxpayer money. And sent it to a huge Swiss Bank called UBS. At the same time that that bank was defrauding the taxpayers of America. And we were bringing a criminal case against them. We eventually get them to pay a $780 million fine, but wait, we gave them $5 billion. So, the taxpayers of America paid the fine of a Swiss Bank. And why are we bailing out somebody who that is defrauding us?
BILL MOYERS: And why...
WILLIAM K. BLACK: How mad is this?
BILL MOYERS: What is your explanation for why the bankers who created this mess are still calling the shots?
WILLIAM K. BLACK: Well, that, especially after what's just happened at G.M., that's... it's scandalous.
BILL MOYERS: Why are they firing the president of G.M. and not firing the head of all these banks that are involved?
WILLIAM K. BLACK: There are two reasons. One, they're much closer to the bankers. These are people from the banking industry. And they have a lot more sympathy. In fact, they're outright hostile to autoworkers, as you can see. They want to bash all of their contracts. But when they get to banking, they say, â€˜contracts, sacred.' But the other element of your question is we don't want to change the bankers, because if we do, if we put honest people in, who didn't cause the problem, their first job would be to find the scope of the problem. And that would destroy the cover up.
BILL MOYERS: The cover up?
WILLIAM K. BLACK: Sure. The cover up.
BILL MOYERS: That's a serious charge.
WILLIAM K. BLACK: Of course.
BILL MOYERS: Who's covering up?
WILLIAM K. BLACK: Geithner is charging, is covering up. Just like Paulson did before him. Geithner is publicly saying that it's going to take $2 trillion — a trillion is a thousand billion — $2 trillion taxpayer dollars to deal with this problem. But they're allowing all the banks to report that they're not only solvent, but fully capitalized. Both statements can't be true. It can't be that they need $2 trillion, because they have masses losses, and that they're fine.
These are all people who have failed. Paulson failed, Geithner failed. They were all promoted because they failed, not because...
BILL MOYERS: What do you mean?
WILLIAM K. BLACK: Well, Geithner has, was one of our nation's top regulators, during the entire subprime scandal, that I just described. He took absolutely no effective action. He gave no warning. He did nothing in response to the FBI warning that there was an epidemic of fraud. All this pig in the poke stuff happened under him. So, in his phrase about legacy assets. Well he's a failed legacy regulator.
BILL MOYERS: But he denies that he was a regulator. Let me show you some of his testimony before Congress. Take a look at this.
TIMOTHY GEITHNER:I've never been a regulator, for better or worse. And I think you're right to say that we have to be very skeptical that regulation can solve all of these problems. We have parts of our system that are overwhelmed by regulation.
Overwhelmed by regulation! It wasn't the absence of regulation that was the problem, it was despite the presence of regulation you've got huge risks that build up.
WILLIAM K. BLACK: Well, he may be right that he never regulated, but his job was to regulate. That was his mission statement.
BILL MOYERS: As?
WILLIAM K. BLACK: As president of the Federal Reserve Bank of New York, which is responsible for regulating most of the largest bank holding companies in America. And he's completely wrong that we had too much regulation in some of these areas. I mean, he gives no details, obviously. But that's just plain wrong.
BILL MOYERS: How is this happening? I mean why is it happening?
WILLIAM K. BLACK: Until you get the facts, it's harder to blow all this up. And, of course, the entire strategy is to keep people from getting the facts.
BILL MOYERS: What facts?
WILLIAM K. BLACK: The facts about how bad the condition of the banks is. So, as long as I keep the old CEO who caused the problems, is he going to go vigorously around finding the problems? Finding the frauds?
BILL MOYERS: You--
WILLIAM K. BLACK: Taking away people's bonuses?
BILL MOYERS: To hear you say this is unusual because you supported Barack Obama, during the campaign. But you're seeming disillusioned now.
WILLIAM K. BLACK: Well, certainly in the financial sphere, I am. I think, first, the policies are substantively bad. Second, I think they completely lack integrity. Third, they violate the rule of law. This is being done just like Secretary Paulson did it. In violation of the law. We adopted a law after the Savings and Loan crisis, called the Prompt Corrective Action Law. And it requires them to close these institutions. And they're refusing to obey the law.
BILL MOYERS: In other words, they could have closed these banks without nationalizing them?
WILLIAM K. BLACK: Well, you do a receivership. No one -- Ronald Reagan did receiverships. Nobody called it nationalization.
BILL MOYERS: And that's a law?
WILLIAM K. BLACK: That's the law.
BILL MOYERS: So, Paulson could have done this? Geithner could do this?
WILLIAM K. BLACK: Not could. Was mandated--
BILL MOYERS: By the law.
WILLIAM K. BLACK: By the law.
BILL MOYERS: This law, you're talking about.
WILLIAM K. BLACK: Yes.
BILL MOYERS: What the reason they give for not doing it?
WILLIAM K. BLACK: They ignore it. And nobody calls them on it.
BILL MOYERS: Well, where's Congress? Where's the press? Where--
WILLIAM K. BLACK: Well, where's the Pecora investigation?
BILL MOYERS: The what?
WILLIAM K. BLACK: The Pecora investigation. The Great Depression, we said, "Hey, we have to learn the facts. What caused this disaster, so that we can take steps, like pass the Glass-Steagall law, that will prevent future disasters?" Where's our investigation?
What would happen if after a plane crashes, we said, "Oh, we don't want to look in the past. We want to be forward looking. Many people might have been, you know, we don't want to pass blame. No. We have a nonpartisan, skilled inquiry. We spend lots of money on, get really bright people. And we find out, to the best of our ability, what caused every single major plane crash in America. And because of that, aviation has an extraordinarily good safety record. We ought to follow the same policies in the financial sphere. We have to find out what caused the disasters, or we will keep reliving them. And here, we've got a double tragedy. It isn't just that we are failing to learn from the mistakes of the past. We're failing to learn from the successes of the past.
BILL MOYERS: What do you mean?
WILLIAM K. BLACK: In the Savings and Loan debacle, we developed excellent ways for dealing with the frauds, and for dealing with the failed institutions. And for 15 years after the Savings and Loan crisis, didn't matter which party was in power, the U.S. Treasury Secretary would fly over to Tokyo and tell the Japanese, "You ought to do things the way we did in the Savings and Loan crisis, because it worked really well. Instead you're covering up the bank losses, because you know, you say you need confidence. And so, we have to lie to the people to create confidence. And it doesn't work. You will cause your recession to continue and continue." And the Japanese call it the lost decade. That was the result. So, now we get in trouble, and what do we do? We adopt the Japanese approach of lying about the assets. And you know what? It's working just as well as it did in Japan.
BILL MOYERS: Yeah. Are you saying that Timothy Geithner, the Secretary of the Treasury, and others in the administration, with the banks, are engaged in a cover up to keep us from knowing what went wrong?
WILLIAM K. BLACK: Absolutely.
BILL MOYERS: You are.
WILLIAM K. BLACK: Absolutely, because they are scared to death. All right? They're scared to death of a collapse. They're afraid that if they admit the truth, that many of the large banks are insolvent. They think Americans are a bunch of cowards, and that we'll run screaming to the exits. And we won't rely on deposit insurance. And, by the way, you can rely on deposit insurance. And it's foolishness. All right? Now, it may be worse than that. You can impute more cynical motives. But I think they are sincerely just panicked about, "We just can't let the big banks fail." That's wrong.
BILL MOYERS: But what might happen, at this point, if in fact they keep from us the true health of the banks?
WILLIAM K. BLACK: Well, then the banks will, as they did in Japan, either stay enormously weak, or Treasury will be forced to increasingly absurd giveaways of taxpayer money. We've seen how horrific AIG -- and remember, they kept secrets from everyone.
BILL MOYERS: A.I.G. did?
WILLIAM K. BLACK: What we're doing with -- no, Treasury and both administrations. The Bush administration and now the Obama administration kept secret from us what was being done with AIG. AIG was being used secretly to bail out favored banks like UBS and like Goldman Sachs. Secretary Paulson's firm, that he had come from being CEO. It got the largest amount of money. $12.9 billion. And they didn't want us to know that. And it was only Congressional pressure, and not Congressional pressure, by the way, on Geithner, but Congressional pressure on AIG.
Where Congress said, "We will not give you a single penny more unless we know who received the money." And, you know, when he was Treasury Secretary, Paulson created a recommendation group to tell Treasury what they ought to do with AIG. And he put Goldman Sachs on it.
BILL MOYERS: Even though Goldman Sachs had a big vested stake.
WILLIAM K. BLACK: Massive stake. And even though he had just been CEO of Goldman Sachs before becoming Treasury Secretary. Now, in most stages in American history, that would be a scandal of such proportions that he wouldn't be allowed in civilized society.
BILL MOYERS: Yeah, like a conflict of interest, it seems.
WILLIAM K. BLACK: Massive conflict of interests.
BILL MOYERS: So, how did he get away with it?
WILLIAM K. BLACK: I don't know whether we've lost our capability of outrage. Or whether the cover up has been so successful that people just don't have the facts to react to it.
BILL MOYERS: Who's going to get the facts?
WILLIAM K. BLACK: We need some chairmen or chairwomen--
BILL MOYERS: In Congress.
WILLIAM K. BLACK: --in Congress, to hold the necessary hearings. And we can blast this out. But if you leave the failed CEOs in place, it isn't just that they're terrible business people, though they are. It isn't just that they lack integrity, though they do. Because they were engaged in these frauds. But they're not going to disclose the truth about the assets.
BILL MOYERS: And we have to know that, in order to know what?
WILLIAM K. BLACK: To know everything. To know who committed the frauds. Whose bonuses we should recover. How much the assets are worth. How much they should be sold for. Is the bank insolvent, such that we should resolve it in this way? It's the predicate, right? You need to know the facts to make intelligent decisions. And they're deliberately leaving in place the people that caused the problem, because they don't want the facts. And this is not new. The Reagan Administration's central priority, at all times, during the Savings and Loan crisis, was covering up the losses.
BILL MOYERS: So, you're saying that people in power, political power, and financial power, act in concert when their own behinds are in the ringer, right?
WILLIAM K. BLACK: That's right. And it's particularly a crisis that brings this out, because then the class of the banker says, "You've got to keep the information away from the public or everything will collapse. If they understand how bad it is, they'll run for the exits."
BILL MOYERS: Yeah, and this week in New York, at this conference, you described this as more than a financial crisis. You called it a moral crisis.
WILLIAM K. BLACK: Yes.
BILL MOYERS: Why?
WILLIAM K. BLACK: Because it is a fundamental lack of integrity. But also because, if you look back at crises, an economist who is also a presidential appointee, as a regulator in the Savings and Loan industry, right here in New York, Larry White, wrote a book about the Savings and Loan crisis. And he said, you know, one of the most interesting questions is why so few people engaged in fraud? Because objectively, you could have gotten away with it. But only about ten percent of the CEOs, engaged in fraud. So, 90 percent of them were restrained by ethics and integrity. So, far more than law or by F.B.I. agents, it's our integrity that often prevents the greatest abuses. And what we had in this crisis, instead of the Savings and Loan, is the most elite institutions in America engaging or facilitating fraud.
BILL MOYERS: This wound that you say has been inflicted on American life. The loss of worker's income. And security and pensions and future happened, because of the misconduct of a relatively few, very well-heeled people, in very well-decorated corporate suites, right?
WILLIAM K. BLACK: Right.
BILL MOYERS: It was relatively a handful of people.
WILLIAM K. BLACK: And their ideologies, which swept away regulation. So, in the example, regulation means that cheaters don't prosper. So, instead of being bad for capitalism, it's what saves capitalism. "Honest purveyors prosper" is what we want. And you need regulation and law enforcement to be able to do this. The tragedy of this crisis is it didn't need to happen at all.
BILL MOYERS: When you wake in the middle of the night, thinking about your work, what do you make of that? What do you tell yourself?
WILLIAM K. BLACK: There's a saying that we took great comfort in. It's actually by the Dutch, who were fighting this impossible war for independence against what was then the most powerful nation in the world, Spain. And their motto was, "It is not necessary to hope in order to persevere."
Now, going forward, get rid of the people that have caused the problems. That's a pretty straightforward thing, as well. Why would we keep CEOs and CFOs and other senior officers, that caused the problems? That's facially nuts. That's our current system.
So stop that current system. We're hiding the losses, instead of trying to find out the real losses. Stop that, because you need good information to make good decisions, right? Follow what works instead of what's failed. Start appointing people who have records of success, instead of records of failure. That would be another nice place to start. There are lots of things we can do. Even today, as late as it is. Even though they've had a terrible start to the administration. They could change, and they could change within weeks. And by the way, the folks who are the better regulators, they paid their taxes. So, you can get them through the vetting process a lot quicker.
BILL MOYERS: William Black, thank you very much for being with me on the Journal.
According to Mayan, Hopi, Pueblo and other prophecies, one cycle of history is due to come to an end in December of 2012 – and another cycle begin. Some of you may already be aware of the statements that on Valentine's Day, February 14, 2009, we apparently saw the sun set on the Age of Pisces and dawn on the Age of Aquarius. Others will have heard that, on that same day, the Kali Yuga or Age of Darkness reportedly ended and the Sat Yuga or Age of Truth began. Some Hindus call the Sat Yuga the "Golden Age."
The scenario I am following, whether you look at it from the Mayan perspective or from that of several other groups watching the same subject, holds that, in the year 2012, the present cycle of duality or Third-Dimensional (3D) reality will end for the greatest number of Earth residents and, together with the Planet itself, we will migrate back to the Fifth Dimension (5D), heading in the direction whence we originally came. This event has come to be known generally, in the circles I travel in, as the "Ascension" and the period that it begins as the "Golden Age" (proper).
Some people will not come along. They are the mass murderers among us, the torturers, assassins, war criminals, financial traitors, and so on, who will choose not to go forward into the Light. Apparently, they will remain in 3D reality. It is, and was, their choice. They will join us in the next cycle.
If one looks from today forward, then you could say I am watching a number of events, generally known as Accountability, NESARA, First Contact, and Ascension. There will be a period of perhaps two to three years between First Contact and Ascension.
"Accountability" refers to a series of events that will see the fall of a group that has held power on the Earth up till this time. This group has concentrated wealth in its own hands and has been responsible for a long list of crimes which most of us remain totally unaware of. These crimes include 9/11, the wars in Afghanistan and Iraq, the London bombings, the Oklahoma City bombing, HAARP-induced earthquakes and hurricanes, assassinations, global regime overthrows, torture, pandemics, poisonous chemtrails, theft of trillions, and many other acts of mass murder, crimes against humanity, and financial treason. Society has been manipulated by this neoconservative faction and their agents in U.S. Northern Command/NORAD, Naval Intelligence, Blackwater, Whackenhut, and the alphabet agencies (NSA, CIA, MJ12, FBI, MI6, MOSSAD). They know themselves as the "New World Order" (NWO), the "Illuminati," the military-industrial complex, the secret state, etc. Very soon the full story of what they foisted on us will be known.
You can actually go outside today, drive to the nearest airport, and say "There is no war on terror and there never was," and, provided you don't mind being thrown in jail, you'd be accurate. "Accountability" means that all of this is now about to come to an end. You can see it around you. One of President Obama's first acts was to issue Executive Orders that restored constitutional freedoms.
Some members of Congress are calling for the prosecution of the NWO's agents, from Bush and Cheney on down. Germany and the U.N. Special Rapporteur on Torture want American officials to stand trial for sanctioning and carrying out torture. You can conceive of the whole NWO as a political, financial, military, educational, and media structure that is utterly collapsing. Nothing of it is destined to remain. Unfortunately we must watch what we think of as the pillars of our society collapse with them.
At the same time, another structure is rising. Because these two events are happening simultaneously, some have difficulty distinguishing between them. The second event is the building of what some people call a "Wisdom Economy" (see Zeitgeist Addendum). Good and honest people all over the world are hard at work designing an economy that will work totally differently from the way the present one does. The present one does in fact not work and is too corrupt to ever be made to work.
The term that has come to be a code word for the Wisdom Economy is "NESARA." NESARA stands for the "National Economic Security and Reformation Act." For years there has been a gag rule against discussing it. Some Washington journalists are trying to get around the restraints by referring to NESARA obliquely as the "Reformation Act." NESARA was originally an act of the American Congress, signed into law by Bill Clinton in 2000, due to be announced at 10:00 a.m. on Sept. 11, 2001. It was never announced because the tragic events of 9/11, which began around an hour earlier on that day, overwhelmed it (as they were designed to do). Since then, by using fear tactics like declaring a "war on terror" where no "terror" had previously existed, the NWO cabal consolidated its power and tried to see that NESARA would never get announced.
NESARA has come to be a generic term for what is now a worldwide plan to end poverty on this planet. It will also end borders. It will mandate peace on Earth. It will see that all those accountable for the crimes I listed above are removed from power, prosecuted, and sent to jail. I am certain, from months of researching this material, that we could not have done these things that I've just described on our own. The people of Earth are not awake or powerful enough to have brought down the NWO cabal by themselves. Left to our own devices, our future would have seen worldwide impoverishment, enslavement, and depopulation (from 6.3 billion to a more manageable 500 million). The latter would have been brought about by poverty, pandemics, chemtrails, GM-induced famines, artificial weather events, imprisonment in existing FEMA camps, and world wars.
For years and years, we have been told that we were on our own, that we were alone in the universe. But the truth is that we are not alone and we did not manage the fall of the NWO on our own. We had help. Above us, in the skies, cloaked from our view and sometimes existing in higher dimensions, is a fleet of extraterrestrials of human origin, from places like the Pleiades, Sirius, Lyra, Vega, Arcturus, Andromeda and many other regions of space. They are our family – our ancestors and, in some cases, our future. These extraterrestrial but human visitors have come to assist us with the 2012 Ascension.
Some of them have taken birth among us as starseeds. Some have walked-in to bodies after birth. Some are able to change shape and walk among us unnoticed. They come as friends. They follow the commands of the same Heaven and the same God as we do. They are forces of love and light. We have nothing to fear from them and everything to gain from their willing assistance. We could not have come as far as we have without their help. The people who defeated the NWO are these human space friends along with a large number of terrestrials who are variously known as their "Earth Allies" or "White Knights." It is they who will bring in NESARA when the time is right. And it is they who will reveal themselves to us when the time for "First Contact" arrives.
We've actually had many contacts with them in the past; in fact they are responsible for seeding this planet with the human species in the first place - their own species. We are their progeny. What we call "First Contact" is the first time that the whole planet will be aware of their presence. Even before that time, but after NESARA is announced, they will begin giving us technologies that will allow us to end our dependence on oil, travel far, communicate quickly, and cure most diseases among us. They will give us devices that will allow us to see to all our food, clothing and other needs without having to produce them in factories.
Eventually, there will be no such thing as poverty or disease on Planet Earth. There will be no such thing as religions that fight with one another. There will be no such thing as wars. Our space brothers and sisters will prepare us for our 2012 Ascension. Apparently, what we will see when they arrive defies imagination. Their simple presence in the sky will have such an uplifting effect on us that we will not be the same from that moment on.
The governments of the world have ridiculed the idea that there are extraterrestrial craft in our skies. But one by one: France, Great Britain, Denmark, Brazil, and Canada have opened their files and shown that they have known for decades about the ET presence. In fact, the U.S. military has benefited for years from technology transfers (anti-gravity technology, the computer chip, fibreoptics, Teflon, the "Looking Glass" [google], stealth technology). Everything else I could say on the matter would be a simple expansion on these points.
If you wish to know more about 2012 and the Mayan Calendar, look for any videos by Ian Xel Lungold, Drunvalo Melchizedek, Barbara Hand Clow, or Andi Mac and Jag Steward. If you wish to know about the ET presence, go to my website, "First Contact," angelfire.com/space2/light11/fc/fc-index1.html. If you want the best intelligence available on day-to-day matters, go to Galactic Round Table-News, at groups.yahoo.com/group/GRT-NEWS. If you want to view a range of videos by terrestrials on these topics, go to Project Camelot or Conscious Media Network. Youtube and Google Video are also full of videos on these topics, including UFOs: The Greatest Story Ever Denied.
Because one structure is falling while a second emerges, our world looks somewhat chaotic at the moment. But, if these reports are to be believed, in fact we are headed for a Golden Age in which our future is assured. The more we step out and read the signs of the times, recognizing what is happening around us, the quicker will Terra Nova arise.
All of this fretting, whining, buying licenses and permits, asking for permission and pleading with government is the fault of none other than we the people, but along the way, we've had a lot of help in that respect from Lawyers, the GOA, the NRA, AARP, ETC., and yes, our bought and paid for congressional politicians. If we had lived our lives as free sovereigns as the framers had idealistically hoped, there would be little need for all the organizations that are in the business of fighting on our behalf by hacking at the branches rather than striking the root. Ben Franklin was doubtful that the founder's experiment with self government would function successfully for very long, and as it turns out, he was right. The sad fact is that Americans epitomize the well known Johan von Goeth quotation that none are so hopelessly enslaved as those who falsely believe they are free.
We now "voluntarily" pay more than half of our working wages in taxes for services that we often do not want, nor did we request. We pay for licenses to get married, and we are taxed for our food, our clothing, and our shelter. We fight the bureaucracy for the natural right to home-school our children, and eventually our children are taxed for the coffin and flowers purchased to bury their parents, and it goes on and on.
There's not a day goes by that I don't receive an email from some group warning me for a variety of reasons to call my congressman immediately, or to receive a plea for an out of cycle donation from another political action committee that it must receive from me in order to fight off another gun control bill. That is what Henry David Thoreau meant by hacking at the branches.
Regardless of what anyone tries to make of the few opening words of the 2nd amendment, the constitution clearly and most emphatically says---- The right of the people to keep and bear arms shall not be infringed. There is nothing in that simple clause that needs any interpretation by lawyers in black robes. To keep arms simply means to own and store any and all tools of personal defense, which may be at hand. According to the supreme law of our Constitutional Republic, we may possess those tools, put them in our closets, in our glove box or in our pockets--- Stash them in our purses, or hold them in our hands. To bear arms is to conceal or openly carry them and walk around anywhere we wish. There are no restrictions in the Bill of Rights on who may keep and bear arms. One only needs to be, a people. The right to keep and bear arms is a fundamental, God given, natural right, which was also written into the Preamble to the constitution. It is an all inclusive reference to the natural, God given rights of life, liberty and pursuit of happiness. Those fundamental, natural rights and freedoms include, and project a heavy burden of personal responsibility to cause no harm to another person's life or property, or to interfere with another's fundamental rights except in self defense or in defense of the Republic. The second amendment was included in the Bill of Rights in order to emphasize what was clearly understood at the time to be a fundamental, natural right to protect one's life and liberties, and especially from the abuses of a tyrannical, out of control government which the founders knew was sure to come. If or when the people decide the constitution needs amending, the rules for making such changes are spelled out in Article five. Any so-called Law, Act, Ordinance or Statute, which is determined to be contrary to the provisions of the Constitution are null and void, retroactive to the time it was signed into law, and that includes an abundance of so-called Gun Control Laws. Only a Constitutional Amendment can change the clear intent of the supreme law of the land.
"An act of the legislature repugnant to the Constitution is void" — Marbury v. Madison, Feb 1803.
Time and space do not permit listing all the laws, acts and statutes, which are contrary to the Constitution, but in the interest of brevity and example, the ones which have had the most devastating effect on the prosperity of our Constitutional Republic are the Federal Reserve Act and the Legal Tender Act. The reason these were passed as Acts is because the schemers knew darn well they could never wrest control of the Republic's money by way of a Constitutional amendment. Therefore, the Federal Reserve Act and the Legal Tender Act were null and void retroactive to 1913 because each Act is obviously repugnant to the Constitution.
Applying to any agent of for a license to pursue any activity which is already constitutionally lawful, and a natural right is to suggest that the government agent is sovereign over you. The activities and actions of the NRA, GOA, AARP, your congressional member, and even us, (we the people) have long ago validated and perpetuated the false assumption that Governments at every level are sovereign over the people. The Founder's clear intentions were to leave the people in charge of our own lives and that of our government---and in the ranking of sovereignty we the people are subject only to God----The federal government is dead last.
We've made a mess of things in the past 222 years of our Republic's independent history, and we don't have much time left to correct our mistakes. All of us must start now by accepting the responsibility that comes with sovereignty and freedom. We must cease the nonsense of asking our public servants for their permission to do anything which we the people have not had an active hand in approving. Until development of the Internet, we the people were totally dependent upon the controlled print, radio, and television media for all information critical to our interests and cultural values. The most damage was done to our lives and prosperity around the year 1913 when getting amendments, Laws and Acts through Congress were a breeze. In 1913, not many homes in rural America had electricity or even a battery operated radio. But today, the worm has turned because the Internet is rapidly replacing the so-called, mainstream media. Newspapers are rapidly going bankrupt and television is on the ropes. Of course, the media blame the troublesome Internet for their loss of subscribers rather than their own deficient and twisted reporting. The Internet is fast, it's convenient, and basically it's free, but the biggest advantage the Net has, by far is that it is, up to now, uncontrollable. The websites which attempt to twist or censor freedom of speech or offend one's personal values are quickley abandoned by their readers who jump to other websites, which they consider more appealing and trustworthy--- No bankruptcy filings or bailouts required, and the enemies of personal freedom are forever doomed to eventual failure.
Because of the Internet, World citizens are communicating with one another today as never before in the history of Planet Earth------ consequently; Liars, thieves, propagandists, cheaters, tyrants and scammers are being exposed everyday, and patriotic bounty hunters of many nations are hot on their tails. Let us remain focused and continue to communicate with others around the World, because we are all in this leaking boat together.
With what remains of the Constitutional Republic of these united states, let us begin to live our lives as the sovereigns we are supposed to be, not as subjects. This same redirection applies to people who happen to be employed as public servants, but who have also fallen into the misguided quagmire of obediently pleading to governments for licensed permission to engage in the natural right to earn a living, or to own a domesticated family pet, or to eat apricot kernels, to sell or drink raw milk or to keep and bear arms. We will never break free of this madness until we stop meekly asking government for permission to do a darned thing. Dr. Martin Luther King did not engage in what the media termed, civil disobedience. He simply stopped asking for permission. When we learn this valuable lesson and develop some personal backbone, then and only then will sovereign people become empowered to set rules they wish to follow in order to insure an orderly and prosperous society. Only then will we secure the blessings of liberty for ourselves and our posterity.
If you decide to accept this challenge, you will likely be warned by your friends that you could be arrested and go to jail for your impudence and disobedience, and they could be correct. But if what you did is protected by the unalienable, natural right to life, liberty and the pursuit of your personal happiness, you won't stay long in jail, and the arresting officer and the jurisdiction he or she represents could face serious financial jeopardy. Many of Martin Luther King's frontline supporters went to jail many times, and some even lost their lives. Dr. King did both. The time for writing letters and phoning faceless congressional clerks is over. Don't leave this critical job for your children and your grand children. It's long past time for us to take the gloves off and fight in defense of our children's freedom.
I leave you now with this final thought--- The Constitution for the United States would have never been ratified if the Framers had not halted the ratification process long enough to include the first ten amendments, which we know as the Bill of Rights. Each and everyone of those ten amendments are based on the natural, God given, fundamental rights that sets us apart as Americans. By far, the most important of those ten amendments is the one that is often been called, The Forgotten Amendment, and that is the one, all encompassing, Ninth Amendment. To be historically precise it reads simply; The enumeration in the Constitution, of certain rights, shall not be construed to deny or disparage others retained by the people.
In the language of today the Framers may well have written the Ninth Amendment this way: The unalienable rights, which are listed herein are not all inclusive, and in no way does this enumeration place a limit on any and all all other reserved rights that further supports the People's natural entitlements to life, liberty and the pursuit of happiness and property.
We the people have no Constitutional rights. We have only unalienable, God given, rights, and that's all we will ever need. Everyone has the natural right to be a card carrying atheist, but when it comes to claiming these rights in one's personal defense it may be prudent to pause and give thanks to the Almighty Giver. No matter how you see it spelled---inalienable or unalienable, it simply means permanent, irrespective of what may someday happen to the Constitution.
Civil Rights are the creation of government, and what the government gives, the government can take away, but unalienable rights are a totally different matter. Everything I do from day to day is to live by the golden rule while in the pursuit of life, liberty, liberty and happiness. Governments have absolutely no power, authority or jurisdiction in the matter.
"People who fight may lose. People who don't fight have already lost." Bertolt Brecht
By Anthony Lukashuk, Vancouver, British Columbia, Canada, February 12, 2009
Dear Mr. President (Mr. Obama),
I felt compelled to write you today to give you an important message. It would be easy for me to think that I am wasting my time and that you will never see these words, but my intuition is urging me to write this, and therefore I know it serves a purpose...
I want you to know that I, along with a host of others, choose to believe in you, Mr. Obama. We support you, because we know intuitively that you represent the potential for change.
Everything starts with "intention" and if you have the willingness to do so, you are in a position to play a huge role in turning things around. For many years (generations, in fact), America (along with many other countries) has been living under a dark shadow that has been caused by the greed of the world's most powerful people and every time a rare individual came along that truly desired to change the status quo, something bad happened to them. I believe that John F. Kennedy was such a man. He had integrity, as did Martin Luther King. They were both good examples of people who died while standing up for what they believed in and I believe that they were both men of integrity who used their intuition to make decisions, and undoubtedly refused the advice of advisors on many occasions. Be vigilant, Mr. President, watch your back and do not trust the advice of others over the advice of your own inner voice (your intuition), for your intuition is where the answers lay. Remember that these people only have practice at running the country in the "old world way" and that way has failed absolutely.
In a way, we are already starting fresh whether we like it or not and so what the world needs now, more than anything else, is simply Governance with integrity. The same kind of integrity that gave rise to the "Declaration of Independence" in America and the implementation of "rights and freedoms for all" that so many fought and died for in countries all over the world.
Don't be afraid to think outside the box, Mr. President. While it is true that there is a deepening recession taking place, something much more important is going on in the background. There is a HOUSE CLEANING going on and IT IS NECESSARY! When it is over, there will be nothing left hiding in the dark corners...nothing left hiding in the nooks and crannies. No more skulking about in the corridors of the White House and the Pentagon late at night while the country sleeps. The shadows and darkness (back rooms and secret deals, pay-offs, extortion, bribery and corruption), where people with ill intentions have always been able to hide, are disappearing quickly now. These people are all starting to be routed out, one by one and this will continue until there are none left.
Remember that you can put a little bit of darkness in a room full of light, and it has no effect, but if you light a single candle in even the darkest place, it is there for all to see!
Your task is monumental because you surely have inherited a mess like no other incoming President before you. Most assuredly, you are reluctant to make decisions that are going to make things worse in the short term; and you cringe at the thought of letting giants fall because you fear the possible economic consequences. I don't blame you. We must all accept the fact that it will happen, if it must, and all the money that the Federal Reserve could ever print will not change that fact. It will only dig the American People (and indeed the world) deeper and deeper, and the recovery will take longer and longer, and soon the debt with be added onto yet another generation.
Congressman Ron Paul was/is right about that. There is a man that you should consider having close to you! He has integrity, and he is not afraid to tell his truth. He can stand on his own two feet; and he is your ally. I know this though, if you accept the "truth" and intuit what really needs to be done, you then need to come forward (despite shrieks of disapproval from those who are only concerned about their own interests), and admit to the American people and to the world, that we have no choice but to let this globalized house of cards (un-backed fiat financial systems/debt based economies/corrupt financial markets and corporations) come crashing down. It can no longer be sustained (as current events are proving beyond a shadow of a doubt), and so we are now faced with the grim reality that wholesale change is needed and that it will no doubt have to get worse before it gets better.
You are not really letting the giants fall after all. They are doing that all on their own. For if they cannot stand on their own two feet without help from those "little people" who have no means to help them, what good are they then to the people or to the economy? They are simply bottomless pits, and every time they will come back crying, "I need more money, I need more help!" Indeed, this is the worst thing to do, for if a man knows that he can always come back with his hand held out (and that the government will always look after him when he gets his business in trouble), what motivation would he have to run his business responsibly, so that it can succeed on its own merit?
Now there is talk of regulating this and taking over that. Now there are many screaming that we need more and more government intervention and interference in matters that should/can take care of themselves in the open market and in the light of day. We need more regulation! More government oversight! Where does the madness stop?
All the government needs to do is simply get out of its own way and Govern with integrity. It simply needs to be accountable, just like the rest of us do. It needs to set an example for the rest of society because people always follow the example set by those in leadership. In spite of the lack of leadership shown in recent decades, the people now have renewed hope once again. Hope that things will be different this time. Mr. President, the change in the way government "governs it own conduct" will gain momentum with your help.
In Congress, Dr. Ron Paul has been like a "lone voice in the wilderness" because until now he has been one of the few men willing to risk coming forward and admitting the truth, and for that he deserves our thanks. But there are many others in Congress and in governments all around the world (mine included), I am sure, sitting on the fence, Sir, and they all WANT to come forward as well because they know the truth just like the rest of us do. They don't like the way things are any more than the rest of us do. They are simply afraid to be the first ones to step forward into the light; but once you set the right example for them to follow, they will be emboldened and the groundswell for change in the way the government conducts itself will begin.
When this happens, no one will be able to stop it. Things will truly begin to change, and then we can all get on with the important business of rebuilding in earnest...and in integrity. We ALL know this to be true because we are shifting the way that we think. We are, through the awakening of our intuition and re-connection with our higher selves, coming to realize that we are all one and part of a global family...indeed a global consciousness. We are beginning to understand that we are all connected and with that knowledge in hand, we will move forward together and make this world once again into what it has not been for a very long time..."A PLACE OF LIGHT!"
Please do your part to help make change.... Let me say that whether you read this because you felt compelled to or simply read it out of curiosity does not matter. Please don't make the mistake of thinking that you (each and every one of you) can't make a difference. Every idea that has ever been acted upon started with one person's thought/idea...and if you got to the end of this letter and you agreed with the intention of the message and share the same desire for change...then you are already making a difference and letting your voice be heard on a spiritual level. I implore you to pass this on to others (it doesn't matter what country they are in or what nationality they are because this is a global issue. We all deserve the opportunity to have our voices heard and so here is your opportunity. Simply send a 5 word e-mail to the President of the United States at email@example.com and simply say, "I DEMAND GOVERNANCE WITH INTEGRITY!". For those who think that the President will never see the emails, I would point out that it is not so much the e-mail that is important as much as it is the intention that you display in sending it. That is truly powerful. What have you got to lose? In such times, no one can afford to sit on the sidelines because everything is at stake...
Anthony Lukashuk is a Canadian Citizen and an amateur op-ed writer who has had articles published on alternative news sites like Fourwinds10.com and most recently on OpEdnews.com. His focus is affirmative action and his articles are geared towards encouraging others to be proactive and to add their voices to the scores of others who are demanding integrity in government.
"OUTLAW THE SHADOW BANKING SYSTEM!" GUESS WHO SAID IT?
By Matthias Chang. March 7, 2009
When I read the remarks of President Obama and Prime Minister Gordon Brown after their meeting at the Oval Office on March 3, 2009 and the speech of the latter to the Joint Session of Congress on March 4, 2009, I realized that a growing antagonism has emerged between certain factions of the ruling elites in the City of London and in Washington DC.
The first warning of the acute differences was sounded by President Obama himself and it was most surprising that the mass media paid hardly attention to it. In his weekly address on February 28, 2009, President Obama said: "I realize that passing this budget won't be easy; because it represents real and dramatic change, it also represents a threat to the status quo in Washington. I know that the insurance industry won't like the idea that they'll have to bid competitively to continue offering Medicare coverage, but that's how we'll help preserve and protect Medicare and lower health care costs for American families. I know that banks and big student lenders won't like the idea that we're ending their huge taxpayer subsidies, but that's how we'll save taxpayers nearly $50 billion and make college more affordable. I know that oil and gas companies won't like us ending nearly $30 billion in tax breaks, but that's how we'll help fund a renewable energy economy that will create new jobs and new industries. In other words, I know these steps won't sit well with the special interests and lobbyists who are invested in the old way of doing business, and I know they're gearing up for a fight as we speak. My message to them is this: 'So am I.'"
Read those words again. It is clear something is definitely amiss within the ruling elites; and President Obama has thrown the gauntlet to his adversaries. The skeptics may say that we should not read too much into this above quoted paragraph, as it could be mere spin to rally the troops in times of crisis. Time will tell.
I take the view that it is inevitable that the members of the ruling elites would go for each other's throats because those who were given the charge to ensure that the money-machine keeps running have screwed up big time. Someone must answer for the fiasco.
The Blame Game
It would be naïve to assume that the status quo would remain, when the Global Trillion Dollar Casino is for all intents and purposes broken down beyond repair. Confirmation that the blame game has started in earnest can be found in the aforesaid remarks of President Obama and Prime Minister Gordon Brown on March 3, 2009 given after their meeting at the Oval Office and Brown's speech to Congress on March 4, 2009.
Let us come back to the issue of the money-lenders. For some strange reason, many people are put off by the term "money-lenders" but are ever so comfortable with bankers. But are not bankers, money-lenders? In fact I would say that money-lenders are more honourable than your high street bankers, as they can only rob you in the millions. The global bankers, they rape and plunder in the trillions!
Is it any wonder that Gordon Brown and President Obama, the political representatives of the Power Elites, have decided that it is about time that these financial harlots are to be brought under control before they wreck the entire global power structure? Let us have no illusions about Obama and Gordon Brown. They are going after these financial harlots not because they want to protect us from these criminals, but because for too long the political faction had to play second fiddle to the financial faction in the overall scheme of global one world government. Until lately, money power triumphed over political power. However, when the entire financial system broke into pieces, it was time to settle scores!
Read for yourself: Prime Minister Gordon Brown's remarks at the White House, March 3, 2009
"Well, there's got to be deep regulatory change. We've just been talking, Barack and I, about the need for proper supervision of shadow banking systems, of areas where there was bank practices that were unacceptable, where remuneration policies got out of hand and weren't based on long-term success, but on short-term deals. And these are the changes that we've already announced that we are going to make.
"We've had a global banking failure, and it's happened in every part of the world. It's almost like a power cut that went right across the financial system. And we have got to rebuild that financial system. We've got to isolate the bad assets.
"You don't want shadow banking systems. You don't want regulatory tax havens. So we've got to act as a world together to deal with that. And that's one of the things we'll be talking about in April in London."
President Obama's response at the White House, March 3, 2009
"Now, having said that, the banking system has been dealt a heavy blow. It has to do with many of the things that Prime Minister Brown alluded to: lax regulation, massive over-leverage, huge systemic risks taken by unregulated institutions, as well as regulated institutions. And so there are a lot of losses that are working their way through the system. And it's not surprising that the market is hurting as a consequence. In fact, I think what we're seeing is that as people absorb the depths of the problem that existed in the banking system, as well as the international ramifications of it, that there's going to be a natural reaction. We are cleaning up that mess. It's going to be sort of full of fits and starts in terms of getting the mess cleaned up, but it's going to get cleaned up."
Prime Minister Gordon Brown's Speech to Congress, March 4, 2009
"And we need to understand what went wrong in this crisis, that the very financial instruments that were designed to diversify risk across the banking system instead spread contagion across the globe. And today's financial institutions are so interwoven that a bad bank anywhere is a threat to good banks everywhere.
"And you are also restructuring your banks. So are we. But how much safer would everybody's savings be if the whole world finally came together to outlaw shadow banking systems and offshore tax havens?"
Blink and read those words again. You have just read that Prime Minister Gordon Brown has made the call to "outlaw the shadow banking system and offshore tax havens!" Wow!
Even if you are a skeptic and hold the view that the quotes are mere spin to delude the people, you cannot deny that Prime Minister Brown has let the genie out of the bottle! Whether there are any follow through actions by President Obama and Prime Minister Brown, the global citizens must take action independently, if they want to save their children, and their children's children from decades of impoverishment and extreme hardship.
The most powerful leader of the Western world and his side-kick has openly and unreservedly acknowledged that we are having a global financial melt-down. And that the cause for this catastrophe is the shadow banking system! There is now an open warfare between the political factions and the financial factions of the global power elites. This will be ugly. And as President Obama warned, "they are gearing for a fight…" He has also responded to the challenge: "So am I."
Given the above scenario, we must first take out the financial elites, and thereafter the political faction, failing which we will all plunge into the black hole of financial Armageddon!
In the deepest recesses of our hearts, we have always known that this time would come. World religions and prophecies throughout the Ages have all talked about these "end times." What Humanity is experiencing now has been referred to time and again in various ancient scriptures as the "time of screaming and the gnashing of teeth." Despite that ominous description, ALL of us volunteered to be here during this purging process.
The question is, why would we subject ourselves to such pain and suffering? Why would we agree to be in physical embodiment during the most challenging time in the evolution of this planet? Well, the answer is clear. We volunteered to be on Earth at this time because we were shown the bigger picture.
In that revelation, we saw the end result of our endeavors in this lifetime. We saw what life will be like on this planet after the obsolete behavior patterns of Humanity's fallen consciousness are purged and all of our human miscreations are transmuted back into Light. With that sacred knowledge, we knew through every fiber of our Beings that no matter what we had to endure in this process, it was going to be worth every bit of it.
We were shown the New Earth in all of her splendor. We witnessed Humanity living with the full knowledge of the Oneness of all Life. On this New Earth, every soul recognizes and reveres the Divinity within every other soul and in every particle of Life. People work together to find viable solutions that reflect the highest good for all concerned in every situation. Win-win experiences are achieved in every line of endeavor. The New Earth transcends all of the maladies now existing on this planet. Exquisite joy, love, abundance, health, happiness, peace, wisdom, enlightenment, and every other aspect of our Father-Mother God are the order of the day on the New Earth.
This is not, however, the only reason we made the sacrifice to embody on Earth during this unprecedented moment. Through our I AM Presence, we were well aware of the Universal Laws governing the evolution of the Sons and Daughters of God. We knew that in order for something to manifest in the physical plane, it must be invoked or asked for through the free will choice of someone existing in the physical plane.
With this inner knowing, we clearly understood that in order for us to transform the Earth and all her Life into the infinite perfection of the New Earth, we must be abiding in the physical plane. This is what is meant by the words, "God needs a body."
No matter how much our Father-Mother God and the Company of Heaven want to help us lift out of the horrific situations we have created, they will not interfere with our free will. But once we lift our heads above the mud puddle of our human miscreations and ask for Divine Intervention, the floodgates of Heaven open in response to our heartfelt pleas.
In order for the Sons and Daughters of God to transmute the human miscreations we have deliberately or inadvertently created during our Earthly sojourns, we must invoke the Light of God and project that Light through the Divinity in our hearts into whatever it is we are striving to transmute.
Our Father-Mother God revealed to us the miracles we would be able to accomplish by embodying on Earth and joining forces with other Lightworkers. We were shown that the unified efforts of embodied Lightworkers and the Company of Heaven have the ability to move Heaven and Earth. Together we can greatly accelerate the transmutation of the surfacing negativity. With this clarity, we understood without reservation that we are capable of assisting Humanity and all Life on this planet through the tumultuous end times in a matter of months, not years.
With this knowing, each of us willingly responded to the heart call of our I AM Presence and selflessly volunteered to embody on Earth. The Divine Intent of our mission is to assist in quickly transmuting Humanity's miscreations and to invoke the Light of God in order to expand the patterns of perfection for the New Earth in the physical plane.
We are One with all Life. This means that every particle of Life on Earth is interdependent, interrelated, and interconnected. What affects one part of Life affects all Life. "As I AM lifted up, ALL Life is lifted up with me." The fact that we are One allows each of us to serve as a surrogate on behalf of every man, woman, and child on this planet. We truly are our brother and sister's keepers.
Whenever there is such a monumental demonstration of selfless Divine Love by the Sons and Daughters of God, our God Parents balance our efforts with additional grants of Light. In this case, a Cosmic Dispensation was granted to the Company of Heaven giving permission for the Beings of Light in the Realms of Illumined Truth to come through the veil to meet us halfway. As a result of this gift of Divine Grace, we are now receiving more assistance from On High than has ever been granted to the Children of God in the whole of Creation.
We are in the midst of the most intensified cleansing Humanity has ever experienced. This event is catapulting us forward in the Light, and people everywhere are beginning to awaken. Their I AM Presence is taking dominion of their thoughts, words, actions, and feelings. People, en masse, are starting to remember who they are and why they are here.
When our awakening occurs, we remember our purpose and reason for being. Then our I AM Presence magnetizes to us information and whatever else we need to help us fulfill our part of the unfolding Divine Plan. We listen to the inner promptings of our heart, and we realize that this is our moment. We understand that this moment is the culmination of everything we have been preparing for, everything we agreed to accomplish for ourselves and Humanity prior to this embodiment, everything we agreed to do to assist this blessed planet and ALL her Life into the patterns of perfection for the New Earth.
My experience has been that even with this inner knowing, awakening people often hear the word Lightworker and feel that term is referring to someone else. They believe that a Lightworker must be someone special, someone who is far more adept then they are at invoking the Light of God on behalf of Humanity. Many times this misunderstanding prevents people from taking the action they are capable of taking and from trusting themselves enough to do what their heart is encouraging them to do.
During this auspicious moment on Earth, every person on the planet is capable of being a Lightworker. KNOW that it is not by chance that your I AM Presence has magnetized this information into your sphere of awareness. You are reading these words because YOU are a Lightworker! Please take this information into your heart-of-hearts, and ask your I AM Presence what your part is in this vitally important facet of the unfolding Divine Plan.
The Need of the Hour
The Company of Heaven has assured us that the meltdown that is occurring in the global economy is a necessary part of Humanity's cleansing process. For aeons of time, our monetary system has been used to manipulate, control, dominate, and abuse the peoples of the world. Now that the archetypes for God's Infinite Abundance and Eternal Peace have been anchored in the physical plane, everything that conflicts with those patterns of perfection is being pushed to the surface to be healed and transmuted into Light.
There are people in positions of power around the planet who are scrambling to try and hold on to the old monetary system, which is crumbling before our very eyes. This obsolete paradigm was based in greed, selfishness, corruption, and the abuse of power. These behavior patterns cannot and will not be sustained within the 5th-Dimensional frequencies of the New Earth. Too many people have awakened, and as a result of this monumental shift of consciousness, the Light of God has reclaimed this Earth.
Fortunately, there are also people in positions of power who are very aware of what is taking place. These enlightened souls are cocreating a new monetary system. This system will be based in integrity, generosity, fairness, compassion, and the highest good for all concerned. It will rise out of the ashes of our obsolete monetary system like a mighty Phoenix.
In order for the pain and suffering involved with the collapse of the old monetary system to be cleared and transmuted as quickly as possible, Lightworkers are being called into action. Our unified efforts will allow this purging process to be accomplished much sooner than seems possible from outer appearances. Many experts believe the painful effects of the present purging of our global economy will take years to overcome. But the Company of Heaven has assured us that the unified efforts of the Lightworkers can complete this process "in the
twinkling of an eye."
Beloved Ones, accomplishing this mighty feat is the greatest need of the hour.
Once this facet of the Divine Plan is complete, the patterns of perfection for the New Earth will easily expand through the hearts and minds of all Humanity. This will enable our Divine Birthright to be restored. That Birthright is the perpetual flow of God's Infinite Abundance and Eternal Peace.
A Divine Plan has been set in motion to accomplish this vitally important mission. The Company of Heaven is invoking Lightworkers around the world to come together both physically and in consciousness to fulfill this plan. If you are reading these words, your I AM Presence is revealing that you have a part to play in this unfolding Divine Plan.
Listen to your heart. Your I AM Presence will guide you unerringly. Your part of the plan will be revealed to you. You will know in your heart-of-hearts how you can best add to the Light of the world during these end times. When you respond to your heart's call, you will be God in Action, and you will fulfill your part of the plan by quickly transmuting the surfacing negativity.
The Divine Plan
In order to accomplish this facet of the Divine Plan, our Father-Mother God and the Beings of Light in the Realms of Illumined Truth are sending forth a Clarion Call to all embodied Lightworkers. We are being asked to gather within the portal of the most powerful 5th-Dimensional frequencies of healing and transmutation on Earth. This Portal of Light in Tucson, Arizona, is the location on the planet where the Flame of Healing Through the Power of Infinite Transmutation is projected from the core of Creation into the center of the Earth. From the heart of Mother Earth, this Sacred Fire expands through the Crystal Grid System to bless all Life.
The Flame of Healing Through the Power of Infinite Transmutation is a resplendent emerald green flame with a violet radiance. It is the most powerful frequency of healing and transmutation on Earth, and it is the instrument through which Humanity's surfacing miscreations will be transmuted into Light at a greatly accelerated pace.
The Company of Heaven is asking Lightworkers from all over the world to gather within this Portal of Light to unite our Heart Flames. Together we will form a mighty transformer through which the Light of God will flow to accomplish the most powerful healing and transmuting of Humanity's miscreation ever to manifest in the history of time.
It is critical that Lightworkers from around the world be physically present in order to form this transformer. All of the Lightworkers who have been prepared to serve in this wondrous way on behalf of Humanity and all Life on this sweet Earth will know who they are through the inner promptings of their heart. Listen to your heart, and Trust your inner guidance. Your Light is urgently needed.
In addition to those inspired to be physically present, there will be Lightworkers who will join in consciousness from points of Light around the world. These Lightworkers will project the Light flowing through their Heart Flames into the Portal of Light where the Lightworkers are physically gathered; thus our unified efforts will expand a thousand times a thousandfold.
Every Lightworker will be in his or her right and perfect place. No facet of this Divine Plan is any more important than another. What is important, is that we respond to whatever our I AM Presence is guiding us to do. We must Trust and KNOW that if we are being guided to be physically present within the Portal of Healing Through the Power of Infinite Transmutation, then our I AM Presence and the Company of Heaven will assist us in paving the way. This is true whether we need assistance with time, energy or money to accomplish this facet of our
The vehicle that will be used for this gathering of Lightworkers is the 23rd Annual World Congress on Illumination. This event will take place August 15-20, 2009, during the 22nd anniversary of Harmonic Convergence. We will gather at the beautiful Loews Ventana Canyon Resort in Tucson, Arizona. This exquisite resort exists within the heart of the Portal of Healing Through the Power of Infinite Transmutation. All of the information you will need to participate in this unprecedented opportunity is posted on this link: http://eraofpeace.org/world-congress.php
This article is copyrighted, but you have my permission to share it through any medium as long as the proper credit line is included.
Patricia Diane Cota-Robles' New Age Study of Humanity's Purpose ia a 501 (c) 3 nonprofit educational organization. Website: http://eraofpeace.org ~ FAX: 520-751-2981; Phone: 520-885-7909 ~ New Age Study of Humanity's Purpose, PO Box 41883, Tucson, Arizona 85717
The information in this monthly sharing is being given to Humanity by the Beings of Light in the Realms of Illumined Truth. The Divine Intent of these celestial sharings is to encourage, empower, uplift and inspire Humanity by allowing us to see the bigger picture during these wondrous but often challenging times.
NEW WEEKLY ONLINE RADIO PROGRAM: AWAKEN YOUR DIVINE POTENTIAL with host, Patricia Diane Cota-Robles. The program airs on Tuesdays at 10:00 a.m. Pacific Time or 1:00 p.m. Eastern Time You may access the radio show directly from our website: http://eraofpeace.org ~ Or you may go to our Online server: STATION 1, http://bbsradio.com. After the radio show airs, you can make arrangements to listen to it through the Online archives at http://bbsradio.com
This is a commercial-free hour during which we join hearts with thousands of Lightworkers all over the planet. Together, we invoke the Company of Heaven and add to the Light of the world. As we experience the sacred knowledge that is being given to Humanity by the Beings of Light in the Realms of Illumined Truth, we will remember who we are, and we will know how to fulfill our purpose and reason for being. During our sacred time together, we work in the Eternal Moment of NOW. That means that whether you are able to tune in with us live or you are listening to the radio program through our on-demand archives service, your precious Light is being woven into our Forcefield of Light. Your sacred gifts are added to this unified Divine Mission, which is being cocreated by embodied Lightworkers and the Legions of Light throughout Infinity.
Lawmakers in New Hampshire are telling the federal government to back off because plans for a federal handgun license, "hate crimes" laws to regulate Christians' speech about their own religious beliefs on homosexuality, President Obama's youth corps for mandatory public service and the so-called "Fairness Doctrine" to "balance" talk radio are none of them constitutional.
Such plans by the bureaucrats and administrators in Washington, D.C., are "altogether void" and if mandated, "shall constitute a nullification of the Constitution for the United States," the lawmakers are warning. The terse alarm is contained in House Concurrent Resolution 6, which has been introduced for debate. It affirms states' rights "based on Jeffersonian principles."
It's not the first such move in the United States. WND reported last year when state representatives in Oklahoma, steamed over a perceived increase in federal usurping of states' rights, approved Joint House Resolution 1089 on a 92-3 vote to reassert the state's sovereignty under the 10th Amendment and serve "notice to the federal government to cease and desist certain mandates."
According to DailyPaul.com, a website assembled in support of U.S. Rep. Ron Paul, Missouri, Washington and Arizona also have moved in the direction of reasserting states' rights.
The Tenth Amendment states, "The powers not delegated to the United States by the Constitution, nor prohibited by it to the states, are reserved to the states respectively, or to the people," and also is being cited in the New Hampshire plan. It states that New Hampshire people "have the sole and exclusive right of governing themselves as a free, sovereign, and independent State; and do, and forever hereafter shall, exercise and enjoy every power, jurisdiction, and right, pertaining thereto, which is not, or may not hereafter be, by them expressly delegated to the United States of America."
That means, the resolution states, any "Act by the Congress of the United States, Executive Order of the President of the United States of American or Judicial Order by the Judicatories of the United States of America which assumes a power not delegated to the government . and which serves to diminish the liberty of the any of the several States or their citizens shall constitute a nullification of the Constitution for the United States of America by the government of the United States of America."
It lists as actions that the federal government would be prohibited from doing:
a.. Establishing martial law or a state of emergency within one of the States comprising the United States of America without the consent of the legislature of that State.
b.. Requiring involuntary servitude, or governmental service other than a draft during a declared war, or pursuant to, or as an alternative to, incarceration after due process of law.
c.. Requiring involuntary servitude or governmental service of persons under the age of 18 other than pursuant to, or as an alternative to, incarceration after due process of law.
d.. Surrendering any power delegated or not delegated to any corporation or foreign government.
e.. Any act regarding religion; further limitations on freedom of political speech; or further limitations on freedom of the press.
f.. Further infringements on the right to keep and bear arms including prohibitions of type or quantity of arms or ammunition.
New Hampshire Rep. Dan Itse, a sponsor of the resolution, said he wants New Hampshire to be among the states "standing up to the federal government, enforcing the Constitution." He called the current status in the United States, with federal rules and regulations reaching into virtually every facet of a state citizen's life, "a usurpation by the federal judiciary of the people's right of self-government. What I see happening is a growing disregard for the rights of individuals and the rights of the states. At some point you have to draw the line," he told WND.
The resolution then, he said, is a warning. "If you're in a marriage, and things are going rotten, it's not right just to all of a sudden hand the other party divorce papers. The right thing to do is say, 'there's a problem. Let's go to counseling.' This is in essence telling the general government if you continue down this road - you will have nullified the Constitution," he told WND. He said New Hampshire lawmakers already have defied the federal government in approving a ban on the Real ID, a government program to stiffen identity procedures.
The New Hampshire resolution points out that New Hampshire was set up as "a free, sovereign and independent body-politic, or State" and when its residents ratified the U.S. Constitution they recommended: "That it be Explicitly declared that all Powers not expressly & particularly Delegated by the aforesaid are reserved to the several States to be, by them Exercised."
In a direct attack on federal authority the resolution states:"Whensoever the General Government assumes undelegated powers, its acts are unauthoritative, void, and of no force." It cites the specific powers given the federal government in the Constitution: to deal with treason, counterfeiting and piracy.
At American Thinker, commentator Larrey Anderson wrote that the plan is pending in the legislature's State-Federal Relations and Veterans Affairs Committee, and also is supported by Rep. Paul Ingbretson, Rep. Tim Comerford, and Sen. William Denley. "Interestingly, the authors of the New Hampshire Resolution took most of the language from the document commonly known as 'Jefferson and Madison's Kentucky Resolutions of 1798,'" he wrote. "The New Hampshire Resolution boldly defends the state's (and its citizen's) rights preserved under the 9th and 10th Amendments to the Constitution." He noted a concurrent resolution lacks legal authority as a non-binding expression of the intentions of the legislature.
"Nevertheless, these four New Hampshire state legislators have shown much courage by introducing (or reintroducing) these precious principles that have been the bedrock of our republic," Anderson wrote. "Maybe HCR 6, the shot heard round little old New Hampshire, will inspire more Americans to realize the desperate need to free ourselves from an overreaching federal government. In which case, the shot heard round New Hampshire might become the next shot heard round the world."
Participants in the site's forum page said they were sending information on the resolution to lawmakers in Virginia, Mississippi, North Carolina, Michigan and other states. Several other participants said they wished their own lawmakers had such fortitude. "At least one state gets it," said one forum participant. "We must free ourselves of that which I firmly believe wants to enslave us, our own government."
The most profound spiritual traditions of ancient times perceived the manifest world, at all scales of existence as being generated and pervaded by a cosmic trinity of active, passive and neutral principles – the divine essence of the masculine, feminine and child. The Vedic sages of ancient India saw the male/active life-force energy they called the pingala and the female/passive energy they called the ida weaving around and through our chakras and the child/neutral energy they called the shushumna as channeling up through them.
When these divine masculine and feminine energies are balanced and so able to fully "birth" the divine child energies within us, the ancient sages saw the so-called kundalini energy that otherwise lies dormant at the base of the spine, surge through us enabling us to fully embody our divine nature.
The purpose of the sacred marriage between the divine feminine and masculine that the ancient peoples, such as those of Malta, enacted in their temples was thus not only to bring cosmic harmony and fertility to their land but within themselves. For such balance enables the energetic activation or "birth" of the divine child within us and the attainment of enlightenment.
When this cosmic trinity of consciousness is harmonized and fully expressed within us, we are truly "healed" and "whole" as embodied by the universal symbol of the caduceus as a representation of healing from earliest times.
For millennia, only the highest adepts understood and have attained such wholeness. But elders and mystics around the world are saying that now is the time, when we have evolved to a point where we are all able to awaken our inner divinity. This is our spiritual destiny at the dawning of the Age of Aquarius.
End of This Age, courtesy of San Francisco Sentinel
In mid February, we are offered cosmic support to this re-membering of who we really are, by a rare astrological concentration that brings together a number of planets together with the North Node – denoting higher purpose – in Aquarius. And which energizes and inspires the possibility for transcendental breakthrough and healing.
We measure our global sense of both space (longitude) and time (universal time – UT or GMT) from the prime meridian located at Greenwich, England. We can perceive the collective influence of this momentous astrological event by looking at the alignment from this globally "centered" perspective. When we do, something extraordinary and exquisite emerges.
At dawn on 14th February, the day dedicated to St Valentine the patron saint of Love, the Moon in Libra enters the seventh house of relationships. And Jupiter and Mars are aligned in Aquarius in the twelfth house of spiritual transformation. Forty years ago, the intuitive words of a song called Aquarius, brought the dawning of the new age into our collective awareness:
When the Moon is in the seventh house
And Jupiter aligns with Mars.
Then peace will guide the planets
And love will steer the stars.
At dawn on 14th February the Cosmos actually embodies this perfect alignment to support our collective manifestation of love and peace and the dawning of the Age of Aquarius.
The Aquarian chart of 14th February reveals an incredible concentration of cosmic influences blending with the energies of Aquarius in the twelfth house. Expansive Jupiter and energetic Mars are aligned with the higher purpose of the North Node. The presence of Chiron the wounded healer offers us the opportunity to heal the schisms that have separated us for so long. Neptune emphasizes collective humanitarian movements and the co-creation of social justice. And the presence of the radiant Sun enlightens the entire alignment. Mercury also in the twelfth house but just beyond the cusp in Capricorn, allies with transformational Pluto to communicate and anchor the Shift throughout our global structures and institutions.
The Moon in Libra in the seventh house emphasizes harmonious, real relationships. Venus in Aries in the first house energizes and empowers dynamic co-creativity. And whilst Saturn the great task master in opposition to Uranus the unexpected awakener is suggesting an ongoing confrontation as the dregs of the unsustainable old paradigm reluctantly give way to the untested hope of the new, their placements in Virgo and Pisces brings practical altruism and visionary inspiration to the transition.
Alignment view from the horizon
At 7.25am on 14th February – and for the 18 minutes of the alignment – I invite you, in the universal heart, to add your own intention for love and peace and to co-create the dawning of the Age of Aquarius to that of the Cosmos. In whatever way feels appropriate for you, you may choose to align with 7.25am (UT) or 7.25am your own local time energizing a wave of intention that will surge around the Earth.
Having searched for over a thousand years, I can find no other alignments in the past of this incredible significance. But amazingly, at one moment in time nearly fifty years ago, the collective voices of our ancient ancestors seem to have been given such a cosmic voice to energetically seed this coming Age and the birth of the Aquarian human.
In 1962 at the same time on the same day, as 2009, Jupiter and Mars were in Aquarius in the twelfth house and the Moon in the seventh house. But then the awesome concentration of planets that energize the 2009 alignment was missing. And instead of the North Node (higher purpose) being aligned with Jupiter and Mars as it is in 2009, it was in opposition. What this means is that back in 1962, it was the so-called south node rather than the north node that was aligned with Jupiter and Mars. The south node represents what we bring in from the past. So in 1962 the potential for us the birth the Age of Aquarius came through from our collective race memory - but only now are we able to fully manifest its higher purpose. In 1962 we essentially took a collective in-breath of possibility and now with the cosmic support of the Aquarian alignment of 14th February 2009 we are able to take the out-breath and make it happen.
The second verse of the song Aquarius is:
Harmony and understanding
Sympathy and trust abounding
No more falsehoods or derisions
Golden living dreams of visions
Magic crystal revelation
And the minds true liberation
In our sacred journey to Malta, see below, we will join our voices to those of our ancestors and all the peacemakers throughout the millennia that hoped for and sought to co-create Heaven on Mother Earth. Their intentions and hard work kept the possibility of this vision alive. And in our time, we have the opportunity to realize their dreams and ours and enable a HoMecoming for us all!
To find out more about the Sacred Journey to Malta: Awakening to the Great Creative Mystery in the Heart of the Mediterranean with Jude Currivan, Ph.D., full details are available at www.greatmystery.org/events/malta09.html ~ http://www.judecurrivan.com. For more information on The Great Rethinking / Prophets Conference visit www.greatmystery.org. Jude Currivan, Ph.D., along with Robin and Cody Johnson, will be guiding The Prophets Conference Sacred Journey to Malta: Awakening to the Great Creative Mystery in the Heart of the Mediterranean, May 22-29, 2009.
THE LONG AND LARGELY UNTOLD HISTORY OF JEWISH OPPOSITION TO ZIONISM
By Allan C. Brownfeld, December 2008
WHILE MANY in Israel and in Jewish communities here and in other countries now promote the idea that Zionism and Judaism are, in effect, the same, and that opposition to Zionism constitutes "anti-Semitism," the historical—largely untold—fact is that, for most of its history, Zionism has been a decidedly minority movement among Jews throughout the world.
Members of the ultra-Orthodox and anti-Zionist Neturei Karta (Guards of the Walls) join a Nov. 6, 2007 demonstration in Jerusalem against the city's policy of demolishing Palestinian homes (AFP photo/Menahem Kahana).
Since its inception as a political movement in 1897, both Reform and Orthodox Jews have rejected Zionism's basic premise of creating a Jewish state in Palestine and having Jews either emigrate to it or, at the very least, view it as "central" to their Jewish identity.
An overwhelming majority of Orthodox Jews, unwilling to accept the restoration of a Jewish state in Palestine by means other than divine intervention, considered Zionism a false messianic movement. Most Jewish liberals and socialists, having accepted the ideals of the Enlightenment, with its emphasis in optimism, reason and progress, rejected Zionism as a reactionary philosophy. Acculturated Jews in Western and Central Europe who regarded themselves simply as members of a religious community, rejected the notion that their nationality was not English, French or German—but "Jewish."
Reform Judaism's position was quite contrary to that promulgated by Zionism. The most articulate spokesman for the German Reform movement, the distinguished rabbi and scholar Abraham Geiger (1810-1874), argued that Judaism developed through an evolutionary process that had begun with God's revelation to the Hebrew prophets. That revelation was progressive, with new truth becoming available to every generation. According to Geiger, the underlying and unchangeable essence of Judaism was its morality, and the core of Judaism was ethical monotheism. He considered the Jewish people a religious community, destined to carry on the mission to "serve as a light to the nations," to bear witness to God and His moral law. The dispersion of the Jews was not a punishment for their sins, in Geiger's view, but a part of God's plan whereby they were to disseminate the universal message of ethical monotheism throughout the world. Indeed, in a Reform prayerbook he edited in 1854 Geiger deleted all prayers about a return to Zion.
American Reform Judaism, in the 1885 Pittsburgh Platform, rejected Jewish nationalism. Its fifth paragraph declared: "We consider ourselves no longer a nation but a religious community."
On March 4, 1919 Julius Kahn, a Jewish congressman from San Fransisco, delivered to President Woodrow Wilson a statement endorsed by 299 prominent Jewish Americans denouncing the Zionists for attempting to segregate Jews and reverse the historic trend toward emancipation. It objected to the creation of a distinctly Jewish state in Palestine because such a political entity would be contrary "to the principles of democracy."
On April 20, 1922, Rabbi David Philipson, testifying before the House Foreign Affairs Committee, rejected the characterization of Palestine "as the national home of the Jewish people." He insisted that, "No land can be spoken of as the national home of the Jewish people, as Jews are nationals of many lands."
An important new book, A Threat From Within: A Century of Jewish Opposition to Zionism (available from the AET Book Club) by Professor Yakov M. Rabkin, professor of history at the University of Montreal, sheds significant light on Jewish religious opposition to Zionism. After completing his university education, Dr. Rabkin studied Judaism with rabbis in Montreal, Paris and Jerusalem. He brings a lifetime of study and experience to his subject.
Noting that "the rejection of Zionism is often interpreted as an act of treachery toward the Jewish people," Rabkin explains that "'Zionism' was an invention of intellectuals and assimilated Jews...who turned their back on the rabbis and aspired to modernity, seeking desperately for a remedy for their existential anxiety."
Zionism gained support in areas where social and political conditions were unfavorable to Jews, particularly within the Russian Empire. Indeed, Rabkin argues, Zionism has far more in common with the emerging nationalisms which swept Europe in the late 19th and early 20th centuries than with anything to be found in Jewish tradition.
Many today forget the fact that, as Rabkin writes, "Zionism constitutes the most radical revolution in Jewish history. Opposition to this nationalist conceptualization of the Jew and of Jewish history was as intense as it was immediate. Even those rabbis who at first encouraged settlement in Palestine in the closing decades of the 19th century felt obliged to turn against Zionism. What made the Jews unique, they declared, was neither the territory of Eretz Israel nor the Hebrew language, but the Torah and the practice of mitzvahs. The pious Jews of Palestine—the only kind before Zionist settlement—enjoyed a certain degree of autonomy granted by the sultan. They had never contemplated national status, a concept as foreign to the Palestinian Jews as it was to the Ottoman authorities in Istanbul."
In the early 20th century, the reaction to Zionism among both Orthodox and Reform Jews was overwhelming. The French rabbis were unanimous. Zionism was "narrow-minded and reactionary." They refused to recognize Jews as a separate political nation. "We, the French Israelites, have a fatherland and we intend to keep it."
Israel, the state, rather than God, has become the object of worship for many Jews at the present time, Rabkin notes. Indeed, Zionism not only has changed Jewish life, but has shifted the meaning of the word "Israel." According to Rabbi Jacob Neusner, an American academic and one of the most prolific interpreters of Judaism, "The word ‘Israel' today generally refers to the overseas political nation, the State of Israel. When people say, ‘I am going to Israel,' they mean a trip to Tel Aviv or Jerusalem...[But] the prayers that Judaism teaches, all use the word ‘Israel' to mean ‘the holy community.'"
In his book, Transformation, Rabbi Israel Domb writes: "It manifestly is absurd to believe that we have been waiting for 2000 years in so much anguish and with such high hopes and with so many heartfelt prayers merely in order to finish up by playing the same role in the world as an Albania or Honduras. Is it not the height of futility, to believe that all the streams of blood and tears, to which we ourselves can bear witness in our own time apart from the testimony of our ancestors, should have been fated to the acquisition of this kind of nationhood which the Rumanians or Czechs, for instance, have achieved to a greater extent of success without all these preparations."
Professor Rabkin points out in A Threat From Within that many positions taken by anti-Zionists are close to those of the Israeli "peace camp." For example, a Neturei Karta document asserts: "The Zionist movement was not only a heretical departure from Judaism...It was monstrously blind to the indigenous inhabitants of the Holy Land. In the 1890s, less than 5% of the Holy Land's population was Jewish, yet Theodor Herzl...described his movement as that of ‘a people without a land for a land without a people'...They have dispossessed thousands...and plunged the region into its never-ending spiral of bloodshed."
No one who reads Yakov Rabkin's thoroughly researched book will ever again believe that Zionism and Judaism are the same, or that Zionism enjoys the level of support among Jews in the United States and elsewhere in the world which it claims.
Allan C. Brownfeld is a syndicated columnist and associate editor of the Lincoln Review, a journal published by the Lincoln Institute for Research and Education, and editor of Issues, the quarterly journal of the American Council for Judaism. www.wrmea.org/archives/December_2008/0812054.html